Instruction manual - Emotron

Emotron FDU 2.0 

AC drive 

Instruction manual 

English 

Software version 4.3X

Emotron FDU 2.0 

INSTRUCTION MANUAL - ENGLISH 

Software version 4.3X 

Document number: 01-5325-01 

Edition: r1 

Date of release: 02-07-2012 

© Copyright CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB 2005 - 2012 

CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB retains the right to change 

specifications and illustrations in the text, without prior notification. The 

contents of this document may not be copied without the explicit 

permission of CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB.

Safety Instructions 

Congratulations for choosing a product from CG Drives & 

Automation! 

Before you begin with installation, commissioning or 

powering up the unit for the first time it is very important 

that you carefully study this Instruction manual. 

Following symbols can appear in this manual. Always read 

these first before continuing: 

NOTE: Additional information as an aid to avoid 

problems. 

! 

CAUTION! 

Failure to follow these instructions can result 

in malfunction or damage to the AC drive. 

Warning! 


in serious injury to the user in addition to 

serious damage to the AC drive. 

HOT SURFACE! 


in injury to the user. 

Handling the AC drive 

Installation, commissioning, demounting, taking 

measurements, etc, of or on the AC drive may only be 

carried out by personnel technically qualified for the task. 

A number of national, regional and local regulations govern 

handling, storage and installation of the equipment. Always 

observe current rules and legislation. 

Opening the AC drive 

WARNING! 

Always switch off the mains voltage before 

opening the AC drive and wait at least 

7minutes to allow the buffer capacitors to 

discharge. 

Always take adequate precautions before opening the AC 

drive. Although the connections for the control signals and 

the switches are isolated from the main voltage, do not 

touch the control board when the AC drive is switched on. 

Precautions to be taken with a 

connected motor 

If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the 

driven machine, the mains voltage must always be 

disconnected from the AC drive first. Wait at least 7 minutes 

before starting work. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 

Earthing 

The AC drive must always be earthed via the mains safety 

earth connection. 

Earth leakage current 

CAUTION! 

This AC drive has an earth leakage current 

! 

which does exceed 3.5 mA AC. Therefore the 

minimum size of the protective earth 

conductor must comply with the local safety regulations 

for high leakage current equipment which means that 

according the standard IEC61800-5-1 the protective 

earth connection must be assured by one of following 

conditions: 

PE conductor cross-sectional area shall for cable size 

< 16mm 2 be equal to the used phase conductors, for 

cable size above 16mm 2 but smaller or equal to 35mm 2 

the PE conductor cross-sectional area shall be at least 

16mm2 . For cables >35mm 2 the PE conductor crosssectional 

area should be at least 50% of the used phase 

conductor. 

When the PE conductor in the used cable type is not in 

accordance with the above mentioned cross-sectional 

area requirements, a separate PE conductor should be 

used to establish this. 

Residual current device (RCD) 

compatibility 

This product cause a DC current in the protective 

conductor. Where a residual current device (RCD) is used 

for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only a 

Type B RCD is allowed on the supply side of this product. 

Use RCD of 300 mA minimum. 

EMC Regulations 

In order to comply with the EMC Directive, it is absolutely 

necessary to follow the installation instructions. All 

installation descriptions in this manual follow the EMC 

Directive. 

Mains voltage selection 

The AC drive may be ordered for use with the mains voltage 

range listed below. 

FDU48: 230-480 V 

FDU52: 440-525 V 

FDU69: 500-690 V 

Voltage tests (Megger) 

Do not carry out voltage tests (Megger) on the motor, before 

all the motor cables have been disconnected from the AC 

drive.

Condensation 

If the AC drive is moved from a cold (storage) room to a 

room where it will be installed, condensation can occur. 

This can result in sensitive components becoming damp. Do 

not connect the mains voltage until all visible dampness has 

evaporated. 

Incorrect connection 

The AC drive is not protected against incorrect connection 

of the mains voltage, and in particular against connection of 

the mains voltage to the motor outlets U, V and W. The AC 

drive can be damaged in this way. 

Power factor capacitors for improving 

cos� 

Remove all capacitors from the motor and the motor outlet. 

Precautions during Autoreset 

When the automatic reset is active, the motor will restart 

automatically provided that the cause of the trip has been 

removed. If necessary take the appropriate precautions. 

Transport 

To avoid damage, keep the AC drive in its original 

packaging during transport. This packaging is specially 

designed to absorb shocks during transport. 

IT Mains supply 

The AC drives can be modified for an IT mains supply, 

(non-earthed neutral), please contact your supplier for 

details. 

Alarms 

Never disregard an alarm. Always check and remedy the 

cause of an alarm. 

Heat warning 

HOT SURFACE! 

Be aware of specific parts on the AC drive 

having high temperature. 

DC-link residual voltage 

WARNING! 

After switching off the mains supply, 

dangerous voltage can still be present in the 

AC drive. When opening the AC drive for 

installing and/or commissioning activities 

wait at least 7 minutes. In case of malfunction a 

qualified technician should check the DC-link or wait for 

one hour before dismantling the AC drive for repair. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

Contents 

Safety Instructions 

Contents.......................................................... 5 

1. Introduction..................................................... 7 

1.1 Delivery and unpacking ............................................ 7 

1.2 Using of the instruction manual............................... 7 

1.3 Warranty .................................................................... 7 

1.4 Type code number..................................................... 7 

1.5 Standards .................................................................. 8 

1.5.1 Product standard for EMC ........................................ 8 

1.6 Dismantling and scrapping....................................... 9 

1.6.1 Disposal of old electrical and electronic 

equipment ................................................................. 9 

1.7 Glossary ................................................................... 10 

1.7.1 Abbreviations and symbols..................................... 10 

1.7.2 Definitions................................................................ 10 

2. Mounting ...................................................... 11 

2.1 Lifting instructions................................................... 11 

2.2 Stand-alone units.................................................... 12 

2.2.1 Cooling ..................................................................... 12 

2.2.2 Mounting schemes.................................................. 12 

2.3 Cabinet mounting.................................................... 15 

2.3.1 Cooling ..................................................................... 15 

2.3.2 Recommended free space in front of cabinet ...... 15 

2.3.3 Mounting schemes.................................................. 16 

3. Installation ................................................... 19 

3.1 Before installation................................................... 19 

3.2 Cable connections for model 003 to 074 ............. 19 

3.2.1 Mains cables ........................................................... 19 

3.2.2 Motor cables............................................................ 20 

3.3 Connection of motor and mains cables for model 

090 and up.............................................................. 22 

3.3.1 Connection of mains and motor cables on IP20 

modules ................................................................... 23 

3.4 Cable specifications................................................ 24 

3.5 Stripping lengths ..................................................... 24 

3.5.1 Dimension of cables and fuses.............................. 25 

3.5.2 Tightening torque for mains and motor cables..... 25 

3.6 Thermal protection on the motor ........................... 25 

3.7 Motors in parallel .................................................... 25 

4. Control Connections.................................... 27 

4.1 Control board........................................................... 27 

4.2 Terminal connections ............................................. 28 

4.3 Inputs configurationwith the switches................... 28 

4.4 Connection example ............................................... 29 

4.5 Connecting the Control Signals.............................. 30 

4.5.1 Cables ...................................................................... 30 

4.5.2 Types of control signals .......................................... 31 

4.5.3 Screening................................................................. 31 

4.5.4 Single-ended or double-ended connection? ......... 31 

4.5.5 Current signals ((0)4-20 mA).................................. 32 

4.5.6 Twisted cables......................................................... 32 

4.6 Connecting options ................................................. 32 

5. Getting Started............................................. 33 

5.1 Connect the mains and motor cables ................... 33 

5.1.1 Mains cables ........................................................... 33 

5.1.2 Motor cables............................................................ 33 

5.2 Using the function keys .......................................... 33 

5.3 Remote control........................................................ 34 

5.3.1 Connect control cables ........................................... 34 

5.3.2 Switch on the mains ............................................... 34 

5.3.3 Set the Motor Data.................................................. 34 

5.3.4 Run the AC drive...................................................... 34 

5.4 Local control............................................................ 35 

5.4.1 Switch on the mains ............................................... 35 

5.4.2 Select manual control............................................. 35 

5.4.3 Set the Motor Data.................................................. 35 

5.4.4 Enter a Reference Value......................................... 35 

5.4.5 Run the AC drive...................................................... 35 

6. Applications.................................................. 37 

6.1 Application overview ............................................... 37 

6.1.1 Pumps...................................................................... 37 

6.1.2 Fans ......................................................................... 37 

6.1.3 Compressors ........................................................... 38 

6.1.4 Blowers .................................................................... 38 

7. Main Features .............................................. 39 

7.1 Parameter sets........................................................ 39 

7.1.1 One motor and one parameter set ........................ 40 

7.1.2 One motor and two parameter sets....................... 40 

7.1.3 Two motors and two parameter sets..................... 40 

7.1.4 Autoreset at trip ...................................................... 40 

7.1.5 Reference priority.................................................... 41 

7.1.6 Preset references.................................................... 41 

7.2 Remote control functions ....................................... 42 

7.3 Performing an Identification Run........................... 44 

7.4 Using the Control Panel Memory............................ 44 

7.5 Load Monitor and Process Protection [400]......... 45 

7.5.1 Load Monitor [410]................................................. 45 

7.6 Pump function ......................................................... 47 

7.6.1 Introduction ............................................................. 47 

7.6.2 Fixed MASTER ......................................................... 48 

7.6.3 Alternating MASTER ................................................ 48 

7.6.4 Feedback 'Status' input .......................................... 49 

7.6.5 Fail safe operation .................................................. 49 

7.6.6 PID control ............................................................... 50 

7.6.7 Wiring Alternating Master....................................... 51 

7.6.8 Checklist And Tips................................................... 52 

7.6.9 Functional Examples of Start/Stop Transitions .... 53 

8. EMC and standards...................................... 55 

8.1 EMC standards........................................................ 55 

8.2 Stop categories and emergency stop .................... 55 

9. Operation via the Control Panel.................. 57 

9.1 General .................................................................... 57 

9.2 The control panel .................................................... 57 

9.2.1 The display............................................................... 57 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 5

9.2.2 Indications on the display....................................... 58 

9.2.3 LED indicators ......................................................... 58 

9.2.4 Control keys............................................................. 58 

9.2.5 The Toggle and Loc/Rem Key ................................ 59 

9.2.6 Function keys .......................................................... 60 

9.3 The menu structure................................................. 60 

9.3.1 The main menu ....................................................... 60 

9.4 Programming during operation .............................. 61 

9.5 Editing values in a menu ........................................ 61 

9.6 Copy current parameter to all sets ........................ 61 

9.7 Programming example............................................ 62 

10. Serial communication ................................. 63 

10.1 Modbus RTU ............................................................ 63 

10.2 Parameter sets........................................................ 63 

10.3 Motor data ............................................................... 64 

10.4 Start and stop commands...................................... 64 

10.5 Reference signal ..................................................... 64 

10.5.1 Process value .......................................................... 64 

10.6 Description of the EInt formats .............................. 65 

11. Functional Description ............................... 67 

11.1 Preferred View [100]............................................... 67 

11.1.1 1st Line [110].......................................................... 67 

11.1.2 2nd Line [120] ........................................................ 68 

11.2 Main Setup [200].................................................... 68 

11.2.1 Operation [210]....................................................... 68 

11.2.2 Remote Signal Level/Edge [21A]........................... 72 

11.2.3 Mains supply voltage [21B].................................... 72 

11.2.4 Motor Data [220] .................................................... 73 

11.2.5 Motor Protection [230] ........................................... 79 

11.2.6 Parameter Set Handling [240]............................... 83 

11.2.7 Trip Autoreset/Trip Conditions [250]..................... 85 

11.2.8 Serial Communication [260] .................................. 93 

11.3 Process and Application Parameters [300] .......... 97 

11.3.1 Set/View Reference Value [310] ........................... 97 

11.3.2 Process Settings [320] ........................................... 98 

11.3.3 Start/Stop settings [330] ..................................... 102 

11.3.4 Mechanical brake control..................................... 107 

11.3.5 Speed [340]........................................................... 111 

11.3.6 Torques [350]........................................................ 113 

11.3.7 Preset References [360] ...................................... 116 

11.3.8 PID Process Control [380] .................................... 117 

11.3.9 Pump/Fan Control [390] ...................................... 121 

11.4 Load Monitor and Process Protection [400]....... 128 

11.4.1 Load Monitor [410]............................................... 128 

11.4.2 Process Protection [420]...................................... 133 

11.5 I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]..................... 134 

11.5.1 Analogue Inputs [510] .......................................... 134 

11.5.2 Digital Inputs [520] ............................................... 141 

11.5.3 Analogue Outputs [530] ....................................... 143 

11.5.4 Digital Outputs [540] ............................................ 147 

11.5.5 Relays [550] .......................................................... 149 

11.5.6 Virtual Connections [560]..................................... 151 

11.6 Logical Functions and Timers [600] .................... 152 

11.6.1 Comparators [610] ............................................... 152 

11.6.2 Logic Output Y [620]............................................. 162 

11.6.3 Logic Output Z [630]............................................. 164 

11.6.4 Timer1 [640] ......................................................... 165 

11.6.5 Timer2 [650] ......................................................... 167 

11.6.6 Counters [660]...................................................... 169 

11.7 View Operation/Status [700] ............................... 172 

11.7.1 Operation [710]..................................................... 172 

11.7.2 Status [720] .......................................................... 174 

11.7.3 Stored values [730] .............................................. 178 

11.8 View Trip Log [800] ............................................... 179 

11.8.1 Trip Message log [810]......................................... 179 

11.8.2 Trip Messages [820] - [890] ................................ 180 

11.8.3 Reset Trip Log [8A0] ............................................. 180 

11.9 System Data [900]................................................ 181 

11.9.1 VSD Data [920] ..................................................... 181 

12. Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and 

Maintenance .............................................. 183 

12.1 Trips, warnings and limits..................................... 183 

12.2 Trip conditions, causes and remedial action ...... 184 

12.2.1 Technically qualified personnel............................ 185 

12.2.2 Opening the AC drive ............................................ 185 

12.2.3 Precautions to take with a connected motor ...... 185 

12.2.4 Autoreset Trip ........................................................ 185 

12.3 Maintenance ......................................................... 189 

13. Options........................................................ 191 

13.1 Options for the control panel................................ 191 

13.2 Handheld Control Panel 2.0................................. 191 

13.3 EmoSoftCom.......................................................... 191 

13.4 Brake chopper....................................................... 192 

13.5 I/O Board ............................................................... 193 

13.6 Encoder.................................................................. 193 

13.7 PTC/PT100 ............................................................ 193 

13.8 Serial communication and fieldbus..................... 194 

13.9 Standby supply board option................................ 194 

13.10 Safe Stop option.................................................... 195 

13.11 Output chokes ....................................................... 197 

13.12 Liquid cooling ........................................................ 197 

13.13 AFE - Active Front End........................................... 197 

14. Technical Data ........................................... 199 

14.1 Electrical specifications related to model ........... 199 

14.2 General electrical specifications.......................... 204 

14.3 Operation at higher temperatures ....................... 205 

14.4 Operation at higher switching frequency............. 205 

14.5 Dimensions and Weights...................................... 206 

14.6 Environmental conditions..................................... 207 

14.7 Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands.............. 208 

14.7.1 According to IEC ratings........................................ 208 

14.7.2 Fuses and cable dimensions according to 

NEMA ratings......................................................... 210 

14.8 Control signals....................................................... 212 

15. Menu List ................................................... 213 

Index ........................................................... 219 

6 CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

1. Introduction 

Emotron FDUis used most commonly to control and 

protect pump and fan applications that put high demands 

on flow control, process uptime and low maintenance costs. 

It can also be used for e.g. compressors and blowers. The 

used motor control method is V/Hz-control. 

Several options are available, listed in chapter 13. page 191, 

that enable you to customize the AC drive for your specific 

needs. 

NOTE: Read this instruction manual carefully before 

starting installation, connection or working with the AC 

drive. 

Users 

This instruction manual is intended for: 

• installation engineers 

• maintenance engineers 

• operators 

• service engineers 

Motors 

The AC drive is suitable for use with standard 3-phase 

asynchronous motors. Under certain conditions it is possible 

to use other types of motors. Contact your supplier for 

details. 

1.1 Delivery and unpacking 

Check for any visible signs of damage. Inform your supplier 

immediately of any damage found. Do not install the AC 

drive if damage is found. 

The AC drives are delivered with a template for positioning 

the fixing holes on a flat surface. Check that all items are 

present and that the type number is correct. 

1.2 Using of the instruction 

manual 

Within this instruction manual the abbreviation “AC drive” 

is used to indicate the complete variable speed drive as a 

single unit. 

Check that the software version number on the first page of 

this manual matches the software version in the AC drive. 

See chapter 11.9 page 181 

With help of the index and the table of contents it is easy to 

track individual functions and to find out how to use and set 

them. 

The Quick Setup Card can be put in a cabinet door, so that 

it is always easy to access in case of an emergency. 

1.3 Warranty 

The warranty applies when the equipment is installed, 

operated and maintained according to instructions in this 

instruction manual. Duration of warranty as per contract. 

Faults that arise due to faulty installation or operation are 

not covered by the warranty. 

1.4 Type code number 

Fig. 1 gives an example of the type code numbering used on 

all AC drives. With this code number the exact type of the 

drive can be determined. This identification will be required 

for type specific information when mounting and installing. 

The code number is located on the product label, on the 

front of the unit. 

FDU48-175-54 C E – – – A – N N N N A N – 

Position number: 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 1718 

Fig. 1 Type code number 

Position 

for 003- 

074 

Position 

for 090- 

3K0 

Configuration 

1 1 AC drive type 

2 2 Supply voltage 

3 3 

Rated current (A) 

continuous 

4 4 Protection class 

5 5 Control panel 

6 6 EMC option 

7 7 

8 8 

- 9 

Brake chopper 

option 

Stand-by power 

supply option 

Safe stop option 

(Only valid for 

090-3k0) 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Introduction 7 

FDU 

VFX 

48=400 V mains 



-003=2.5 A 

- 

-3K0=3000 A 

20=IP20 

54=IP54 

–=Blank panel 

C=Standard panel 

E=Standard EMC 

(Category C3) 

F=Extended EMC 

(Category C2) 

I=IT-Net 

–=No chopper 

B=Chopper built in 

D=DC+/- interface 

–=No SBS 

S=SBS included 

–=No safe stop 

T=Safe stop incl. 

9 10 Brand label A=Standard

Position 

for 003- 

074 

10 - Painted AC drive A=Standard paint 

11 11 

Coated boards, 

option 

- =Standard boards 

V=Coated boards 

12 12 Option position 1 N=No option 

13 13 Option position 2 

C=Crane I/O 

E=Encoder 

P=PTC/PT100 

14 14 Option position 3 

I=Extended I/O 

S=Safe Stop (only 

003-074) 

15 15 

Option position, 

communication 

N=No option 

D=DeviceNet 

P=Profibus 

S=RS232/485 

M=Modbus/TCP 

E= EtherCAT 

A=Profinet IO 1-port 

B=Profinet IO 2-port 

16 16 Software type A=Standard 

17 - 

18 - 

Position 

for 090- 

3K0 

Configuration 

Motor PTC. (Only 

valid for 003-074) 

Gland kit. 

(Only valid for 

003-074) 

N=No option 

P=PTC 

–=Glands not 

included 

G=Gland kit 

included 

1.5 Standards 

The AC drives described in this instruction manual comply 

with the standards listed in Table 1. For the declarations of 

conformity and manufacturer’s certificate, contact your 

supplier for more information or visit www.emotron.com/ 

www.cgglobal.com. 

1.5.1Product standard for EMC 

Product standard EN(IEC)61800-3, second edition of 2004 

defines the: 

First Environment (Extended EMC) as environment that 

includes domestic premises. It also includes establishments 

directly connected without intermediate transformers to a 

low voltage power supply network that supplies buildings 

used for domestic purposes. 

Category C2: Power Drive System (PDS) of rated 

voltage

Table 1 Standards 

European 

All 

USA 

Market Standard Description 

EMC Directive 2004/108/EC 

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC 

WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC 

EN 60204-1 

EN(IEC)61800-3:2004 

EN(IEC)61800-5-1 Ed. 

2.0 

IEC 60721-3-3 

1.6 Dismantling and scrapping 

The enclosures of the drives are made from recyclable 

material as aluminium, iron and plastic. Each drive contains 

a number of components demanding special treatment, for 

example electrolytic capacitors. The circuit boards contain 

small amounts of tin and lead. Any local or national 

regulations in force for the disposal and recycling of these 

materials must be complied with. 

Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines 

Part 1: General requirements. 

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems 

Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods. 

EMC Directive: Declaration of Conformity and 

CE marking 

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-1. 

Safety requirements - Electrical, thermal and energy. 

Low Voltage Directive: Declaration of Conformity and 

CE marking 

Classification of environmental conditions. Air quality chemical vapours, unit in 

operation. Chemical gases 3C2, Solid particles 3S2. 

Optional with coated boards 

Unit in operation. Chemical gases Class 3C3, Solid particles 3S2. 

UL508C UL Safety standard for Power Conversion Equipment 

�90 A only 

UL 840 

Russian GOST R For all sizes 

UL Safety standard for Power Conversion Equipment. 

Insulation coordination including clearances and creepage distances for 

electrical equipment. 

1.6.1Disposal of old electrical and 

electronic equipment 

This information is applicable in the European Union and 

other European countries with separate collection systems. 

This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates 

that this product shall be taken to the applicable collection 

point for the recycling of electrical and electronic 

equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, 

you will help prevent potentially negative consequences for 

the environment and human health, which could otherwise 

be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. 

The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural 

resources. For more detailed information about recycling 

this product, please contact the local distributor of the 

product. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Introduction 9

1.7 Glossary 

1.7.1 Abbreviations and symbols 

In this manual the following abbreviations are used: 

Table 2 Abbreviations 

Abbreviation/ 

symbol 

Description 

DSP Digital signals processor 

AC drive Frequency converter 

PEBB Power Electronic Building Block 

IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor 

CP 

Control panel, the programming and 

presentation unit on the AC drive 

HCP Handheld control panel (option) 

EInt Communication format 

UInt Communication format (Unsigned integer) 

Int Communication format (Integer) 

Long Communication format 

� 

The function cannot be changed in run mode 

1.7.2 Definitions 

In this manual the following definitions for current, torque 

and frequency are used: 

Table 3 Definitions 

Name Description Quantity 

IIN Nominal input current of AC drive ARMS INOM Nominal output current of AC drive ARMS IMOT Nominal motor current ARMS PNOM Nominal power of AC drive kW 

P MOT Motor power kW 

T NOM Nominal torque of motor Nm 

T MOT Motor torque Nm 

f OUT Output frequency of AC drive Hz 

f MOT Nominal frequency of motor Hz 

n MOT Nominal speed of motor rpm 

ICL Maximum output current ARMS Speed Actual motor speed rpm 

Torque Actual motor torque Nm 

Sync 

speed 

Synchronous speed of the motor rpm 

10 Introduction CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

2. Mounting 

This chapter describes how to mount the AC drive. 

Before mounting it is recommended that the installation is 

planned out first. 

• Be sure that the AC drive suits the mounting location. 

• The mounting site must support the weight of the AC 

drive. 

• Will the AC drive continuously withstand vibrations 

and/or shocks? 

• Consider using a vibration damper. 

• Check ambient conditions, ratings, required cooling air 

flow, compatibility of the motor, etc. 

• Know how the AC drive will be lifted and transported. 

2.1 Lifting instructions 

Note: To prevent personal risks and any damage to the 

unit during lifting, it is advised that the lifting methods 

described below are used. 

Recommended for AC drive models 

-090 to -250 

Fig. 2 Lifting AC drive model -090 to -250 

Load: 56 to 74 kg 

Recommended for AC drive models 

-300 to - 3K0 

Lifting eyes 

Fig. 3 Remove the roof unit and use the lifting eyes to lift 

single unit 600mm and 900mm. 

Single cabinet drives can be lifted/transported safely using 

the eyebolts supplied and lifting cables/chains as in 

illustration Fig. 3 above. 

Depending on the cable/chain angle A (in Fig. 3), 

following loads are permitted: 

Cable/chain angle A Permitted load 

45 ° 4 800 N 

60 ° 6 400 N 

90 ° 13 600N 

Regarding lifting instructions for other cabinet sizes, please 

contact CG Drives & Automation. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Mounting 11 

A°

2.2 Stand-alone units 

The AC drive must be mounted in a vertical position against 

a flat surface. Use the template (in the File archive on our 

homepage) to mark out the position of the fixing holes. 

Fig. 4 AC drive mounting model 003 to 3K0 

2.2.1 Cooling 

Fig. 4 shows the minimum free space required around the 

AC drive for the models 003 to 3K0 in order to guarantee 

adequate cooling. Because the fans blow the air from the 

bottom to the top it is advisable not to position an air inlet 

immediately above an air outlet. 

The following minimum separation between two AC drives, 

or a AC drive and a non-dissipating wall must be 

maintained. Valid if free space on opposite side. 

Table 4 Mounting and cooling 

FDU-FDU 

(mm) 

FDU-wall, 

wall-one 

side 

(mm) 

003-018 026-074 090-250 300-3K0 

cabinet 

a 200 200 200 100 

b 200 200 200 0 

c 0 0 0 0 

d 0 0 0 0 

a 100 100 100 100 

b 100 100 100 0 

c 0 0 0 0 

d 0 0 0 0 

NOTE: When a 300 to 3K0 model is placed between two 

walls, a minimum distance at each side of 200 mm must 

be maintained. 

2.2.2 Mounting schemes 

128.5 37 

Fig. 5 FDU48/52: Model 003 to 018 (B) 

Fig. 6 Cable interface for mains, motor and communication,FDU48/52: 

Model 003 to 018 (B) 

Fig. 7 FDU48/52: Model 003 to 018 (B), with optional 

gland plate 

12 Mounting CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 

416 

Glands 

M20 

Glands 

M32 

202.6 

10 

396 

Ø 13 (2x) 

Ø 7 (4x) 

Gland 

M16 

Gland 

M25

512 

Fig. 8 FDU48/52: Model 026 to 046 (C) 

Gland 

M25 (026-031) 

M32 (037-046) 

Glands 

M32 (026-031) 

M40 (037-046) 

128,5 

178 

Fig. 9 Cable interface for mains, motor and communication, 

FDU48/52: Model 026 to 046 (C) 

24,8 

10 

492 

Ø 13 (2x) 

Ø 7 (4x) 

292,1 

Glands 

M20 

Fig. 10 FDU48/52: Model 061 to 074 (D) 

Fig. 11 Cable interface for mains, motor and communication, 

FDU48/52: Model 061 to 074 (D). 

NOTE: Glands for size B, C and D are available as 

option kit. 


Glands 

M20 

Glands 

M50 

Glands 

M40 

10 

570 

30 160 

Ø 13 (2x) 

Ø 7 (4x) 

220 

590 

Glands 

M20

22.5 240 

120 

10 30 

925 

Ø16(3) 

Cable glands M20 

Cable flexible leadthrough 

Ø17-42 /M50 


Ø11-32 /M40 

Ø9(6x) 

952.5 

284.5 

275 

Fig. 12 FDU48: Model 090 to 175 (E) including cable interface 

for mains, motor and communication 

922.5 

314 

Cable glands M20 


Ø23-55 /M63 


Ø17-42 /M50 

22.5 300 

344.5 

150 

335 

10 30 

Fig. 13 FDU48: Model 210 to 250 (F) 

FDU69: Model 90 to 200 (F69) including cable 

interface for mains, motor and communication 

Frame FDU model 

Dimension in mm 

A B C 

F 210 - 250 925 950 920 

F69 90 - 200 1065 1090 1060 


Ø9(x6) 

A B C 

314

2.3 Cabinet mounting 

2.3.1 Cooling 

If the variable speed drive is installed in a cabinet, the rate of 

airflow supplied by the cooling fans must be taken into 

consideration. 

Frame FDU Model Flow rate [m3 /hour] 

B 003-018 75 

C 026 – 031 120 

C 037 - 046 170 

D 061-074 170 

E 090 - 175 510 

F 

F69 

210 - 250 

090 - 200 

800 

G 300 - 375 1020 

H 

H69 

430 - 500 

250 - 400 

1600 

I 

I69 

600 - 750 

430 - 595 

2400 

J 

J69 

860 - 1K0 

650 - 800 

3200 

KA 

KA69 

1K15 - 1K25 

905 - 995 

4000 

K 

K69 

1K35 - 1K5 

1K2 

4800 

L 

L69 

1K75 

1K4 

5600 

M 

M69 

2K0 

1K6 

6400 

N 

N69 

2K25 

1K8 

7200 

O 

O69 

2K5 

2K0 

8000 

P69 2K2 8800 

Q69 2K4 9600 

R69 2K6 10400 

S69 2K8 11200 

T69 3K0 12000 

NOTE: For the models 48-860/69-650 to 69-3K0 the 

mentioned amount of air flow should be divided equally 

over the cabinets. 

2.3.2 Recommended free space in 

front of cabinet 

All cabinet mounted AC drives are designed in modules, so 

called PEBBs. These PEBBs can be folded out to be 

replaced. To be able to remove a PEBB in the future, we 

recommend 1.30 meter free space in front of the cabinet, see 

Fig. 14. 

1300 

Fig. 14 Recommended free space in front of the cabinet 

mounted AC drive 


RITTAL 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

NZM3 

PN3

2.3.3 Mounting schemes 

Fig. 15 

FDU48: Model 300 to 500 (G and H) 

FDU69: Model 250 to 400 (H69) 

150 

2250 

2000 

100 

150 

2250 

2000 

100 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

FDU48: Model 860 to 1K 0(J) 

FDU69: Model 650 to 800 (J69) 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

600 

RITTAL 

1200 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

600 

RITTAL 

600 

FDU48: Model 600 to 750 (I) 

FDU69: Model 430 to 595 (I69) 

FDU48: Model 1K15 to 1K25 (KA) 

FDU69: Model 905 to 995 (KA69) 


150 

2250 

2000 

100 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

900 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

600

Fig. 16 

2250 

2000 

2250 

2000 

2250 

2000 

150 

150 

150 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

1800 

FDU48: Model 1K35 to 1K5 (K) 

FDU69: Model 1K2 (K69) 

RITTAL 

2400 

FDU48: Model 2K0(M) 

FDU69: Model 1K6 (M69) 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

3000 

FDU48: Model 2K5(O) 

FDU69: Model 2K0 (O69) 

RITTAL 

RITTAL 

600 

600 

2250 

2000 

2250 

2000 

FDU48: Model 1K75 (L) 

FDU69: Model 1K4 (L69) 


150 

150 

600 

2100 

2700 

FDU48: Model 2K25 (N) 

FDU69: Model 1K8 (N69) 

600 

600

18 Mounting CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

3. Installation 

The description of installation in this chapter complies with 

the EMC standards and the Machine Directive. 

Select cable type and screening according to the EMC 

requirements valid for the environment where the AC drive 

is installed. 

3.1 Before installation 

Read the following checklist and prepare for your 

application before installation. 

• Local or remote control. 

• Long motor cables (>100m), refer to section Long motor 

cables page 22. 

• Functions used. 

• Suitable AC drive size in proportion to the 

motor/application. 

If the AC drive is temporarily stored before being connected, 

please check the technical data for environmental 

conditions. If the AC drive is moved from a cold storage 

room to the room where it is to be installed, condensation 

can form on it. Allow the AC drive to become fully 

acclimatised and wait until any visible condensation has 

evaporated before connecting the mains voltage. 

3.2 Cable connections for 

model 003 to 074 

3.2.1 Mains cables 

Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local 

regulations. The cable must be able to carry the AC drive 

load current. 

Recommendations for selecting mains 

cables 

• To fulfil EMC purposes it is not necessary to use 

screened mains cables. 

• Use heat-resistant cables, +60�C or higher. 

• Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with local 

regulations and the nominal current of the motor. See 

table 50, page 208. 

• PE conductor cross-sectional area shall for cable size 

< 16mm 2 be equal to the used phase conductors, for 

cable size above 16mm 2 but smaller or equal to 35mm 2 

the PE conductor cross-sectional area shall be at least 

16mm 2 . For cables >35mm 2 the PE conductor cross-sectional 

area should be at least 50% of the used phase conductor. 





• The litz ground connection see fig. 21, is only necessary 

if the mounting plate is painted. All the AC drives have 

an unpainted back side and are therefore suitable for 

mounting on an unpainted mounting plate. 

Connect the mains cables according to fig. 17 or 18. The 

AC drive has as standard a built-in RFI mains filter that 

complies with category C3 which suits the Second 

Environment standard. 

L1 L2 L3 DC- DC+ R 

U V W 

Fig. 17 Mains and motor connections, model 003-018 

Fig. 18 Mains and motor connections, 026-046 

Screen connection 

of motor cables 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Installation 19 

PE 

PE 

L1 L2 L3 DC-DC+ R U V W 


of motor cables

PE 

Fig. 19 Mains and motor connection, model 061 - 074 

Table 5 Mains and motor connections 

L1,L2,L3 

PE 

U, V, W 

DC-,DC+,R 

L1 L2 L3 PE DC- DC+ R U V W 


of motor cables 

Mains supply, 3 -phase 

Safety earth (protected earth) 

Motor earth 

Motor output, 3-phase 

Brake resistor, DC-link 

connections (optional) 

NOTE: The Brake and DC-link Terminals are only fitted if 

the DC+/DC- option or Brake Chopper Option is built-in. 

WARNING! 

The Brake Resistor must be connected 

between terminals DC+ and R. 

WARNING! 

In order to work safely, the mains earth must 

be connected to PE and the motor earth 

to . 

3.2.2 Motor cables 

To comply with the EMC emission standards the AC drive 

is provided with a RFI mains filter. The motor cables must 

also be screened and connected on both sides. In this way a 

so-called “Faraday cage” is created around the AC drive, 

motor cables and motor. The RFI currents are now fed back 

to their source (the IGBTs) so the system stays within the 

emission levels. 

Recommendations for selecting motor 

cables 

• Use screened cables according to specification in table 6. 

Use symmetrical shielded cable; three phase conductors 

and a concentric or otherwise symmetrically constructed 

PE conductor, and a shield. 

• PE conductor cross-sectional area shall for cable size 

< 16mm2 be equal to the used phase conductors, for 

cable size above 16mm2 but smaller or equal to 35mm2 the PE conductor cross-sectional area shall be at least 

16mm2 . For cables >35mm2 the PE conductor crosssectional 

area should be at least 50% of the used phase 

conductor. 





• Use heat-resistant cables, +60�C or higher. 

• Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with the 

nominal output current of the motor. See table 50, page 

208. 

• Keep the motor cable between AC drive and motor as 

short as possible. 

• The screening must be connected with a large contact 

surface of preferable 360� and always at both ends, to 

the motor housing and the AC drive housing. When 

painted mounting plates are used, do not be afraid to 

scrape away the paint to obtain as large contact surface as 

possible at all mounting points for items such as saddles 

and the bare cable screening. Relying just on the 

connection made by the screw thread is not sufficient. 

NOTE: It is important that the motor housing has the 

same earth potential as the other parts of the machine. 

• The litz ground connection, see fig. 21, is only necessary 

if the mounting plate is painted. All the AC drives have 

an unpainted back side and are therefore suitable for 

mounting on an unpainted mounting plate. 

Connect the motor cables according to U - U, V - V and 

W - W, see Fig. 17, Fig. 18 and Fig. 19 . 

NOTE: The terminals DC-, DC+ and R are options. 

20 Installation CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

Switches between the motor and the 

AC drive 

If the motor cables are to be interrupted by maintenance 

switches, output coils, etc., it is necessary that the screening 

is continued by using metal housing, metal mounting plates, 

etc. as shown in the Fig. 21. 

Fig. 20 Screen connection of cables. 


of signal cables 

Pay special attention to the following points: 

• If paint must be removed, steps must be taken to prevent 

subsequent corrosion. Repaint after making connections! 

• The fastening of the whole AC drive housing must be 

electrically connected with the mounting plate over an 

area which is as large as possible. For this purpose the 

removal of paint is necessary. An alternative method is to 

connect the AC drive housing to the mounting plate 

with as short a length of litz wire as possible. 

• Try to avoid interruptions in the screening wherever 

possible. 

• If the AC drive is mounted in a standard cabinet, the 

internal wiring must comply with the EMC standard. 

Fig. 21 shows an example of a AC drive built into a 

cabinet. 

PE 

Motor cable 

shield connection 

AC drive built into cabinet 

RFI-Filter 

Mains 

AC drive 

Fig. 21 AC drive in a cabinet on a mounting plate 

Fig. 22 shows an example when there is no metal mounting 

plate used (e.g. if IP54 AC drives are used). It is important 

to keep the “circuit” closed, by using metal housing and 

cable glands. 

Fig. 22 AC drive as stand alone 

Metal EMC cable glands 

Output coil (option) 

Screened cables 

Unpainted mounting plate 

Metal connector housing 


Litz 

Mains 

(L1,L2,L3,PE) 

RFI-Filter 

Mains 

Mains 

AC drive 

Brake 

resistor 

(option) 

Motor 

Metal EMC 

coupling nut 

Brake resistor 

(option) 

Output 

coils 

(option) 

Metal cable gland 

Motor 

Metal EMC cable 

glands 


Metal housing 


Motor

Connect motor cables 

1. Remove the cable interface plate from the AC drive 

housing. 

2. Put the cables through the glands. 

3. Strip the cable according to Table 7. 

4. Connect the stripped cables to the respective motor 

terminal. 

5. Put the cable interface plate in place and secure with the 

fixing screws. 

6. Tighten the EMC gland with good electrical contact to 

the motor and brake chopper cable screens. 

Placing of motor cables 

Keep the motor cables as far away from other cables as 

possible, especially from control signals. The minimum 

distance between motor cables and control cables is 300 

mm. 

Avoid placing the motor cables in parallel with other cables. 

The power cables should cross other cables at an angle of 

90�. 

Long motor cables 

If the connection to the motor is longer than 100 m (for 

powers below 7.5 kW please contact CG Drives & 

Automation), it is possible that capacitive current peaks will 

cause tripping at overcurrent. Using output coils can prevent 

this. Contact the supplier for appropriate coils. 

Switching in motor cables 

Switching in the motor connections is not advisable. In the 

event that it cannot be avoided (e.g. emergency or 

maintenance switches) only switch if the current is zero. If 

this is not done, the AC drive can trip as a result of current 

peaks. 

3.3 Connection of motor and 

mains cables for model 

090 and up 

Emotron FDU48-090 and up, Emotron FDU69- 

090 and up 

To simplify the connection of thick motor and mains cables 

to the AC drive, the cable interface plate can be removed. 

Motor cable 

DC+, DC-, R (optional) 

Mains cable 

Fig. 23 Connecting motor and mains cables 

Clamps for screening 

Cable interface 

1. Remove the cable interface plate from the AC drive 

housing. 

2. Put the cables through the glands. 

3. Strip the cable according to Table 7. 

4. Connect the stripped cables to the respective mains/ 

motor terminal. 

5. Fix the clamps on appropriate place and tighten the 

cable in the clamp with good electrical contact to the 

cable screen. 

6. Put the cable interface plate in place and secure with the 

fixing screws. 


AC drive model 48-300 & 69-210 and up 

L1sp 

eisung 

Power supply 

L2 

L2 

U 

Kabelabfangschiene Cable clamp rail 

V 

W 

PEN-Schiene PEN-bus 

T1 

1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 

11 COM 

11 COM 

NO 14 

NO 14 

NC 12 

NC 12 

2 5 A 

I 

2 3 

2 0 

-ÜÜÜÜÜ- 

0 

3RV1021-4DA15 

Q1 F1 K1 

Fig. 24 Connect motor cables and mains cables to the 

terminals and earth/ground to the bus bar. 

2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 

AC drive models 48-300 & 69-210 and up are supplied 

with power clamps for mains and motors, for connection of 

PE and earth there is a bus bar. 

For all type of wires to be connected the stripping length 

should be 32 mm. 

A2 COIL A1 

A COIL A 

X3 

Motor connection 

U 

V 

W 

Mains Connection 

L1 

L2 

L3 

Ground / earth 

connection 

bus bar 

3.3.1 Connection of mains and 

motor cables on IP20 modules 

The Emotron IP 20 modules are delivered complete with 

factory mounted cables for mains and motor. The length of 

the cables are app. 1100 mm. The cables are marked L1, L2, 

L3 for mains connection and U, V, W for motor 

connection. 

For detailed information about use of the IP20 modules, 

please contact CG Drives & Automation. 

PEBB 1 

(Master) 

Fig. 25 IP20 module size G, with qty 2 x 3 mains cables and 

qty 2 x 3 motor cables. 


PEBB 2 

Mains cables Motor cables 

L1, L2, L3 

U, V, W

PEBB 1 

(Master) PEBB 2 PEBB 3 

Mains cables Motor cables 

L1, L2, L3 U, V, W 

Fig. 26 IP20 module size H/H69 with qty 3 x 3 Mains cables 

and qty 3 x 3 motor cables. 

3.4 Cable specifications 

Table 6 Cable specifications 

Cable Cable specification 

3.5 Stripping lengths 

Fig. 27 indicates the recommended stripping lengths for 

motor and mains cables. 

Fig. 27 Stripping lengths for cables 

24 Installation CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 

Mains 

Motor 

Control 

Power cable suitable for fixed installation for the 

voltage used. 

Symmetrical three conductor cable with 

concentric protection (PE) wire or a four 

conductor cable with compact low-impedance 

concentric shield for the voltage used. 

Control cable with low-impedance shield, 

screened. 

Table 7 Stripping lengths for mains and motor cables 

Model 

Mains cable Motor cable 

a 

(mm) 

b 

(mm) 

a 

(mm) 

b 

(mm) 

c 

(mm) 

003-018 90 10 90 10 20 

026–046 150 14 150 14 20 

061–074 110 17 110 17 34 

090-175 160 16 160 16 41 

FDU48-210–250 

FDU69-090-200 

Mains 

170 24 170 24 46 

Motor 

(06-F45-cables only)

3.5.1 Dimension of cables and fuses 

Please refer to the chapter Technical data, section 14.7, page 

208. 

3.5.2 Tightening torque for mains 

and motor cables 

Table 8 Model FDU48/52 003 to 046 

Brake chopper Mains/motor 

Tightening torque, Nm 1.2-1.4 1.2-1.4 

Table 9 Model FDU48/52 061 to 074 

All cables 60 A All cables 73 A 

Tightening torque, Nm 2.8 5.0 

Table 10 Model FDU48 090 to 109 

Block, mm 2 

Cable diameter, mm 2 


95 95 

16-95 16-95 

Tightening torque, Nm 14 14 

Table 11 Model FDU48 146 to 175 

Block, mm 2 



95 150 

16-95 35-95 120-150 

Tightening torque, Nm 14 14 24 

Table 12 Model FDU48 210 to 250 and 

FDU69 090 to 200 


Block, mm2 150 240 


35-95 120-150 35-70 95-240 

Tightening torque, Nm 14 24 14 24 

3.6 Thermal protection on the 

motor 

Standard motors are normally fitted with an internal fan. 

The cooling capacity of this built-in fan is dependent on the 

frequency of the motor. At low frequency, the cooling 

capacity will be insufficient for nominal loads. Please 

contact the motor supplier for the cooling characteristics of 

the motor at lower frequency. 

WARNING! 

Depending on the cooling characteristics of 

the motor, the application, the speed and the 

load, it may be necessary to use forced 

cooling on the motor. 

Motor thermistors offer better thermal protection for the 

motor. Depending on the type of motor thermistor fitted, 

the optional PTC input may be used. The motor thermistor 

gives a thermal protection independent of the speed of the 

motor, thus of the speed of the motor fan. See the functions, 

Motor I 2 t type [231] and Motor I 2 t current [232]. 

3.7 Motors in parallel 

It is possible to have motors in parallel as long as the total 

current does not exceed the nominal value of the AC drive. 

The following has to be taken into account when setting the 

motor data: 

Menu [221] 

Motor Voltage: 

Menu [222] 

Motor Frequency: 

Menu [223] 

Motor Power: 

Menu [224] 

Motor Current: 

Menu [225] 

Motor Speed: 

Menu [227] 

Motor Cos PHI: 

The motors in parallel must have the 

same motor voltage. 

The motors in parallel must have the 

same motor frequency. 

Add the motor power values for the 

motors in parallel. 

Add the current for the motors in parallel. 

Set the average speed for the motors in 

parallel. 

Set the average Cos PHI value for the 

motors in parallel. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Installation 25


4. Control Connections 

4.1 Control board 

Fig. 28 shows the layout of the control board which is where 

the parts most important to the user are located. Although 

the control board is galvanically isolated from the mains, for 

safety reasons do not make changes while the mains supply 

is on! 

X1 

Fig. 28 Control board layout 

X4 

Communication 

C 

S1 S2 S3 S4 

I U I U I U I U 

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 

1 

AO1 AO2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DO1 DO2 DI8 

+10V AI1 

Switches 

X5 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

AI2 

AI3 

AI4 

1 

Option 

-10V 

Control 

signals 

WARNING! 

Always switch off the mains voltage and wait 

at least 7 minutes to allow the DC capacitors 

to discharge before connecting the control 

signals or changing position of any switches. If the 

option External supply is used, switch of the mains to 

the option. This is done to prevent damage on the 

control board. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Control Connections 27 

11 

DI1 DI2 DI3 +24V 

2 

X2 

X6 X7 

41 

R02 

42 43 

NC 

31 32 33 51 52 

NC 

C 

NO 

X3 

C NO NO C 

R01 

3 

Control 

Panel 

Relay outputs 

R03 

X8

4.2 Terminal connections 

The terminal strip for connecting the control signals is 

accessible after opening the front panel. 

The table describes the default functions for the signals. The 

inputs and outputs are programmable for other functions as 

described in chapter 11. page 67. For signal specifications 

refer to chapter 14. page 199. 

NOTE: The maximum total combined current for outputs 

11, 20 and 21 is 100mA. 

NOTE: It is possible to use external 24V DC if connection 

to Common (15). 

Table 13 Control signals 

Terminal Name Function (Default) 

Outputs 

1 +10 V +10 VDC supply voltage 

6 -10 V -10 VDC supply voltage 

7 Common Signal ground 

11 +24 V +24 VDC supply voltage 

12 Common Signal ground 

15 

Digital inputs 

Common Signal ground 

8 DigIn 1 RunL (reverse) 

9 DigIn 2 RunR (forward) 

10 DigIn 3 Off 





22 DigIn 8 RESET 

Digital outputs 

20 DigOut 1 Ready 

21 DigOut 2 No trip 

Analogue inputs 

2 AnIn 1 Process Ref 

3 AnIn 2 Off 

4 AnIn 3 Off 

5 AnIn 4 Off 

Analogue outputs 

13 AnOut 1 Min speed to max speed 

14 AnOut 2 0 to max torque 

Table 13 Control signals 

Terminal Name Function (Default) 

Relay outputs 

31 N/C 1 

32 COM 1 

33 N/O 1 

41 N/C 2 

42 COM 2 

43 N/O 2 

51 COM 3 Relay 3 output 

52 N/O 3 Off 

Relay 1 output 

Trip, active when the AC drive is 

in a TRIP condition. 

Relay 2 output 

Run, active when the AC drive is 

started. 

NOTE: N/C is opened when the relay is active and N/O is 

closed when the relay is active. 

4.3 Inputs configuration 

with the switches 

The switches S1 to S4 are used to set the input configuration 

for the 4 analogue inputs AnIn1, AnIn2, AnIn3 and AnIn4 

as described in table 14. See Fig. 28 for the location of the 

switches. 

Table 14 Switch settings 

Input Signal type Switch 

28 Control Connections CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 

AnIn1 

AnIn2 

AnIn3 

AnIn4 

Voltage 

Current (default) 

Voltage 


Voltage 


Voltage 


S1 

S1 

S2 

S2 

S3 

S3 

S4 

S4 

NOTE: Scaling and offset of AnIn1 - AnIn4 can be 

configured using the software. See menus [512], [515], 

[518] and [51B] in section 11.5, page 134. 

NOTE: the 2 analogue outputs AnOut 1 and AnOut 2 can 

be configured using the software. See menu [530] 

section 11.5.3, page 143 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U

4.4 Connection example 

Fig. 29 gives an overall view of a AC drive connection 

example. 

Alternative for 

potentiometer control** 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

NQE1 

TGO 

Fig. 29 Connection example 

0 - 10 V 

4 - 20 mA 

TGUGV 

CE"FTKXG 

RTGX PGZV GUE 

GPVGT 

* Default setting 

** The switch S1 is set to U 

*** = Optional terminals X1: 78 - 79 

for connection of Motor-PTC on 

sizes B, C and D. 

RFIfilter 

Optional *** 

Motor PTC 

+10 VDC 

AnIn 1: Reference 

AnIn 2 

AnIn 3 

AnIn 4 

Common 

-10 VDC 

AnOut 1 

Common 

AnOut 2 

DigIn 1:RunL* 

DigOut 2 

DigIn 2:RunR* 

DigOut 1 

DigIn3 

+24 VDC 

Common 

Relay 1 

DigIn 4 

DigIn 5 

DigIn 6 

DigIn 7 

Relay 2 

DigIn 8:Reset* 

Comm. options 

Fieldbus option 

or PC 

Relay 3 

Optional 

Other options 

Option board 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Control Connections 29 

Motor

4.5 Connecting the Control 

Signals 

4.5.1 Cables 

The standard control signal connections are suitable for 

stranded flexible wire up to 1.5 mm 2 and for solid wire up to 

2.5 mm 2 . 

Terminal 78 & 79 for 

connection of Motor 

PTC option 

Control signals 

Fig. 30 Connecting the control signals, 003 to 018 



PTC option 



L1 L2 L3 PE DC- DC+ R U V 





PTC option 

Terminal A- & B+ for 

connection of 

Stand by supply 

option board 



30 Control Connections CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

NOTE: The screening of control signal cables is 

necessary to comply with the immunity levels given in 

the EMC Directive (it reduces the noise level). 

NOTE: Control cables must be separated from motor and 

mains cables. 

4.5.2 Types of control signals 

Always make a distinction between the different types of 

signals. Because the different types of signals can adversely 

affect each other, use a separate cable for each type. This is 

often more practical because, for example, the cable from a 

pressure sensor may be connected directly to the AC drive. 

We can distinguish between the following types of control 

signals: 

Analogue inputs 

Voltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA) normally 

used as control signals for speed, torque and PID feedback 

signals. 

Analogue outputs 

Voltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA) which 

change slowly or only occasionally in value. In general, these 

are control or measurement signals. 

Digital 

Voltage or current signals (0-10 V, 0-24 V, 0/4-20 mA) 

which can have only two values (high or low) and only 

occasionally change in value. 

Data 

Usually voltage signals (0-5 V, 0-10 V) which change rapidly 

and at a high frequency, generally data signals such as 

RS232, RS485, Profibus, etc. 

Relay 

Relay contacts (0-250 VAC) can switch highly inductive 

loads (auxiliary relay, lamp, valve, brake, etc.). 

Signal 

type 

Maximum wire size Tightening 

torque 

Cable type 

Analogue Rigid cable: 

0.14-2.5 mm 2 

Flexible cable: 

0.14-1.5 mm 2 

Cable with ferrule: 

0.25-1.5 mm 2 

Screened 

Digital 

Data 

0.5 Nm 

Screened 

Screened 

Relay Not screened 

Example: 

The relay output from a AC drive which controls an 

auxiliary relay can, at the moment of switching, form a 

source of interference (emission) for a measurement signal 

from, for example, a pressure sensor. Therefore it is advised 

to separate wiring and screening to reduce disturbances. 

4.5.3 Screening 

For all signal cables the best results are obtained if the 

screening is connected to both ends: the AC drive side and 

at the source (e.g. PLC, or computer). See Fig. 34. 

It is strongly recommended that the signal cables be allowed 

to cross mains and motor cables at a 90� angle. Do not let 

the signal cable go in parallel with the mains and motor 

cable. 

4.5.4 Single-ended or double-ended 

connection? 

In principle, the same measures applied to motor cables 

must be applied to all control signal cables, in accordance 

with the EMC-Directives. 

For all signal cables as mentioned in section 4.5.2 the best 

results are obtained if the screening is connected to both 

ends. See Fig. 34. 

NOTE: Each installation must be examined carefully 

before applying the proper EMC measurements. 

Control board 

Pressure 

sensor 

(example) 

External control 

(e.g. in metal housing) 

Control consol 

Fig. 34 Electro Magnetic (EM) screening of control signal 

cables. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Control Connections 31

4.5.5 Current signals ((0)4-20 mA) 

A current signal like (0)4-20 mA is less sensitive to 

disturbances than a 0-10 V signal, because it is connected to 

an input which has a lower impedance (250 �) than a 

voltage signal (20 k�). It is therefore strongly advised to use 

current control signals if the cables are longer than a few 

metres. 

4.5.6 Twisted cables 

Analogue and digital signals are less sensitive to interference 

if the cables carrying them are “twisted”. This is certainly to 

be recommended if screening cannot be used. By twisting 

the wires the exposed areas are minimised. This means that 

in the current circuit for any possible High Frequency (HF) 

interference fields, no voltage can be induced. For a PLC it 

is therefore important that the return wire remains in 

proximity to the signal wire. It is important that the pair of 

wires is fully twisted over 360°. 

4.6 Connecting options 

The option cards are connected by the optional connectors 

X4 or X5 on the control board see Fig. 28, page 27 and 

mounted above the control board. The inputs and outputs 

of the option cards are connected in the same way as other 

control signals. 

32 Control Connections CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

5. Getting Started 

This chapter is a step by step guide that will show you the 

quickest way to get the motor shaft turning. We will show 

you two examples, remote control and local control. 

We assume that the AC drive is mounted on a wall or in a 

cabinet as in the chapter 2. page 11. 

First there is general information of how to connect mains, 

motor and control cables. The next section describes how to 

use the function keys on the control panel. The subsequent 

examples covering remote control and local control describe 

how to program/set the motor data and run the AC drive 

and motor. 

5.1 Connect the mains and 

motor cables 

Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local 

regulations. The cable must be able to carry the AC drive 

load current. 

5.1.1 Mains cables 

1. Connect the mains cables as in Fig. 35. The AC drive 

has, as standard, a built-in RFI mains filter that complies 

with category C3 which suits the Second Environment 

standard. 

5.1.2 Motor cables 

2. Connect the motor cables as in Fig. 35. To comply with 

the EMC Directive you have to use screened cables and 

the motor cable screen has to be connected on both 

sides: to the housing of the motor and the housing of the 

AC drive. 

RFI-Filter 

Mains 

Mains 

AC drive 

Brake 

resistor 

(option) 

Output 

coils 

(option) 

Metal EMC 

cable gland 

Fig. 35 Connection of mains and motor cables 

Metal EMC cable 

glands 


Metal housing 


Motor 

Table 15 Mains and motor connection 

L1,L2,L3 

PE 

U, V, W 

Mains supply, 3 -phase 

Safety earth 

Motor earth 

Motor output, 3-phase 

WARNING! 

In order to work safely the mains earth must 

be connected to PE and the motor earth to 

. 

5.2 Using the function keys 

100 200 300 

Fig. 36 Example of menu navigation when entering motor 

voltage 

step to lower menu level or confirm changed setting 

step to higher menu level or ignore changed setting 

step to next menu on the same level 

step to previous menu on the same level 

increase value or change selection 

decrease value or change selection 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Getting Started 33 

ESC 

NEXT 

NEXT 

210 

NEXT 

220 

221 

ESC

5.3 Remote control 

In this example external signals are used to control the AC 

drive/motor. 

A standard 4-pole motor for 400 V, an external start button 

and a reference value will also be used. 

5.3.1 Connect control cables 

Here you will make up the minimum wiring for starting. In 

this example the motor/AC drive will run with right rotation. 

To comply with the EMC standard, use screened control 

cables with plaited flexible wire up to 1.5 mm 2 or solid wire 

up to 2.5 mm 2 . 

3. Connect a reference value between terminals 7 (Common) 

and 2 (AnIn 1) as in Fig. 37. 

4. Connect an external start button between terminal 11 

(+24 VDC) and 9 (DigIn2, RUNR) as in Fig. 37. 

Reference 

4-20 mA 

Start 

Fig. 37 Wiring 

+ 

0V 

X3 

5.3.2 Switch on the mains 

Once the mains is switched on, the internal fan in the AC 

drive will run for 5 seconds. 

X1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

X2 

31 

32 

33 

51 

52 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

41 

42 

43 

5.3.3 Set the Motor Data 

Enter correct motor data for the connected motor. The 

motor data is used in the calculation of complete operational 

data in the AC drive. 

Change settings using the keys on the control panel. For 

further information about the control panel and menu 

structure, see the chapter 9. page 57. 

Menu [100], “Preferred View” is displayed when started. 

1. Press NEXT to display menu [200], “Main Setup”. 

2. Press and then NEXT 

to display menu [220], “Motor 

Data”. 

3. Press to display menu [221] and set motor voltage. 

4. Change the value using the and keys. Confirm 

with . 

5. Set motor frequency [222]. 

6. Set motor power [223]. 

7. Set motor current [224]. 

8. Set motor speed [225]. 

9. Set power factor (cos �) [227]. 

10. Select supply voltage level used [21B] 

11. [229] Motor ID run: Choose Short, confirm with 

and give start command . 

The AC drive will now measure some motor parameters. 

The motor makes some beeping sounds but the shaft 

does not rotate. When the ID run is finished after about 

one minute ("Test Run OK!" is displayed), press to 

continue. 

12. Use AnIn1 as input for the reference value. The default 

range is 4-20 mA. If you need a 0-10 V reference value, 

change switch (S1) on control board. 

13. Switch off power supply. 

14. Connect digital and analogue inputs/outputs as in 

Fig. 37. 

15. Ready! 

16. Switch on power supply. 

5.3.4 Run the AC drive 

Now the installation is finished, and you can press the 

external start button to start the motor. 

When the motor is running the main connections are OK. 

34 Getting Started CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

5.4 Local control 

Manual control via the control panel can be used to carry 

out a test run. 

Use a 400 V motor and the control panel. 

5.4.1 Switch on the mains 

Once the mains is switched on, the AC drive is started and 

the internal fan will run for 5 seconds. 

5.4.2 Select manual control 

Menu [100], “Preferred View” is displayed when started. 

1. Press NEXT to display menu [200], “Main Setup”. 

2. Press to display menu [210], “Operation”. 

3. Press to display menu [211], “Language”. 

4. Press NEXT to display menu [214], “Reference Control”. 

5. Select Keyboard using the key 

confirm. 

and press to 

6. Press NEXT to get to menu [215], “Run/Stop Control”. 

7. Select Keyboard using the key 

confirm. 

and press to 

8. Press ESC to get to previous menu level and then NEXT to 

display menu [220], “Motor Data”. 

5.4.3 Set the Motor Data 

Enter correct motor data for the connected motor. 

9. Press to display menu [221]. 

10. Change the value using the and keys. Confirm 

with . 

11. Press NEXT to display menu [222]. 

12. Repeat step 9 and 10 until all motor data is entered. 

13. Press ESC twice and then to display menu [100], 

Preferred View. 

5.4.4 Enter a Reference Value 

Enter a reference value. 

14. Press NEXT 

until menu [300], “Process” is displayed. 

15. Press 

value. 

to display menu [310], “Set/View reference” 

16. Use the and keys to enter, for example, 300 

rpm. We select a low value to check the rotation 

direction without damaging the application. 

5.4.5 Run the AC drive 

Press the key on the control panel to run the motor 

forward. 

If the motor is running the main connections are OK. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Getting Started 35

36 Getting Started CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

6. Applications 

This chapter contains tables giving an overview of many different 

applications/duties in which it is suitable to use AC 

drives from CG Drives & Automation. Further on you will 

find application examples of the most common applications 

and solutions. 

6.1 Application overview 

6.1.1Pumps 

6.1.2Fans 

Challenge Emotron FDU solution Menu 

Dry-running, cavitation and overheating damage 

the pump and cause downtime. 

Sludge sticks to impeller when pump has been 

running at low speed or been stationary for a while. 

Reduces the pump’s efficiency. 

Motor runs at same speed despite varying 

demands in pressure/flow. Energy is lost and 

equipment stressed. 

Process inefficiency due to e.g. a blocked pipe, a 

valve not fully opened or a worn impeller. 

Water hammer damages the pump when stopped. 

Mechanical stress on pipes, valves, gaskets, seals. 

Pump Curve Protection detects deviation. Sends 

warning or activates safety stop. 

Automatic pump rinsing function: pump is set to 

run at full speed at certain intervals, then return 

to normal speed. 

PID continuously adapts pressure/flow to the 

level required. Sleep function activated when 

none is needed. 

Pump Curve Protection detects deviation. 

Warning is sent or safety stop activated. 

Smooth linear stops protect the equipment. 

Eliminates need for costly motorized valves. 

411–419, 41C1– 41C9 

362–368, 560, 640 

320, 380, 342, 354 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

331–336 


Starting a fan rotating in the wrong direction can be 

critical, e.g. a tunnel fan in event of a fire. 

Draft causes turned off fan to rotate the wrong way. 

Starting causes high current peaks and mechanical 

stress. 

Regulating pressure/flow with dampers causes 

high energy consumption and equipment wear. 


demands in pressure/flow. Energy is lost and 

equipment stressed. 

Process inefficiency due to e.g. a blocked filter, a 

damper not fully opened or a worn belt. 

Fan is started at low speed to ensure correct 

direction and proper function. 

Motor is gradually slowed to complete stop before 

starting. Avoids blown fuses and breakdown. 

Automatic regulation of pressure/flow with motor 

speed gives more exact control. 

PID continuously adapts to the level required. 

Sleep function is activated when none is needed. 

Load Curve Protection detects deviation. Warning 

is sent or safety stop activated. 

219, 341 

219, 33A, 335 

321, 354 

320, 380, 342, 354 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

CG Drives & Automation, 01--5325-01r1 Applications 37

6.1.3Compressors 

6.1.4Blowers 


Compressor is damaged when cooling media 

enters the compressor screw. 

Pressure is higher than needed, causing leaks, 

stress on the equipment and excessive air use. 

Motor runs at same speed when no air is 

compressed. Energy is lost and equipment 

stressed. 

Process inefficiency and energy wasted due to e.g. 

the compressor idling. 

Overload situation is quickly detected and safety 

stop can be activated to avoid breakdown. 

Load Curve Protection function detects deviation. 


PID continuously adapts to the level required. 

Sleep function activated when none is needed. 

Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation. 


411–41A 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

320, 380, 342, 354 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 


Difficult to compensate for pressure fluctuations. 

Wasted energy and risk of production stop. 


demands. Energy is lost and equipment stressed. 

Process inefficiency due to e.g. a broken damper, a 

valve not fully opened or a worn belt. 

PID function continuously adapts pressure to the 

level required. 

PID continuously adapts air flow to level required. 

Sleep function activated when none is needed. 

Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation. 


320, 380 

320, 380, 342, 354 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

38 Applications CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

7. Main Features 

This chapter contains descriptions of the main features of 

the AC drive. 

7.1 Parameter sets 

Only valid if the option HCP - Handheld Control Panel is 

used. 

Parameter sets are used if an application requires different 

settings for different modes. For example, a machine can be 

used for producing different products and thus requires two 

or more maximum speeds and acceleration/deceleration 

times. With the four parameter sets different control options 

can be configured with respect to quickly changing the 

behaviour of the AC drive. It is possible to adapt the AC 

drive online to altered machine behaviour. This is based on 

the fact that at any desired moment any one of the four 

parameter sets can be activated during Run or Stop, via the 

digital inputs or the control panel and menu [241]. 

Each parameter set can be selected externally via a digital 

input. Parameter sets can be changed during operation and 

stored in the control panel. 

NOTE: The only data not included in the parameter set is 

Motor data 1-4, (entered separately), language, 

communication settings, selected set, local remote, and 

keyboard locked. 

Define parameter sets 

When using parameter sets you first decide how to select 

different parameter sets. The parameter sets can be selected 

via the control panel, via digital inputs or via serial 

communication. All digital inputs and virtual inputs can be 

configured to select parameter set. The function of the 

digital inputs is defined in the menu [520]. 

Fig. 38 shows the way the parameter sets are activated via 

any digital input configured to Set Ctrl 1 or Set Ctrl 2. 

11 +24 V 

10 Set Ctrl1 

16 Set Ctrl2 

Fig. 38 Selecting the parameter sets 

Select and copy parameter set 

The parameter set selection is done in menu [241], “Select 

Set”. First select the main set in menu [241], normally A. 

Adjust all settings for the application. Usually most 

parameters are common and therefore it saves a lot of work 

by copying set A>B in menu [242]. When parameter set A is 

copied to set B you only change the parameters in the set 

that need to be changed. Repeat for C and D if used. 

With menu [242], Copy Set, it is easy to copy the complete 

contents of a single parameter set to another parameter set. 

If, for example, the parameter sets are selected via digital 

inputs, DigIn 3 is set to Set Ctrl 1 in menu [523] and DigIn 

4 is set to Set Ctrl 2 in menu [524], they are activated as in 

Table 16. 

Activate the parameter changes via digital input by setting 

menu [241], “Select Set” to DigIn. 

Table 16 Parameter set 

Parameter set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2 

A 0 0 

B 1 0 

C 0 1 

D 1 1 

NOTE: The selection via the digital inputs is immediately 

activated. The new parameter settings will be activated 

on-line, also during Run. 

NOTE: The default parameter set is parameter set A. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01--5325-01r1 Main Features 39 

{ 

Parameter Set A 

Run/Stop 

- 

- 

Torques 

- 

- 

Controllers 

- 

- 

Limits/Prot. 

- 

-Max Alarm 

Set B 

Set C 

Set D 

(NG06-F03_1)

Examples 

Different parameter sets can be used to easily change the 

setup of a AC drive to adapt quickly to different application 

requirements. For example when 

• a process needs optimized settings in different stages of 

the process, to 

- increase the process quality 

- increase control accuracy 

- lower maintenance costs 

- increase operator safety 

With these settings a large number of options are available. 

Some ideas are given here: 

Multi frequency selection 

Within a single parameter set the 7 preset references can be 

selected via the digital inputs. In combination with the 

parameter sets, 28 preset references can be selected using all 

5 digital inputs: DigIn1, 2 and 3 for selecting preset 

reference within one parameter set and DigIn 4 and DigIn 5 

for selecting the parameter sets. 

Bottling machine with 3 different products 

Use 3 parameter sets for 3 different Jog reference speeds 

when the machine needs to be set up. The 4th parameter set 

can be used for “normal” remote control when the machine 

is running at full production. 

Manual - automatic control 

If in an application something is filled up manually and then 

the level is automatically controlled using PID regulation, 

this is solved using one parameter set for the manual control 

and one for the automatic control. 

7.1.1 One motor and one parameter 

set 

This is the most common application for pumps and fans. 

Once default motor M1 and parameter set A have been 

selected: 

1. Enter the settings for motor data. 

2. Enter the settings for other parameters e.g. inputs and 

outputs 

7.1.2 One motor and two parameter 

sets 

This application is useful if you for example have a machine 

running at two different speeds for different products. 

Once default motor M1 is selected: 

1. Select parameter set A in menu [241]. 

2. Enter motor data in menu [220]. 

3. Enter the settings for other parameters e.g. inputs and 

outputs. 

4. If there are only minor differences between the settings 

in the parameter sets, you can copy parameter set A to 

parameter set B, menu [242]. 

5. Enter the settings for parameters e.g. inputs and outputs. 

Note: Do not change motor data in parameter set B. 

7.1.3 Two motors and two parameter 

sets 

This is useful if you have a machine with two motors that 

can not run at the same time, such as a cable winding 

machine that lifts up the reel with one motor and then turns 

the wheel with the other motor. 

One motor must stop before changing to an other motor. 

1. Select parameter set A in menu [241]. 

2. Select motor M1 in menu [212]. 

3. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e.g. 

inputs and outputs. 

4. Select parameter set B in menu [241]. 

5. Select M2 in menu [212]. 

6. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e.g. 

inputs and outputs. 

7.1.4 Autoreset at trip 

For several non-critical application-related failure 

conditions, it is possible to automatically generate a reset 

command to overcome the fault condition. The selection 

can be made in menu [250]. In this menu the maximum 

number of automatically generated restarts allowed can be 

set, see menu [251], after this the AC drive will stay in fault 

condition because external assistance is required. 

40 Main Features CG Drives & Automation, 01--5325-01r1

Example 

The motor is protected by an internal protection for thermal 

overload. When this protection is activated, the AC drive 

should wait until the motor is cooled down enough before 

resuming normal operation. When this problem occurs 

three times in a short period of time, external assistance is 

required. 

The following settings should be applied: 

• Insert maximum number of restarts; set menu [251] to 

3. 

• Activate Motor I 2 t to be automatically reset; set menu 

[25A] to 300 s. 

• Set relay 1, menu [551] to “AutoRst Trip”; a signal will 

be available when the maximum number of restarts is 

reached and the AC drive stays in fault condition. 

• The reset input must be constantly activated. 

7.1.5 Reference priority 

The active speed reference signal can be programmed from 

several sources and functions. The table below shows the 

priority of the different functions with regards to the speed 

reference. 

Table 17 Reference priority 

Jog 

Mode 

Preset 

Reference 

Motor Pot Ref. Signal 

On/Off On/Off On/Off Option cards 

On On/Off On/Off Jog Ref 

Off On On/Off Preset Ref 

Off Off On Motor pot commands 

7.1.6 Preset references 

The AC drive is able to select fixed speeds via the control of 

digital inputs. This can be used for situations where the 

required motor speed needs to be adapted to fixed values, 

according to certain process conditions. Up to 7 preset 

references can be set for each parameter set, which can be 

selected via all digital inputs that are set to Preset Ctrl1, 

Preset Ctrl2 or Preset Ctrl3. The amount digital inputs used 

that are set to Preset Ctrl determines the number of Preset 

References available; using 1 input gives 1 speed, using 2 

inputs gives 3 speeds and using 3 inputs gives 7 speeds. 

Example 

The use of four fixed speeds, at 50 / 100 / 300 / 800 rpm, 

requires the following settings: 

• Set DigIn 5 as first selection input; set [525] to Preset 

Ctrl1. 

• Set DigIn 6 as second selection input; set [526] to Preset 

Ctrl2. 

• Set menu [341] “Min Speed” to 50 rpm. 

• Set menu [362] “Preset Ref 1” to 100 rpm. 



With these settings, the AC drive switched on and a RUN 

command given, the speed will be: 

• 50 rpm, when both DigIn 5 and DigIn 6 are low. 

• 100 rpm, when DigIn 5 is high and DigIn 6 is low. 

• 300 rpm, when DigIn 5 is low and DigIn 6 is high. 

• 800 rpm, when both DigIn 5 and DigIn 6 are high. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01--5325-01r1 Main Features 41

7.2 Remote control functions 

Operation of the Run/Stop/Enable/Reset functions 

As default, all the run/stop/reset related commands are 

programmed for remote operation via the inputs on the 

terminal strip (terminals 1-22) on the control board. With 

the function “Run/Stp Ctrl” [215] and “Reset Control” 

[216], this can be selected for keyboard or serial communication 

control. 

NOTE: The examples in this paragraph do not cover all 

possibilities. Only the most relevant combinations are 

given. The starting point is always the default setting 

(factory) of the AC drive. 

Default settings of the Run/Stop/ 

Enable/Reset functions 

The default settings are shown in Fig. 39. In this example 

the AC drive is started and stopped with DigIn 2 and a reset 

after trip can be given with DigIn 8. 

RunR 

Reset 

+24 V 

Fig. 39 Default setting Run/Reset commands 

The inputs are default set for level-control. The rotation is 

determined by the setting of the digital inputs. 

X1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

X 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

Enable and Stop functions 

Both functions can be used separately or simultaneously. 

The choice of which function is to be used depends on the 

application and the control mode of the inputs (Level/Edge 

[21A]). 

NOTE: In Edge mode, at least one digital input must be 

programmed to “stop”, because the Run commands are 

only able to start the AC drive. 

Enable 

Input must be active (HI) to allow any Run signal. If the 

input is made LOW, the output of the AC drive is 

immediately disabled and the motor will coast. 

CAUTION! 

If the Enable function is not programmed to a 

digital input, it is considered to be active 

internally. 

Stop 

If the input is low then the AC drive will stop according to 

the selected stop mode set in menu [33B] “Stop Mode”. Fig. 

40 shows the function of the Enable and the Stop input and 

the Stop Mode=Decel [33B]. 

To run the input must be high. 

NOTE: Stop Mode=Coast [33B] will give the same 

behaviour as the Enable input. 

Fig. 40 Functionality of the Stop and Enable input 

42 Main Features CG Drives & Automation, 01--5325-01r1 

! 

STOP 

(STOP=DECEL) 

OUTPUT 

SPEED 

ENABLE 

OUTPUT 

SPEED 

(06-F104_NG) 

(or if Spinstart is selected) 

t 

t

Reset and Autoreset operation 

If the AC drive is in Stop Mode due to a trip condition, the 

AC drive can be remotely reset by a pulse (“low” to “high” 

transition) on the Reset input, default on DigIn 8. 

Depending on the selected control method, a restart takes 

place as follows: 

Level-control 

If the Run inputs remain in their position the AC drive will 

start immediately after the Reset command is given. 

Edge-control 

After the Reset command is given a new Run command 

must be applied to start the AC drive again. 

Autoreset is enabled if the Reset input is continuously active. 

The Autoreset functions are programmed in menu “Autoreset 

[240]”. 

NOTE: If the control commands are programmed for 

Keyboard control or Com, Autoreset is not possible. 

Run Inputs Level-controlled. 

The inputs are set as default for level-control. This means 

that an input is activated by making the input continuously 

“High”. This method is commonly used if, for example, 

PLCs are used to operate the AC drive. 

! 

CAUTION! 

Level-controlled inputs DO NOT comply with the 

Machine Directive, if the inputs are directly 

used to start and stop the machine. 

The examples given in this and the following paragraphs 

follow the input selection shown in Fig. 41. 

Stop 

RunL 

RunR 

Enable 

Reset 

+24 V 

Fig. 41 Example of wiring for Run/Stop/Enable/Reset inputs 

The Enable input must be continuously active in order to 

accept any run-right or run-left command. If both RunR 

and RunL inputs are active, then the AC drive stops 

according to the selected Stop Mode. Fig. 42 gives an 

example of a possible sequence. 

X1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

INPUTS 

ENABLE 

STOP 

RUN R 

RUN L 

OUTPUT 

STATUS 

Right rotation 

Left rotation 

Standstill 

Fig. 42 Input and output status for level-control 

(06-F103new_1) 

Run Inputs Edge-controlled 

Menu “[21A] Start signal” Level/Edge must be set to Edge 

to activate edge control. This means that an input is activated 

by a “low” to “high” transition or vice versa. 

NOTE: Edge-controlled inputs comply with the Machine 

Directive (see Chapter 8. page 55), if the inputs are 

directly used for starting and stopping the machine. 

See Fig. 41. The Enable and Stop input must be active 

continuously in order to accept any run-right or run-left 

command. The last edge (RunR or RunL) is valid. Fig. 43 

gives an example of a possible sequence. 


INPUTS 

ENABLE 

STOP 

RUN R 

RUN L 

OUTPUT 

STATUS 

Right rotation 

Left rotation 

Standstill 

Fig. 43 Input and output status for edge-control 

(06-F94new_1) 

7.3 Performing an 

Identification Run 

To get the optimum performance out of your AC drive/ 

motor combination, the AC drive must measure the 

electrical parameters (resistance of stator winding, etc.) of 

the connected motor. See menu [269] “Motor ID-Run”. 

7.4 Using the Control Panel 

Memory 

Data can be copied from the AC drive to the memory in the 

control panel and vice versa. To copy all data (including 

parameter set A-D and motor data) from the AC drive to the 

control panel, select Copy to CP[234], Copy to CP. 

To copy data from the control panel to the AC drive, enter 

the menu [235], Load from CP and select what you want to 

copy. 

The memory in the control panel is useful in applications 

with AC drives without a control panel and in applications 

where several AC drives have the same setup. It can also be 

used for temporary storage of settings. Use a control panel to 

upload the settings from one AC drive and then move the 

control panel to another AC drive and download the settings. 

NOTE: Load from and copy to the AC drive is only 

possible when the AC drive is in stop mode. 

AC drive 

Fig. 44 Copy and load parameters between AC drive and 

control panel 


7.5 Load Monitor and Process 

Protection [400] 

7.5.1 Load Monitor [410] 

The monitor functions enable the AC drive to be used as a 

load monitor. Load monitors are used to protect machines 

and processes against mechanical overload and underload, 

such as a conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming, belt 

failure on a fan or a pump dry running. The load is 

measured in the AC drive by the calculated motor shaft 

torque. There is an overload alarm (Max Alarm and Max 

Pre-Alarm) and an underload alarm (Min Alarm and Min 

Pre-Alarm). 

The Basic Monitor type uses fixed levels for overload and 

underload (pre-)alarms over the whole speed range. This 

function can be used in constant load applications where the 

torque is not dependent on the speed, e.g. conveyor belt, 

displacement pump, screw pump, etc. 

For applications with a torque that is dependent on the 

speed, the Load Curve monitor type is preferred. By 

measuring the actual load curve of the process, 

characteristically over the range of minimum speed to 

maximum speed, an accurate protection at any speed can be 

established. 

The max and min alarm can be set for a trip condition. The 

pre-alarms act as a warning condition. All the alarms can be 

monitored on the digital or relay outputs. 

The autoset function automatically sets the 4 alarm levels 

whilst running: maximum alarm, maximum pre-alarm, 

minimum alarm and minimum pre-alarm. 

Fig. 7.6 gives an example of the monitor functions for 

constant torque applications 


. 

Ramp-down phase 

Stationary phase 

Stationary phase 

Ramp-up phase 

[413] Ramp Alarm=On or Off [413] Ramp Alarm=On 

[413] Ramp Alarm=On or Off 

[413] Ramp Alarm=On 

[411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min [411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min [411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min 

[411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min 

Torque [%] 

[4161] MaxAlarmMar (15%) 

[4171] MaxPreAlMar (10%) 

100% 

Default: TNOM or 

Autoset: TMOMENTARY [41B] 

[4181] MinPreAlMar (10%) 

[4191] MinAlarmMar (15%) 


t [s] 

[4162] MaxAlarmDel (0.1s) 

[4162] MaxAlarmDel (0.1s) 

Max Alarm 

Must be

7.6 Pump function 

7.6.1 Introduction 

A maximum of 4 pumps can be controlled with the standard 

AC drive. 

If I/O Board options are installed, a maximum of 7 pumps 

can be controlled. The I/O Board can also be used as a general 

extended I/O. 

The Pump Control function is used to control a number of 

drives (pumps, fans, etc., with a maximum of 3 additional 

drives per I/O-board connected) of which one is always 

driven by the AC drive. Other names for this kind of controllers 

are 'Cascade controller' or 'Hydrophore controller'. 

Depending on the flow, pressure or temperature, additional 

pumps can be activated via the appropriate signals by the 

output relays of the AC drive and/or the I/O Board. The 

system is developed in such a way that one AC drive will be 

the master of the system. 

Select relay on the control board or on an option board. The 

relays are set to functions for controlling pumps. In the pictures 

in this section, the relays are named R:Function, e.g. 

R:SlavePump1, which means a relay on the control board or 

on a option board set to function SlavePump1. 

Set FLOW 

Feedback 

FLOW 

FDU 

R:SlavePump1 

MASTER 

R:SlavePump2 

AnIn 

PID 

AnIn 

PM 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump4 

R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump6 

Pressure 

Power 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

1 2 3 4 

Fig. 45 Flow control with pump control option 

Flow 

(50-PC-1_1) 

All additional pumps can be activated via an AC drive, soft 

starter, Y/ � or D.O.L. switches. 

Set 

PRESSURE 

Feedback 

PRESSURE 

FDU 

R:SlavePump1 

MASTER 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump4 

Fig. 46 Pressure control with pump control option 

Pumps in parallel will operate as a flow controller, See Fig. 

45. 

Pumps in series will operate as a pressure controller see Fig. 

46. The basic control principle is shown in Fig. 42. 

NOTE: Read this instruction manual carefully before 

commencing installation, connecting or working with 

the AC drive with Pump Control option. 

Fig. 47 Basic Control principle 


AnIn 

PID 

AnIn 

PM 

R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump6 

FREQUENCY (master pump P) 

Add pump 

Stop pump 

P=on 

FLOW / 

PRESSURE 

Pressure 

4 

3 

2 

1 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

Power 

Flow 

P1=on P2=on P3=on P4=on P5=on P6=on 

(50-PC-3_1) 

(50-PC-2_1) 

FLOW / 

PRESSURE 

TIM E

7.6.2 Fixed MASTER 

This is the default setting of the Pump Control. The AC 

drive controls the Master pump which is always running. 

The relay outputs start and stop the other pumps P1 to P6, 

depending on flow/pressure. In this configuration a maximum 

of 7 pumps can be controlled, see Fig. 43. To equalize 

the lifetime of the additional pumps it is possible to select 

the pumps depending on the run time history of each pump. 

R:SlavePump6 

R:SlavePump5 

FDU R:SlavePump4 

MASTER R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump1 

(NG_50-PC-4_1) 

PM 

See menu: 

[393] Select Drive 

[39H] to [39N] Run Time 1 - 6, Pump 

[554] to [55C] Relays 

Fig. 48 Fixed MASTER control 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

NOTE: The pumps MAY have different powers, however 

the MASTER pump MUST always be the largest. 

7.6.3 Alternating MASTER 

With this function the Master pump is not fixed to the AC 

drive all the time. After the AC drive is powered up or 

started again after a stop or sleep mode the Master pump is 

selected via the relay set to function Master Pump. section 

7.6.7 on page 44 shows a detailed wiring diagram with 3 

pumps. The purpose of this function is that all pumps are 

used equally, so the lifetime of all pumps, including the 

Master pump, will be equalized. Maximum 6 pumps can be 

controlled with this function. 

Fig. 49 Alternating MASTER Control 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

NOTE: The pumps MUST have all the same power. 


FDU 

MASTER 

(NG_50-PC-5_1) 

R: SlavePump6 

R: SlavePump5 

R: SlavePump4 

R: SlavePump3 

R: SlavePump2 

R: SlavePump1 

R: MasterPump6 






See menu: 

[393] to [396] 

[553] to [55C]

7.6.4 Feedback 'Status' input 

In this example the additional pumps are controlled by an 

other kind of drive (e.g. soft starter, frequency inverter, etc.). 

The digital inputs on the I/O Board can be programmed as a 

"Error" input for each pump. If a drive fails the digital input 

will monitor this and the PUMP CONTROL option will 

not use that particular drive anymore and automatically 

FDU 

MASTER 

feedback 

inputs 

(NG_50-PC-6_1) 

Fig. 50 Feedback "Status" input 

PM 

7.6.5 Fail safe operation 

Some pump systems must always have a minimum flow or 

pressure level, even if the frequency inverter is tripped or 

damaged. So at least 1 or 2 (or maybe all) additional pumps 

must keep running after the inverter is powered down or 

tripped. This kind of "safe" pump operation can be 

FDU 

MASTER 

(50-PC-7_1) 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump1 

DI:Pump1Feedb 

DI:Pump2Feedb 

DI:Pump3Feedb 

R:SlavePump6 

R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump4 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump1 

PM 

Fig. 51 Example of "Fail safe" operation 

other 

drive 

other 

drive 

P1 P2 P3 

switch to another drive. This means that the control continues 

without using this (faulty) drive. This function can also 

be used to manually stop a particular pump for maintenance 

purposes, without shutting down the whole pump system. 

Of course the maximum flow/pressure is then limited to the 

maximum pump power of the remaining pumps. 

obtained by using the NC contacts of the pump control 

relays. These can be programmed for each individual additional 

pump. In this example pumps P5 and P6 will run at 

maximum power if the inverter fails or is powered down. 


other 

drive 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

See menu: 

[529] to [52H] Digital Input 

[554] to [55C] Relay 

See menu: 

[554] to [55C] Relays 

[55D4] to [55DC] Mode

7.6.6 PID control 

When using the Pump Control option it is mandatory to 

activate the PID controller function. Analogue inputs AnIn1 

to AnIn4 can be set as functions for PID set values and/or 

feedback values. 

Set 

Value 

Feedback 

Value 

FDU 

MASTER 

AnIn 

PID 

AnIn 

Fig. 52 PID control 

R:SlavePump6 

R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump4 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump1 

PM 

Flow/Pressure 

measurement 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

(NG_50-PC-8_1) 

See menu: 

[381] to [385] 

[553] to [55C] 

[411] to [41C] 


7.6.7 Wiring Alternating Master 

Fig. 48 and Fig. 49 show the relay functions MasterPump1- 

6 and SlavePump1-6. The Master and Additional contactors 

also interlock with each other to prevent dual powering of 

the pump and damage to the inverter. (K1M/K1S, K2M/ 

K2S, K3M/K3S). Before running, the FDU will select a 

pump to be Master, depending on the pump run times. 

Fig. 53 Power connections for Alternating MASTER circuit 

with 3 pumps 

~ 

B1:R1 

Master 

Pump1 

N 

K1M 

PE 

L1 

L2 

L3 

B2:R1 

Slave 

Pump1 

PE L1 L2 L3 

FDU 

U V W 

K1S 

K1M K2M 

(NG_50-PC-10_1) 

K1S 

B1:R2 

Master 

Pump2 

K2M 

Fig. 54 Control connections for Alternating MASTER circuit 

with 3 pumps 

P1 

3~ 

B2:R2 

Slave 

Pump2 

CAUTION! 

The wiring for the Alternating Master control 

needs special attention and should be wired 

exactly as described here, to avoid 

destructive short circuit at the output of the 

inverter. 


K2S 

! 

K2S K3S 

P2 

3~ 

B1:R3 

Master 

Pump3 

K3M 

K3M 

P3 

3~ 

B2:R3 

Slave 

Pump3 

K1S K1M K2S K2M 

K3S 

K3M 

K3S 

(NG_50-PC-11_3)

7.6.8 Checklist And Tips 

1. Main Functions 

Start by choosing which of the two main functions to use: 

- "Alternating MASTER" function 

In this case the “Master” pump can be alternated, although this function needs slightly more complicated wiring than the 

“Fixed MASTER” function described below. The I/O Board option is necessary. 

- "Fixed MASTER" function: 

One pump is always the master, only the additional pumps alternate. 

Notice that there is a big difference in the wiring of the system between these main functions, so it not possible to switch 

between these 2 functions later on. For further information see section 7.6.2, page 41. 

2. Number of pumps/drives 

3. Pump size 

If the system consists of 2 or 3 pumps the I/O Board option is not needed. However, this does mean that the following 

functions are not then possible: 

- "Alternating MASTER" function 

- With isolated inputs 

With the I/O Board option installed, the maximum number of pumps is: 

- 6 pumps if "Alternating MASTER" function is selected. (see section 7.6.3 on page 41) 

- 7 pumps if "Fixed MASTER" function is selected. (see section 7.6.2, page 41) 

- "Alternating MASTER" function: 

The sizes of the pumps must be equal. 

- "Fixed MASTER" function: 

The pumps may have different power sizes, but the master pump (FDU) must always have the greatest power. 

4. Programming the Digital inputs 

If the digital inputs are used, the digital input function must be set to Drive feedback. 

5. Programming the Relay outputs 

After the Pump controller is switched on in menu [391] the number of drives (pumps, fans, etc.) must be set in menu [392] 

(Number of Drives). The relays themselves must be set to the function SlavePump1-6 and if Alternate master is used, 

MasterPump1-6 as well. 

6. Equal Pumps 

If all pumps are equal in power size it is likely that the Upper band is much smaller than the Lower band, because the 

maximum pump discharge of the master pump is the same if the pump is connected to the mains (50Hz). This can give a 

very narrow hysteresis causing an unstable control area in the flow/pressure. By setting the maximum frequency of the 

inverter only slightly above 50Hz it means that the master pump has a slightly bigger pump discharge than the pump on 

the mains. Of course caution is essential in order to prevent the master pump running at a higher frequency for a longer 

period of time, which in turn prevents the master pump from overloading. 

7. Minimum Speed 

With pumps and fans it is normal to use a minimum speed, because at lower speed the discharge of the pump or fan will 

be low until 30-50% of the nominal speed (depending on size, power, pump properties, etc.). When using a minimum 

speed, a much smoother and better control range of the whole system will be achieved. 


7.6.9 Functional Examples of Start/ 

Stop Transitions 

Starting an additional pump 

This figure shows a possible sequence with all levels and 

functions involved when a additional pump is started by 

means of the pump control relays. The starting of the second 

pump is controlled by one of the relay outputs. The 

Flow 

Speed 

Max speed 

[343] 

Transition Speed Start 

[39E] 

Min speed 

[341] 

Master pump 

2nd pump 

Speed 

Upper band 

Lower band 

Fig. 55 Time sequence starting an additional pump 

relay in this example starts the pump directly on line. Of 

course other start/stop equipment like a soft starter could be 

controlled by the relay output. 

Set view ref. [310] 

Start delay [399] Settle time start [39D] 

Start command 

Start ramp depends 

on start method 

Feedback Flow 


time 

time 

time

Stopping an additional pump 

This figure shows a possible sequence with all levels and 

functions involved when an additional pump is stopped by 

means of the pump control relays. The stopping of the second 

pump is controlled by one of the relay outputs. The 

relay in this example stops the pump directly on line. Of 

course other start/stop equipment like a soft starter could be 

controlled by the relay output. 

Speed 

Max speed 

[343] 

Transition Speed Stop 

[39G] 

Min speed 

[341] 

Master pump 

2nd pump 

Speed 

(NG_50-PC-20_1) 

Upper band 

Lower band 

Fig. 56 Time sequence stopping an additional pump 

Set view ref. [310] 

Stop delay [39A] Settle time stop [39F] 

Stop ramp depends 

on start method 

Stop command 

Feedback Flow 


time 

time 

time

8. EMC and standards 

8.1 EMC standards 

The AC drive complies with the following standards: 

EN(IEC)61800-3:2004 Adjustable speed electronic power 

drive systems, part 3, EMC product standards: 

Standard: category C3, for systems of rated supply voltage< 

1000 VAC, intended for use in the second environment. 

Optional: Category C2, for systems of rated supply 

voltage

56 EMC and standards CG Drives & Automation, 01-25-01r1

9. Operation via the Control Panel 

This chapter describes how to use the control panel. The AC 

drive can be delivered with a control panel or a blank panel. 

- 

9.1 General 

The control panel displays the status of the AC drive and is 

used to set all the parameters. It is also possible to control 

the motor directly from the control panel. The control panel 

can be built-in or located externally via serial 

communication. The AC drive can be ordered without the 

control panel. Instead of the control panel there will be a 

blank panel. 

NOTE: The AC drive can run without the control panel 

being connected. However the settings must be such 

that all control signals are set for external use. 

9.2 The control panel 

Fig. 57 Control panel 

LC Display 

LEDs 

Control Keys 

Toggle Key 

Function Keys 

9.2.1 The display 

The display is back lit and consists of 2 rows, each with 

space for 16 characters. The display is divided into six areas. 

The different areas in the display are described below: 

A B C 

221T Motor Volt 

StpA M1: 400V 

D E 

F 

Fig. 58 The display 

Area A: Shows the actual menu number (3 or 4 

digits). 

Area B Shows if the menu is in the toggle loop or the 

AC drive is set for Local operation. 

Area C: Shows the heading of the active menu. 

Area D: Shows the status of the AC drive (3 digits). 

The following status indications are possible: 

Acc : Acceleration 

Dec : Deceleration 

I 2 t : Active I 2 t protection 

Run : Motor runs 

Trp : Tripped 

Stp : Motor is stopped 

VL : Operating at Voltage limit 

slp : Sleep mode 

SL : Operating at Speed limit 

CL : Operating at Current limit 

TL : Operating at Torque limit 

OT : Operating at Temperature Limit 

LV : Operating at Low Voltage 

Sby : Operating from Standby power supply 

SST : Operating Safe Stop, is flashing when 

activated 

LCL : Operating with low cooling liquid level 

Area E: Shows active parameter set and if it is a motor 

parameter. 

Area F: Shows the setting or selection in the active menu. 

This area is empty at the 1st level and 2nd level 

menu. This area also shows warnings and alarm 

messages. In some situations this area could 

indicate 

“+++” or ” - - -” please see further 

information in 

chapter 9.2.2 page 58 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1Operation via the Control Panel 57

300 Process 

StpA 

Fig. 59 Example 1st level menu 

220 Motor Data 

StpA 

Fig. 60 Example 2nd level menu 

221 Motor Volt 

Stp M1: 400V 

A 

Fig. 61 Example 3d level menu 

4161MaxAlarm Mar 

Stp 15% 

A 

Fig. 62 Example 4th level menu 

9.2.2 Indications on the display 

The display can indicate “+++” or “- - -” if a parameter is out 

of range. In the AC drive there are parameters which are 

dependent on other parameters. For example, if the speed 

reference is 500 and the maximum speed value is set to a 

value below 500, this will be indicated with “+++” on the 

display. If the minimum speed value is set over 500, “- - -” 

is displayed. 

9.2.3 LED indicators 

The symbols on the control panel have the following 

functions: 

Run 

Green 

Fig. 63 LED indications 

Table 18 LED indication 

Symbol 

POWER 

(green) 

TRIP (red) 

RUN 

(green) 

Function 

ON FLASHING OFF 

Power on ---------------- Power off 

AC drive 

tripped 

Motor shaft 

rotates 

Warning/Limit No trip 

Motor speed 

increase/ 

decrease 

Motor 

stopped 

9.2.4 Control keys 

The control keys are used to give the Run, Stop or Reset 

commands directly. As default these keys are disabled, set for 

remote control. Activate the control keys by selecting 

Keyboard in the menus “Ref Control [214]”, 

“Run/Stop Control [215]” and “Reset Ctrl [216]”. 

If the Enable function is programmed on one of the digital 

inputs, this input must be active to allow Run/Stop 

commands from the control panel. 

Table 19 Control keys 

RUN L: 

STOP/RESET: 

RUN R: 

gives a start with 

left rotation 

stops the motor or resets 

the AC drive after a trip 

gives a start with 

right rotation 

NOTE: It is not possible to simultaneously activate the 

Run/Stop commands from the keyboard and remotely 

from the terminal strip (terminals 1-22). Exception is the 

JOG-function which can give start command, see “Jog 

Speed [348]” on page 113 

58 Operation via the Control Panel CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 

Trip 

Red 

Power 

Green

9.2.5 The Toggle and Loc/Rem Key 

This key has two functions: Toggle and 

switching between Loc/Rem function. 

Press one second to use the toggle function 

Press and hold the toggle key for more than 

five seconds to switch between Local and Remote function, 

depending on the settings in [2171] and [2172]. 

When editing values, the toggle key can be used to change 

the sign of the value, see section 9.5, page 61. 

Toggle function 

Using the toggle function makes it possible to easily step 

through selected menus in a loop. The toggle loop can 

contain a maximum of ten menus. As default the toggle loop 

contains the menus needed for Quick Setup. You can use the 

toggle loop to create a quick-menu for the parameters that 

are most importance to your specific application. 

NOTE: Do not keep the Toggle key pressed for more than 

five seconds without pressing either the +, - or Esc key, 

as this may activate the Loc/Rem function of this key 

instead. See menu [217]. 

Add a menu to the toggle loop 

1. Go to the menu you want to add to the loop. 

2. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressing 

the + key. 

Delete a menu from the toggle loop 

1. Go to the menu you want to delete using the toggle key. 


the - key. 

Delete all menus from the toggle loop 


the Esc key. 

2. Confirm with Enter. 

Default toggle loop 

Fig. 64 shows the default toggle loop. This loop contains the 

necessary menus that need to be set before starting. Press 

Toggle to enter menu [211] then use the Next key to enter 

the sub menus [212] to [21A] and enter the parameters. 

When you press the Toggle key again, menu [221] is 

displayed. 

Fig. 64 Default toggle loop 

Indication of menus in toggle loop 

Menus included in the toggle loop are indicated with a 

in area B in the display. 

Loc/Rem function 

The Loc/Rem function of this key is disabled as default. 

Enable the function in menu [2171] and/or [2172]. 

With the function Loc/Rem you can change between local 

and remote control of the AC drive from the control panel. 

The function Loc/Rem can also be changed via the DigIn, 

see menu “Digital inputs [520]”. 

Change control mode 

1. Press the Loc/Rem key for five seconds, until Local? or 

Remote? is displayed. 

2. Confirm with Enter. 

3. Cancel with Esc. 

Local mode 

Local mode is used for temporary operation. When switched 

to LOCAL operation, the AC drive is controlled via the 

defined Local operation mode, i.e. [2171] and [2172]. The 

actual status of the AC drive will not change, e.g. Run/Stop 

conditions and the actual speed will remain exactly the 

same. When the AC drive is set to Local operation, the 

display will show in area B in the display. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1Operation via the Control Panel 59 

100 

511 Toggle loop 211 

341 

331 

L 

213 

221 

212 

Sub menus 

NEXT 

222 

Sub menus 

NEXT 

228 

T

Remote mode 

When the AC drive is switched to REMOTE operation, the 

AC drive will be controlled according to selected control 

methods in the menu’s “Reference Control [214]”, “Run/ 

Stop Control [215]” and “Reset Control [216]”. 

To monitor the actual Local or Remote status of the AC 

drive control, a “Loc/Rem” signal is available on the 

Digital Outputs or Relays. When the AC drive is set to 

Local, the signal on the DigOut or Relay will be active/high, 

in Remote the signal will be inactive/low. See menu “Digital 

Outputs [540]” and “Relays [550]”. 

9.2.6 Function keys 

The function keys operate the menus and are also used for 

programming and read-outs of all the menu settings. 

Table 20 Function keys 

ESC 

NEXT 

ENTER key: 

ESCAPE key: 

PREVIOUS key: 

NEXT key: 

- key: 

+ key: 

Fig. 65 Menu structure 

- step to a lower menu 

level 

- confirm a changed 

setting 

- step to a higher 

menu level 

- ignore a changed 

setting, without 

confirming 

- step to a previous 

menu within the same 

level 

- go to more significant 

digit in edit mode 

- step to a next menu 

within the same level 

- go to less significant 

digit in edit mode 

- decrease a value 

- change a selection 

- increase a value 

- change a selection 

9.3 The menu structure 

The menu structure consists of 4 levels: 

Main Menu 

1st level 

The first character in the menu number. 

2nd level The second character in the menu number. 

3rd level The third character in the menu number. 

4th level The fourth character in the menu number. 

This structure is consequently independent of the number 

of menus per level. 

For instance, a menu can have one selectable menu (Set/ 

View Reference Value [310]), or it can have 17 selectable 

menus (menu Speeds [340]). 

NOTE: If there are more than 10 menus within one level, 

the numbering continues in alphabetic order. 

Fig. 66 Menu structure 

9.3.1 The main menu 

This section gives you a short description of the functions in 

the Main Menu. 

100 Preferred View 

Displayed at power-up. It displays the actual process value as 

default. Programmable for many other read-outs. 

200 Main Setup 

Main settings to get the AC drive operable. The motor data 

settings are the most important. Also option utility and 

settings. 

300 Process and Application Parameters 

Settings more relevant to the application such as Reference 

Speed, torque limitations, PID control settings, etc. 

400 Shaft Power Monitor and Process 

Protection 

The monitor function enables the AC drive to be used as a 

load monitor to protect machines and processes against 

mechanical overload and underload. 


4161 

4162 

NG_06-F28

500 Inputs/Outputs and Virtual 

Connections 

All settings for inputs and outputs are entered here. 

600 Logical Functions and Timers 

All settings for conditional signals are entered here. 

700 View Operation and Status 

Viewing all the operational data like frequency, load, power, 

current, etc. 

800 View Trip Log 

Viewing the last 10 trips in the trip memory. 

900 Service Information and AC drive Data 

Electronic type label for viewing the software version and 

AC drive type. 

9.4 Programming during 

operation 

Most of the parameters can be changed during operation 

without stopping the AC drive. Parameters that can not be 

changed are marked with a lock symbol in the display. 

NOTE: If you try to change a function during operation 

that only can be changed when the motor is stopped, the 

message “Stop First” is displayed. 

9.5 Editing values in a menu 

Most values in the second row in a menu can be changed in 

two different ways. Enumerated values like the baud rate can 

only be changed with alternative 1. 

2621 Baudrate 

Stp 38400 

Alternative 1 

When you press the + or - keys to change a value, the cursor 

is flashing to the left in the display and the value is increased 

or decreased when you press the appropriate key. If you keep 

the + or - keys pressed, the value will increase or decrease 

continuously. When you keep the key pressed the change 

speed will increase. The Toggle key is used to change the 

sign of the entered value. The sign of the value will also 

change when zero is passed. Press Enter to confirm the value. 

331 Acc Time 

Stp 2.00s 

A 

Flashing 

Alternative 2 

Press the + or - key to enter edit mode. Then press the Prev 

or Next key to move the cursor to the right most position of 

the value that should be changed. The cursor will make the 

selected character flashes. Move the cursor using the Prev or 

Next keys. When you press the + or - keys, the character at 

the cursor position will increase or decrease. This alternative 

is suitable when you want to make large changes, i.e. from 2 

s to 400 s. 

To change the sign of the value, press the toggle key. This 

makes it possible to enter negative values (Only valid for 

certain parameters). 

Example: When you press Next the 4 will flash. 

331 Acc Time 

Stp 4.00s 

A 

Flashing 

Press Enter to save the setting and Esc to leave the edit 

mode. 

9.6 Copy current parameter to 

all sets 

When a parameter is displayed, press the Enter key for 

5 seconds. Now the text To all sets? is displayed. Press Enter 

to copy the setting for current parameter to all sets. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1Operation via the Control Panel 61

9.7 Programming example 

This example shows how to program a change of the Acc. 

Time set from 2.0 s to 4.0 s. 

The flashing cursor indicates that a change has taken place 

but is not saved yet. If at this moment, the power fails, the 

change will not be saved. 

Use the ESC, Prev, Next or the Toggle keys to proceed and 

to go to other menus. 

100 0rpm 

Stp 0.0A 

A 

Fig. 67 Programming example 

Menu 100 appears 

after power-up. 

Press Next for menu 

[200]. 

Press Next for menu 

[300]. 

Press Enter for menu 

[310]. 

Press Next two times 

for menu [330]. 

Press Enter for menu 

[331]. 

Keep key pressed 

until desired value has 

been reached. 

Save the changed 

value by pressing 

Enter. 


NEXT 

200 MAIN SETUP 

StpA 

NEXT 

300 Process 

StpA 

310 Set/View Ref 

StpA 

NEXT 

330 Run/Stop 

StpA 

331 Acc Time 

Stp 2.00s 

A 

331 Acc Time 

Stp 2.00s 

A 

Flashing 

331 Acc Time 

Stp 4.00s 

A

10. Serial communication 

The AC drive provides possibility for different types of serial 

communication. 

• Modbus RTU via RS232/485 

• Fieldbuses as Profibus DP and DeviceNet 

• Industrial Ethernet as Modbus/TCP, Profinet IO and 

EtherCAT 

10.1 Modbus RTU 

The AC drive has an asynchronous serial communication 

interface behind the control panel. It is also possible to use 

the isolated RS232/485 option board (if installed). 

The protocol used for data exchange is based on the Modbus 

RTU protocol, originally developed by Modicon. The 

physical connection is RS232. The AC drive acts as a slave 

with address 1 in a master-slave configuration. The 

communication is half-duplex. It has a standard non return 

zero (NRZ) format. 

The baud rate is fixed to 9600 (Control panel RS232 port). 

The character frame format (always 11 bits) has: 

• one start bit 

• eight data bits 

• two stop bits 

• no parity 

It is possible to temporarily connect a personal computer 

with for example the software EmoSoftCom (programming 

and monitoring software) to the RS232 connector on the 

control panel . This can be useful when copying parameters 

between AC drives etc. For permanent connection of a 

personal computer you have to use one of the 

communication option boards. 

NOTE: This RS232 port is not isolated. 

WARNING! 

Correct and safe use of a RS232 connection 

depends on the ground pins of both ports 

being the same potential. Problems can 

occur when connecting two ports of e.g. machinery and 

computers where both ground pins are not the same 

potential. This may cause hazardous ground loops that 

can destroy the RS232 ports. 

The control panel RS232 connection is not galvanically 

isolated. 

The RS232/485 option board from CG Drives & 

Automation is galvanically isolated. 

Note that the control panel RS232 connection can 

safely be used in combination with commercial available 

isolated USB to RS232 converters. 

Fig. 68 RS232 connector behind the control panel 

10.2 Parameter sets 

Communication information for the different parameter 

sets. 

The different parameter sets in the AC drive have the 

following DeviceNet instance numbers, Profibus slot/index 

numbers, Profinet IO index and EtherCAT index numbers: 

Parameter set A contains parameters 43001 to 43899. The 

parameter sets B, C and D contains the same type of 

information. For example parameter 43123 in parameter set 

A contain the same type of information as 44123 in 

parameter set B. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Serial communication 63 

A 

B 

C 

D 

Param. 

set 

Modbus/ 

DeviceNet 

Instance 

number 

43001– 

43899 

44001– 

44899 

45001– 

45899 

46001– 

46899 

Profibus 

Slot/Index 

168/160 to 

172/38 

172/140 to 

176/18 

176/120 to 

179/253 

180/100 to 

183/233 

Profinet IO 

index 

19385 - 

20283 

20385 - 

21283 

21385 - 

22283 

22385 - 

23283 

EtherCAT 

index 

(hex) 

4bb9 - 4f3b 

4fa1 - 5323 

5389 - 5706 

5771 - 5af3

10.3 Motor data 

Communication information for the different motors. 

Motor 

M1 

M2 

M3 

M4 

Modbus/ 

DeviceNet 

Instance 

number 

43041– 

43048 

44041– 

44048 

45041– 

45048 

46041– 

46048 

Profibus 

Slot/ 

Index 

168/200 

to 

168/207 

172/180 

to 

174/187 

176/160 

to 

176/167 

180/140 

to 

180/147 

Profinet IO 

index 

19425 - 

19432 

20425 - 

20432 

21425 - 

21432 

22425 - 

22432 

EtherCAT 

index 

(hex) 

4be1 - 4be8 

4fc9 - 4fd0 

53b1 - 53b8 

5799 - 57a0 

M1 contains parameters 43041 to 43048. The M2, M3, and 

M4 contains the same type of information. For example 

parameter 43043 in motor M1 contain the same type of 

information as 44043 in M2. 

10.4 Start and stop commands 

Set start and stop commands via serial communication. 

Modbus/DeviceNet 

Instance number 

42901 Reset 

42902 

42903 RunR 

42904 RunL 

Function 

Run, active together with either 

RunR or RunL to 

perform start. 

Note! Bipolar reference mode is activated if both RunR 

and RunL is active. 

10.5 Reference signal 

When menu “Reference Control [214 ]” is set to “Com” the 

following parameter data should be used: 

Default 0 

Range -16384 to 16384 

Corresponding to -100% to 100% ref 

Communication information 

Modbus /DeviceNet Instance number 42905 

Profibus slot /Index 168/64 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4b59 

Profinet IO index 19289 

Fieldbus format Int 

Modbus format Int 

10.5.1 Process value 

It is also possible to send the Process value feedback 

signal over a bus (e.g. from a process or temperature sensor) 

for use with PID Process controller [380]. 

Set menu “Process Source [321 ]” to F(Bus). Use following 

parameter data for the process value: 

Default 0 

Range -16384 to 16384 

Corresponding to -100% to 100% process value 


Modbus /DeviceNet Instance number 42906 

Profibus slot /Index 168/65 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4b5a 


Fieldbus format Int 


Example: 

(See Emotron Fielbus manual for detailed information) 

We would like to control the AC drive over a bus system 

using the first two bytes of the Basic Control Message by 

setting menu “[2661 ] FB Signal 1” to 49972. Further, we 

also want to transmit a 16 bit signed reference and a 16 bit 

process value. This is done by setting menu 

“[2662 ] FB Signal 2” to 42905 and menu “[2663 ] FB 

Signal 3” to 42906. 

NOTE! It is possible to view the transmitted process 

value in control panel menu Operation [710 ]. The 

presented value is depending on settings in menus 

“Process Min [324 ]” and “Process Max [325 ]”. 

64 Serial communication CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

10.6 Description of the EInt 

formats 

A parameter with Eint format can be represented in two 

different formats (F). Either as a 15 bit unsigned integer 

format (F= 0) or a Emotron floating point format (F=1). 

The most significant bit (B15) indicates the format used. 

See detailed description below. 

All parameters written to a register may be rounded to the 

number of significant digits used in the internal system. 

The matrix below describes the contents of the 16-bit word 

for the two different EInt formats: 

B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 

F=1 e3 e2 e1 e0 m10 m9 m8 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 

F=0 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 

If the format bit (B15) is 0, then all bits may be treated as a 

standard unsigned integer (UInt) 

If the format bit is 1, then is the number interpreted as this: 

Value = M * 10^E, where M=m10..m0 represents a 

two- complement signed mantissa and E= e3..e0 represents a 

two- complement signed exponent. 

NOTE: Parameters with EInt format may return values 

both as 15 bit unsigned int (F=0) or in Emotron floating 

point (F=1). 

Example, resolution 

If you write the value 1004 to a register and this register has 

3 significant digits, it will be stored as 1000. 

In the Emotron floating point format (F=1), one 16-bit 

word is used to represent large (or very small numbers) with 

3 significant digits. 

If data is read or written as a fixed point (i.e. no decimals) 

number between 0-32767, the 15 bit Unsigned integer 

format (F=0) may be used. 

Detailed description of Emotron floating point 

format 

e3-e0 4-bit signed exponent. Gives a value 

range: 

-8..+7 (binary 1000 .. 0111) 

m10-m0 11-bit signed mantissa.Gives a value 

range: 

-1024..+1023 (binary 

10000000000..01111111111) 

A signed number should be represented as a two 

complement binary number, like below: 

Value Binary 

-8 1000 

-7 1001 

.. 

-2 1110 

-1 1111 

0 0000 

1 0001 

2 0010 

.. 

6 0110 

7 0111 

The value represented by the Emotron floating point format 

is m·10e. 

To convert a value from the Emotron floating point format 

to a floating point value, use the formula above. 

To convert a floating point value to the Emotron floating 

point format, see the C-code example below. 

Example, floating point format 

The number 1.23 would be represented by this in Emotron 

floating point format, 

F EEEE MMMMMMMMMMM 

1 1110 00001111011 

F=1 -> floating point format used 

E=-2 

M=123 

The value is then 123x10 -2 = 1.23 

Example 15bit unsigned int format 

The value 72.0 can be represented as the fixed point number 

72. It is within the range 0-32767, which means that the 

15-bit fixed point format may be used. 

The value will then be represented as: 

B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 

Where bit 15 indicates that we are using the fixed point 

format (F=0). 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Serial communication 65

Programming example: 

typedef struct 

{ 

int m:11; // mantissa, -1024..1023 

int e: 4; // exponent -8..7 

unsigned int f: 1; // format, 1->special emoint format 

} eint16; 

//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

unsigned short int float_to_eint16(float value) 

{ 

eint16 etmp; 

int dec=0; 

while (floor(value) != value && dec=0 && value=-1000 && value=0) 

etmp.m=1; // Set sign 

else 

etmp.m=-1; // Set sign 

value=fabs(value); 

while (value>1000) 

{ 

etmp.e++; // increase exponent 

value=value/10; 

} 

value+=0.5; // round 

etmp.m=etmp.m*value; // make signed 

} 

Rreturn (*(unsigned short int *)&etmp); 

} 

//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

float eint16_to_float(unsigned short int value) 

{ 

float f; 

eint16 evalue; 

evalue=*(eint16 *)&value; 

if (evalue.f) 

{ 

if (evalue.e>=0) 

f=(int)evalue.m*pow10(evalue.e); 

else 

f=(int)evalue.m/pow10(abs(evalue.e)); 

} 

else 

f=value; 

return f; 

} 

//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

66 Serial communication CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

11. Functional Description 

This chapter describes the menus and parameters in the 

software. You will find a short description of each function 

and information about default values, ranges, etc. There are 

also tables containing communication information. You will 

find the parameter number for all available fieldbus options 

as well as the enumeration for the data. 

On our home page in the download area, you could find a 

"Communication information" list and a list to note 

“Parameter set” information. 

NOTE: Functions marked with the sign cannot be 

changed during Run Mode. 

Description of table layout 

Default: 

Selection or 

range 

Resolution of settings 

The resolution for all range settings described in this chapter 

is 3 significant digits. Exceptions are speed values which are 

presented with 4 significant digits. Table 21 shows the 

resolutions for 3 significant digits. 

Table 21 

Integer value of 

selection 

Description 

3 Digit Resolution 

0.01-9.99 0.01 

10.0-99.9 0.1 

100-999 1 

1000-9990 10 

10000-99900 100 

� 

Menu no. Menu name 

Status Selected value 

11.1 Preferred View [100] 

This menu is displayed at every power-up. During 

operation, the menu [100] will automatically be displayed 

when the keyboard is not operated for 5 minutes. The 

automatic return function will be switched off when the 

Toggle and Stop key is pressed simultaneously. As default it 

displays the reference and current values. 

100 0rpm 

Stp 0.0A 

A 

Menu “[100] Preferred View” displays the settings made in 

menu “[110], 1st line”, and “[120], 2nd line”. See Fig. 69. 

100 (1st Line) 

Stp (2nd Line) 

A 

Fig. 69 Display functions 

11.1.1 1st Line [110] 

Sets the content of the upper row in the menu 

“[100] Preferred View.” 

Default: Process Val 

Dependent on menu 

Process Val 0 Process value 

Speed 1 Speed 

Torque 2 Torque 

Process Ref 3 Process reference 

Shaft Power 4 Shaft power 

El Power 5 Electrical power 

Current 6 Current 

Output volt 7 Output voltage 

Frequency 8 Frequency 

DC Voltage 9 DC voltage 

Heatsink Tmp 10 Heatsink temperature 

Motor Temp * 11 Motor temperature 

AC drive Status 12 AC drive status 

Run Time 13 Run Time 

Energy 14 Energy 

Mains Time 15 Mains time 

110 1st Line 

Stp Process Val 

A 

* The “Motor temp” is only visible if you have the option 

PTC/PT100 card installed and a PT100 input is 

selected in menu[ 236]. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Functional Description 67


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43001 

Profibus slot/index 168/160 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4bb9 


Fieldbus format UInt 

Modbus format UInt 

11.1.2 2nd Line [120] 

Sets the content of the lower row in the menu 

“[100] Preferred View”. Same selection as in menu [110]. 

Default: Current 


120 2nd Line 

Stp Current 

A 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4bba 




11.2 Main Setup [200] 

The Main Setup menu contains the most important settings 

to get the AC drive operational and set up for the 

application. It includes different sub menus concerning the 

control of the unit, motor data and protection, utilities and 

automatic resetting of faults. This menu will instantaneously 

be adapted to build in options and show the required 

settings. 

11.2.1 Operation [210] 

Selections concerning the used motor, AC drive mode, 

control signals and serial communication are described in 

this submenu and is used to set the AC drive up for the 

application. 

Language [211] 

Select the language used on the LC Display. Once the 

language is set, this selection will not be affected by the Load 

Default command. 

Default: English 

English 0 English selected 

Svenska 1 Swedish selected 

Nederlands 2 Dutch selected 

Deutsch 3 German selected 

Français 4 French selected 

Español 5 Spanish selected 

Руccкий 6 Russian selected 

Italiano 7 Italian selected 

Cesky 8 Czech selected 

Turkish 9 Turkish selected 

211 Language 

Stp English 

A 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bc3 




68 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

Select Motor [212] 

This menu is used if you have more than one motor in your 

application. Select the motor to define. It is possible to 

define up to four different motors, M1 to M4, in the AC 

drive. For parameter set handling including Motor sets 

M1 - M4 see Chapter 11.2.6 page 83 

Default: M1 

M1 0 

M2 1 

M3 2 

M4 3 








Drive Mode [213] 

This menu is used to set the control mode for the motor. 

Settings for the reference signals and read-outs is made in 

menu “Process source, [321]”. 

• V/Hz Mode (output speed [712] in rpm) . 

Default: V/Hz 

V/Hz 2 


212 Select Motor 

Stp M1 

A 

Motor Data is connected to selected 

motor. 

213 Drive Mode 

Stp V/Hz 

A 

All control loops are related to frequency 

control. In this mode multi-motor 

applications are possible. 

NOTE: All the functions and menu 

read-outs with regard to speed and rpm 

(e.g. Max Speed = 1500 rpm, Min 

Speed=0 rpm, etc.) remain speed and 

rpm, although they represent the output 

frequency. 







Reference control [214] 

To control the speed of the motor, the AC drive needs a 

reference signal. This reference signal can be controlled by a 

remote source from the installation, the keyboard of the AC 

drive, or by serial or fieldbus communication. Select the 

required reference control for the application in this menu. 

Default: Remote 

Remote 0 

Keyboard 1 

Com 2 

Option 3 


214 Ref Control 

Stp Remote 

A 

The reference signal comes from the 

analogue inputs of the terminal strip 

(terminals 1-22). 

Reference is set with the + and - keys on 

the Control Panel. Can only be done in 

menu “Set/View reference [310]”. 

The reference is set via the serial 

communication (RS 485, Fieldbus.) 

See section 10.5, page 64 for further 

information. 

The reference is set via an option. Only 

available if the option can control the 

reference value. 

NOTE: If the reference is switched from Remote to 

Keyboard, the last remote reference value will be the 

default value for the control panel. 








Run/Stop Control [215] 

This function is used to select the source for run and stop 

commands. This is described on page 111. 

Start/stop via analogue signals can be achieved by using 

function “Stp

Local/Remote key function [217] 

The Toggle key on the keyboard, see section 9.2.5, page 59, 

has two functions and is activated in this menu. As default 

the key is just set to operate as a Toggle key that moves you 

easily through the menus in the toggle loop. The second 

function of the key allows you to easily swap between Local 

and normal operation (set up via [214] and [215]) of the AC 

drive. Local mode can also be activated via a digital input. If 

both [2171] and [2172] is set to Standard, the function is 

disabled. 

Default: Standard 

Standard 0 Local reference control set via [214] 

Remote 1 Local reference control via remote 

Keyboard 2 Local reference control via keyboard 

Com 3 Local reference control via communication 









2171 LocRefCtrl 

Stp Standard 

A 

2172 LocRunCtrl 

Stp Standard 

A 

Standard 0 Local Run/Stop control set via [215] 

Remote 1 Local Run/Stop control via remote 

Keyboard 2 Local Run/Stop control via keyboard 

Com 3 Local Run/Stop control via communication 








Lock Code? [218] 

To prevent the keyboard being used or to change the setup 

of the AC drive and/or process control, the keyboard can be 

locked with a password. This menu, “Lock Code [218]”, is 

used to lock and unlock the keyboard. Enter the password 

“291” to lock/unlock the keyboard operation. If the 

keyboard is not locked (default) the selection “Lock Code?” 

will appear. If the keyboard is already locked, the selection 

“Unlock Code?” will appear. 

When the keyboard is locked, parameters can be viewed but 

not changed. The reference value can be changed and the 

AC drive can be started, stopped and reversed if these 

functions are set to be controlled from the keyboard. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0–9999 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bca 


Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 


Rotation [219] 

218 Lock Code? 

Stp 0 

A 

Overall limitation of motor rotation direction 

This function limits the overall rotation, either to left or 

right or both directions. This limit is prior to all other 

selections, e.g.: if the rotation is limited to right, a Run-Left 

command will be ignored. To define left and right rotation 

we assume that the motor is connected U-U, V-V and W-W. 

Speed Direction and Rotation 

The speed direction can be controlled by: 

• RunR/RunL commands on the control panel. 

• RunR/RunL commands on the terminal strip 

(terminals 1-22). 

• Via the serial interface options. 

• The parameter sets. 


Fig. 70 Rotation 

In this menu you set the general rotation for the motor. 

Default: R + L 

R 1 

L 2 

Speed direction is limited to right 

rotation. The input and key RunL are 

disabled. 

Speed direction is limited to left rotation. 

The input and key RunR are disabled. 

R+L 3 Both speed directions allowed. 

Right 

Left 

219 Rotation 

Stp R+L 

A 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bcb 




11.2.2 Remote Signal Level/Edge 

[21A] 

In this menu you select the way to control the inputs for 

RunR, RunL and Reset that are operated via the digital 

inputs on the terminal strip. The inputs are default set for 

level-control, and will be active as long as the input is made 

and kept high. When edge-control is selected, the input will 

be activated by the low to high transition of the input. See 

Chapter 7.2 page 42 for more information. 

Default: Level 

Level 0 

Edge 1 


21A Level/Edge 

Stp Level 

A 

The inputs are activated or deactivated 

by a continuous high or low signal. Is 

commonly used if, for example, a PLC is 

used to operate the AC drive. 

The inputs are activated by a transition; 

for Run and Reset from “low” to “high” 

and for Stop from "high" to "low". 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4bcc 




CAUTION! 

Level controlled inputs DO NOT comply with the 

Machine Directive if the inputs are directly 

used to start and stop the machine. 

NOTE: Edge controlled inputs can comply with the 

Machine Directive (see the Chapter 8. page 55) if the 

inputs are directly used to start and stop the machine. 

11.2.3 Mains supply voltage [21B] 

WARNING! 

This menu must be set according to the AC 

drive product lable and the supply voltage 

used. Wrong setting might damage the AC 

drive or brake resistor. 

In this menu the nominal mains supply voltage connected to 

the AC drive can be selected. The setting will be valid for all 

parameter sets. The default setting, Not defined, is never 

selectable and is only visible until a new value is selected. 

Once the supply voltage is set, this selection will not be 

affected by the Load Default command [243]. 

72 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 

!

Brake chopper activation level is adjusted using the setting 

of [21B]. 

NOTE: The setting is affected by the “Load from CP” 

command [245] and if loading parameter file via 

EmoSoftCom. 

Default: Not defined 

Not Defined 0 

21B Supply Volts 

Stp Not defined 

A 

Inverter default value used. Only valid if 

this parameter is never set. 

220-240 V 1 Only valid for FDU48/52 

380-415 V 3 Only valid for FDU48/52/69 

440-480 V 4 Only valid for FDU48/52/69 

500-525 V 5 Only valid for FDU52/69 

550-600 V 6 Only valid for FDU69 

660-690 V 7 Only valid for FDU69 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4d35 




11.2.4 Motor Data [220] 

In this menu you enter the motor data to adapt the AC drive 

to the connected motor. This will increase the control 

accuracy as well as different read-outs and analogue output 

signals. 

Motor M1 is selected as default and motor data entered will 

be valid for motor M1. If you have more than one motor 

you need to select the correct motor in menu [212] before 

entering motor data. 

NOTE 1: The parameters for motor data cannot be 

changed during run mode. 

NOTE 2: The default settings are for a standard 4-pole 

motor according to the nominal power of the AC drive. 

NOTE 3: Parameter set cannot be changed during run if 

the sets is set for different motors. 

NOTE 4: Motor Data in the different sets M1 to M4 can 

be revert to default setting in menu “[243] Default>Set”. 

WARNING! 

Enter the correct motor data to prevent 

dangerous situations and assure correct 

control. 

Motor Voltage [221] 

Set the nominal motor voltage. 

Default: 

400 V for FDU48 



Range: 100-700 V 

Resolution 1 V 

NOTE: The Motor Volts value will always be stored as a 3 

digit value with a resolution of 1 V. 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4be1 


Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 V 

Modbus format EInt 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Functional Description 73 

� 

221 Motor Volts 

Stp M1: 400V 

A

Motor Frequency [222] 

Set the nominal motor frequency. 

� 

Default: 50 Hz 

Range: 24-300 Hz 

Resolution 1 Hz 






Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 Hz 


Motor Power [223] 

Set the nominal motor power. If parallel motors, set the 

value as sum of motors power. 

� 

Default: P NOM AC drive 

Range: 1W-150% x PNOM Resolution 3 significant digits 

NOTE: The Motor Power value will always be stored as a 

3 digit value in W up to 999 W and in kW for all higher 

powers. 


222 Motor Freq 

Stp M1: 50Hz 

A 

223 Motor Power 

Stp M1: (P NOM)kW 

A 





Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 W 


P NOM is the nominal AC drive power. 

Motor Current [224] 

Set the nominal motor current. If parallel motors, set the 

value as sum of motors current. 

Default: I MOT (see Note 2 page 73) 

Range: 25 - 150 % x I NOM 






Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 A 


NOTE: The default settings are for a standard 4-pole 

motor according to the nominal power of the AC drive. 

Motor Speed [225] 

Set the nominal asynchronous motor speed. 

Default: nMOT (see Note 2 page 73) 

Range: 50 - 18000 rpm 

Resolution 1 rpm, 4 sign digits 

WARNING! 

Do NOT enter a synchronous (no-load) motor 

speed. 

NOTE: Maximum speed [343] is not automatically 

changed when the motor speed is changed. 

NOTE: Entering a wrong, too low value can cause a 

dangerous situation for the driven application due to 

high speeds. 


� 

� 

224 Motor Curr 

Stp M1: (IMOT)A 

A 

225 Motor Speed 

Stp M1: (n MOT )rpm 

A






Fieldbus format UInt. 1=1 rpm 


Motor Poles [226] 

When the nominal speed of the motor is �500 rpm, the 

additional menu for entering the number of poles, [226], 

appears automatically. In this menu the actual pole number 

can be set which will increase the control accuracy of the AC 

drive. 

� 

Default: 4 

Range: 2-144 






Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 pole 


Motor Cos � [227] 

Set the nominal Motor cosphi (power factor). 

� 

Default: Cosφ NOM (see Note 2 page 73) 

Range: 0.50 - 1.00 

226 Motor Poles 

Stp M1: 4 

A 

227 Motor Cos� 

Stp M1:CosφNOM 

A 






Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 


Motor ventilation [228] 

Parameter for setting the type of motor ventilation. Affects 

the characteristics of the I 2 t motor protection by lowering 

the actual overload current at lower speeds. 

Default: Self 

None 0 Limited I 2 t overload curve. 

Self 1 Normal I2 t overload curve. Means that the 

motor stands lower current at low speed. 

Forced 2 


When the motor has no cooling fan, None is selected and 

the current level is limited to 55% of rated motor current. 

With a motor with a shaft mounted fan, Self is selected and 

the current for overload is limited to 87% from 20% of 

synchronous speed. At lower speed, the overload current 

allowed will be smaller. 

When the motor has an external cooling fan, Forced is 

selected and the overload current allowed starts at 90% from 

rated motor current at zero speed, up to nominal motor 

current at 70% of synchronous speed. 

Fig. 71 shows the characteristics with respect for Nominal 

Current and Speed in relation to the motor ventilation type 

selected. 

Fig. 71 I 2 t curves 

Expanded I 2 t overload curve. Means that the 

motor stands almost the whole current also 

at lower speed. 







xI nom for I 2 t 


1.00 

0.90 

0.87 

0.55 

Forced 

� 

Self 

None 

228 Motor Vent 

Stp M1: Self 

A 

0.20 0.70 2.00 

xSync Speed

Motor Identification Run [229] 

This function is used when the AC drive is put into 

operation for the first time. To achieve an optimal control 

performance, fine tuning of the motor parameters using a 

motor ID run is needed. During the test run the display 

shows “Test Run” flashing. 

To activate the Motor ID run, select “Short” and press 

Enter. Then press RunL or RunR on the control panel to 

start the ID run. If menu 

“[219] Rotation” is set to L the RunR key is inactive and 

vice versa. The ID run can be aborted by giving a Stop 

command via the control panel or Enable input. The 

parameter will automatically return to OFF when the test is 

completed. The message “Test Run OK!” is displayed. 

Before the AC drive can be operated normally again, press 

the STOP/RESET key on the control panel. 

During the Short ID run the motor shaft does not rotate. 

The AC drive measures the rotor and stator resistance. 

� 

Default: Off, see Note 

Off 0 Not active 

Short 1 


229 Motor ID-Run 

Stp M1: Off 

A 

Parameters are measured with injected DC 

current. No rotation of the shaft will occur. 







NOTE: To run the AC drive it is not mandatory for the ID 

RUN to be executed, but without it the performance will 

not be optimal. 

NOTE: If the ID Run is aborted or not completed the 

message “Interrupted!” will be displayed. The previous 

data do not need to be changed in this case. Check that 

the motor data are correct. 

Motor Sound [22A] 

Sets the sound characteristic of the AC drive output stage by 

changing the switching frequency and/or pattern. Generally 

the motor noise will go down at higher switching 

frequencies. 

Default: F 

E 0 Switching frequency 1.5 kHz 

F 1 Switching frequency 3 kHz 

G 2 Switching frequency 6 kHz 

H 3 

Advanced 4 


Encoder Feedback [22B] 

Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. This 

parameter enables or disables the encoder feedback from the 

motor to the AC drive. 


Switching frequency 6 kHz, random 

frequency (+750 Hz) 

Switching frequency and PWM mode 

setup via [22E] 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4bea 




NOTE: At switching frequencies >3 kHz derating may 

become necessary. 

NOTE: If the heat sink temperature gets too high the 

switching frequency is decreased to avoid tripping. This 

is done automatically in the AC drive. The default 

switching frequency is 3 kHz. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Encoder feedback disabled 

On 1 Encoder feedback enabled 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4beb 





� 

� 

22A Motor Sound 

Stp M1: F 

A 

22B Encoder 

Stp M1: Off 

A

Encoder Pulses [22C] 


parameter describes the number of pulses per rotation for 

your encoder, i.e. it is encoder specific. For more 

information please see the encoder manual. 

� 

Default: 1024 

Range: 5–16384 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bec 


Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 pulse 


Encoder Speed [22D] 


parameter shows the measured motor speed. To check if the 

encoder is correctly installed, set Encoder Feedback [22B] to 

Off, run the AC drive at any speed and compare with the 

value in this menu. The value in this menu [22D] should be 

about the same as the motor speed [230]. If you get the 

wrong sign for the value, swap encoder input A and B. 

Unit: rpm 

22C Enc Pulses 

Stp M1: 1024 

A 

22D Enc Speed 

Stp M1: XXrpm 

A 

Resolution: speed measured via the encoder 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4b5f 


Fieldbus format Int, 1=1 rpm 


Motor PWM [22E] 

Menus for advanced setup of motor modulation properties 

PWM = Pulse Width Modulation). 

Note: Menus [22E1] - [22E3] are only visible if [22A] is 

set to “Advanced”. 

PWM Fswitch [22E1] 

Set the PWM switching frequency of the AC drive 

Default: 3.00 kHz 

Range 1.50 - 6.00kHz 

Resolution 0.01kHz 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bed 


Fieldbus format Long, 1=1Hz 


PWM Mode [22E2] 


Standard 0 Standard 

Sine Filt 1 


PWM Random [22E3] 

Sine Filter mode for use with output Sine 

Filters 

NOTE: Switching frequency is fixed when “Sine Filt” is 

selected. This means that it is not possible to control the 

switching frequency based on temperature. 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4bee 




Default: Off 

22E1 PWM Fswitch 

Stp 3.00kHz 

A 

22E2 PWM Mode 

Stp Standard 

A 

22E3 PWM Random 

Stp Off 

A 


Off 0 Random modulation is Off. 

On 1 


Random modulation is active. Random 

frequency variation range is ± 1/8 of level 

set in [E22E1]. 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4bef 




Encoder Pulse counter [22F] 

Only visible if the Encoder option is installed. Added menu/ 

parameter for accumulated QEP (Quadrature Encoder 

Pulse) encoder pulses. Can be preset to any value within bus 

format used (Int = 2 byte, Long = 4 byte). 

Default: 0 

Resolution 1 

22F Enc Puls Ctr 

Stp 0 

A 






Fieldbus format 

Long, 1=1 quad 

encoder pulse 


Note: For a 1024 pulse encoder [22F] will count 

1024 * 4= 4096 pulses per turn. 

Encoder fault and speed monitoring 

[22G] 

Parameters for encoder fault monitoring and speed 

supervision by use of the encoder feedback for detecting 

speed deviation compared to internal speed reference signal. 

Similar speed deviation functionality is also available in the 

Crane option, with parameters for speed bandwidth and 

delay time. 

Encoder fault trip conditions: 

1. No encoder board detected after power up and AC drive 

is setup to use encoder. 

2. Lost communication to encoder board for more than 2 

seconds. 

3. If no pulses detected for set delay time [22G1] and drive 

in Torque Limit (TL) or Current Limit (CL). 

Encoder speed deviation trip condition: 

Encoder speed outside set speed deviation band [22G2] for 

set delay time [22G1]. 

Note: Encoder speed deviation trip re-uses “Deviation 2” 

trip message with ID = 2. 

Encoder fault delay time [22G1] 

Define the encoder fault and speed deviation delay time. 

Default: Off 

Range Off, 0.01 - 10.00 s where Off = 0 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bf0 


Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s 


Encoder fault speed deviation band [22G2] 

Defines the max allowed speed deviation band = difference 

between measured encoder speed and speed ramp output. 

Default: 10% 

Range 0 - 400 % 






Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 % 


Encoder max fault counter [22G3] 

This parameter shows the maximum time that speed 

deviation exceeds the allowed deviation band set in [22G2]. 

The parameter is intended to be used during commissioning 

for setting up [22G1] and [22G2] to avoid nuisance trips 

and can be cleared by setting to 0. 

Default: 0.000s 

Range 0.00 - 10.00 s 

22G1 Enc F Delay 

Stp M1:Off 

A 

22G2 Enc F Band 

Stp M1:10% 

A 

22G3 Max EncFCtr 

Stp 0.000s 


Communication information 11.2.5 Motor Protection [230] 





Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.001s 


NOTE: The value is volatile and lost at power down. It is 

possible to reset the value by clearing the parameter. 

This function protects the motor against overload based on 

the standard IEC 60947-4-2. 

Motor I 2 t Type [231] 

The motor protection function makes it possible to protect 

the motor from overload as published in the standard IEC 

60947-4-2. It does this using Motor I2t Current, [232] as a 

reference. The Motor I2t Time [233] is used to define the 

time behaviour of the function. The current set in [232] can 

be delivered infinite in time. If for instance in [233] a time 

of 1000 s is chosen the upper curve of Fig. 72 is valid. The 

value on the x-axis is the multiple of the current chosen in 

[232]. The time [233] is the time that an overloaded motor 

is switched off or is reduced in power at 1.2 times the 

current set in [232]. 

Default: Trip 

Off 0 I2t motor protection is not active. 

Trip 1 When the I2t time is exceeded, the AC 

drive will trip on “Motor I 2t”. Limit 2 


231 Mot I 2 t Type 

Stp Trip 

A 

This mode helps to keep the inverter 

running when the Motor I2t function is just 

before tripping the AC drive. The trip is 

replaced by current limiting with a 

maximum current level set by the value 

out of the menu [232]. In this way, if the 

reduced current can drive the load, the AC 

drive continues running. If there is no 

reduction in thermal load, the drive will 

trip. 







NOTE: When Mot I2t Type=Limit, the AC drive can control 

the speed < MinSpeed to reduce the motor current. 


Motor I 2 t Current [232] 

Sets the current limit for the motor I 2 t protection. 

Default: 100% of I MOT 

Range: 0–150% of I MOT ( set in menu [224]) 






Fieldbus format Long, 1=1% 


NOTE: When the selection Limit is set in menu [231], the 

value must be above the no-load current of the motor. 

t [s] 

Fig. 72 I 2 t function 

232 Mot I 2 t Curr 

Stp 100% 

A 

100000 

10000 

1000 

100 

10 

60 s (120%) 

120 s (120%) 

Motor I 2 t Time [233] 

Sets the time of the I 2 t function. After this time the limit for 

the I 2 t is reached if operating with 120% of the I 2 t current 

value. Valid when start from 0 rpm. 

NOTE: Not the time constant of the motor. 

Default: 60 s 

Range: 60–1200 s 

233 Mot I 2 t Time 

Stp 60s 

A 






Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s 


240 s (120%) 

1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 

i / I2t-current 

480 s (120%) 

1000 s (120%) 

Actual output current/ I 2 t-current 


Fig. 72 shows how the function integrates the square of the 

motor current according to the “Mot I 2 t Curr [232]” and 

the “Mot I 2 t Time [233]”. 

When the selection Trip is set in menu [231] the AC drive 

trips if this limit is exceeded. 

When the selection Limit is set in menu [231] the AC drive 

reduces the torque if the integrated value is 95% or closer to 

the limit, so that the limit cannot be exceeded. 

NOTE: If it is not possible to reduce the current, the AC 

drive will trip after exceeding 110% of the limit. 

Example 

In Fig. 72 the thick grey line shows the following example. 

• Menu “[232] Mot I 2 t Curr” is set to 100%. 

1.2 x 100% = 120% 

• Menu “[233] Mot I2t Time” is set to 1000 s. 

This means that the AC drive will trip or reduce after 1000 s 

if the current is 1.2 times of 100% nominal motor current. 

Thermal Protection [234] 

Only visible if the PTC/PT100 option board is installed. Set 

the PTC input for thermal protection of the motor. The 

motor thermistors (PTC) must comply with DIN 44081/ 

44082. Please refer to the manual for the PTC/PT100 

option board. 

Menu [234] Thermal Prot” contains functions to enable or 

disable the PTC input. Here you can select and activate 

PTC and/or PT100. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 

PTC 1 

PT100 2 

PTC+PT100 3 


234 Thermal Prot 

Stp Off 

A 

PTC and PT100 motor protection are 

disabled. 

Enables the PTC protection of the motor 

via the insulated option board. 

Enables the PT100 protection for the 

motor via the insulated option board. 

Enables the PTC protection as well as the 

PT100 protection for the motor via the 

insulated option board. 







NOTE: PTC option and PT100 selections can only be 

selected in menu [234] if the option board is mounted. 

NOTE: If you select the PTC option, the PT100 inputs as 

motor protection are ignored. 

Motor Class [235] 

Only visible if the PTC/PT100 option board is installed. Set 

the class of motor used. The trip levels for the PT100 sensor 

will automatically be set according to the setting in this 

menu. 

Default: F 140�C 

A 100�C 0 

E 115�C 1 

B 120�C 2 

F 140�C 3 

F Nema 145�C 4 

H 165�C 5 

235 Mot Class 

Stp F 140�C 

A 








NOTE: This menu is only valid for PT 100. 


PT100 Inputs [236] 

Sets which of PT100 inputs that should be used for thermal 

protection. Deselecting not used PT100 inputs on the PTC/ 

PT100 option board in order to ignore those inputs, i.e. 

extra external wiring is not needed if port is not used. 

Default: PT100 1+2+3 

Selection: 


PT100 1, PT100 2, PT100 1+2, PT100 

3, PT100 1+3, PT100 2+3, PT100 

1+2+3 

PT100 1 1 Channel 1 used for PT100 protection 


PT100 1+2 3 Channel 1+2 used for PT100 protection 




PT100 1+2+3 7 

236 PT100 Inputs 

Stp PT100 1+2+3 

A 

Channel 1+2+3 used for PT100 

protection 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4bfa 




NOTE: This menu is only valid for PT 100 thermal 

protection if PT100 is enabled in menu [234]. 

Motor PTC [237] 

For AC drive sizes B to D (FDU48/52-003-074) there is 

optional possibility to directly connect motor PTC (not to 

be mixed up with PTC/PT100 option board, see Chapter 

13.7 page 193). 

In this menu the internal motor PTC hardware option is 

enabled. This PTC input complies with DIN 44081/44082. 

For electrical specification please refer to the separate 

manual for the PTC/PT100 option board, same data applies 

(could be found on www.emotron.com/www.cgglobal.com). 

This menu is only visible if a PTC (or resistor

11.2.6 Parameter Set Handling 

[240] 

There are four different parameter sets available in the AC 

drive. These parameter sets can be used to set the AC drive 

up for different processes or applications such as different 

motors used and connected, activated PID controller, 

different ramp time settings, etc. 

A parameter set consists of all parameters with the exception 

of the Global parameters. The Global parameters are only 

able to have one value for all parameter sets. 

Following parameters are Global: [211] Language, [217] 

Local Remote, [218] Lock Code, [220] Motor Data, [241] 

Select Set, [260] Serial Communication and [21B]Mains 

Supply Voltage . 

NOTE: Actual timers are common for all sets. When a set 

is changed the timer functionality will change according 

to the new set, but the timer value will stay unchanged. 

Select Set [241] 

Here you select the parameter set. Every menu included in 

the parameter sets is designated A, B, C or D depending on 

the active parameter set. Parameter sets can be selected from 

the keyboard, via the programmable digital inputs or via 

serial communication. Parameter sets can be changed during 

the run. If the sets are using different motors (M1 to M4) 

the set will be changed only when the motor is stopped. 

Default: A 

Selection: A, B, C, D, DigIn, Com, Option 

A 0 

B 1 

C 2 

D 3 

DigIn 4 

Com 5 

Option 6 

241 Select Set 

Stp A 

A 

Fixed selection of one of the 4 parameter 

sets A, B, C or D. 

Parameter set is selected via a digital 

input. Define which digital input in menu 

“[520] Digital inputs”. 

Parameter set is selected via serial 


The parameter set is set via an option. 

Only available if the option can control the 

selection. 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bce 




The active set can be viewed with function 

[721] VSD status. 

NOTE: Parameter set cannot be changed during run if 

the parameter set includes change of the motor set 

(M2-M4). In this case always stop the motor before 

changing parameter set. 

Prepare parameter Set when different Motor data 

M1 - M4: 

1. Select desired parameter Set to be set in [241] A - D. 

2. Select “Motor Set [212]” if other than the default Set 

M1. 

3. Set relevant motor data in the Menu group [220]. 

4. Set other desired parameter settings to belong to this 

parameter Set. 

To prepare a Set for another motor, repeat these steps. 

Copy Set [242] 

This function copies the content of a parameter set into 

another parameter set. 

242 Copy Set 

Stp A>B 

A 

Default: A>B 

A>B 0 Copy set A to set B 

A>C 1 Copy set A to set C 

A>D 2 Copy set A to set D 

B>A 3 Copy set B to set A 

B>C 4 Copy set B to set C 

B>D 5 Copy set B to set D 

C>A 6 Copy set C to set A 

C>B 7 Copy set C to set B 

C>D 8 Copy set C to set D 

D>A 9 Copy set D to set A 

D>B 10 Copy set D to set B 

D>C 11 Copy set D to set C 





EtherCAT index (hex) 4bcd 




NOTE: The actual value of menu [310] will not be copied 

into the other set. 

A>B means that the content of parameter set A is copied 

into parameter set B. 

Load Default Values Into Set [243] 

With this function three different levels (factory settings) 

can be selected for the four parameter sets. When loading 

the default settings, all changes made in the software are set 

to factory settings. This function also includes selections for 

loading default settings to the four different Motor Data 

Sets. 

Default: A 

A 0 

B 1 

C 2 

D 3 

ABCD 4 

Factory 5 

M1 6 

M2 7 

M3 8 

M4 9 

M1234 10 


243 Default>Set 

Stp A 

A 

Only the selected parameter set will revert 

to its default settings. 

All four parameter sets will revert to the 

default settings. 

All settings, except [211], [221]-[22D], 

[261] and [923], will revert to the default 

settings. 

Only the selected motor set will revert to its 


All four motor sets will revert to default 

settings. 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4bcf 




NOTE: Trip log hour counter and other VIEW ONLY menus 

are not regarded as settings and will be unaffected. 

NOTE: If “Factory” is selected, the message “Sure?” is 

displayed. Press the + key to display “Yes” and then 

Enter to confirm. 

NOTE: The parameters in menu “[220] Motor data”, are 

not affected by loading defaults when restoring 

parameter sets A–D. 

Copy All Settings to Control Panel [244] 

All the settings can be copied into the control panel 

including the motor data. Start commands will be ignored 

during copying. 

Default: No Copy 

No Copy 0 Nothing will be copied 

Copy 1 Copy all settings 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bd0 




NOTE: The actual value of menu [310] will not be copied 

into control panel memory set. 


� 

244 Copy to CP 

Stp No Copy 

A

Load Settings from Control Panel [245] 

This function can load all four parameter sets from the 

control panel to the AC drive. Parameter sets from the 

source AC drive are copied to all parameter sets in the target 

AC drive, i.e. A to A, B to B, C to C and D to D. 

Start commands will be ignored during loading. 

Default: No Copy 

No Copy 0 Nothing will be loaded. 

A 1 Data from parameter set A is loaded. 

B 2 Data from parameter set B is loaded. 

C 3 Data from parameter set C is loaded. 

D 4 Data from parameter set D is loaded. 

ABCD 5 

A+Mot 6 

B+Mot 7 

C+Mot 8 

D+Mot 9 

� 

ABCD+Mot 10 

245 Load from CP 

Stp No Copy 

A 

Data from parameter sets A, B, C and D are 

loaded. 

Parameter set A and Motor data are 

loaded. 

Parameter set B and Motor data are 

loaded. 

Parameter set C and Motor data are 

loaded. 

Parameter set D and Motor data are 

loaded. 

Parameter sets A, B, C, D and Motor data 

are loaded. 

M1 11 Data from motor 1 is loaded. 




M1M2M3 

M4 

15 Data from motor 1, 2, 3 and 4 are loaded. 

All 16 All data is loaded from the control panel. 








NOTE: Loading from the control panel will not affect the 

value in menu [310]. 

11.2.7 Trip Autoreset/Trip Conditions 

[250] 

The benefit of this feature is that occasional trips that do not 

affect the process will be automatically reset. Only when the 

failure keeps on coming back, recurring at defined times and 

therefore cannot be solved by the AC drive, will the unit give 

an alarm to inform the operator that attention is required. 

For all trip functions that can be activated by the user you 

can select to control the motor down to zero speed according 

to set deceleration ramp to avoid water hammer. 

Also see section 12.2, page 184. 

Autoreset example: 

In an application it is known that the main supply voltage 

sometimes disappears for a very short time, a so-called “dip”. 

That will cause the AC drive to trip an “Undervoltage 

alarm”. Using the Autoreset function, this trip will be 

acknowledged automatically. 

• Enable the Autoreset function by making the reset input 

continuously high. 

• Activate the Autoreset function in the menu [251], 

Number of trips. 

• Select in menus [252] to [25N] the Trip condition that 

are allowed to be automatically reset by the Autoreset 

function after the set delay time has expired. 

Number of Trips [251] 

Any number set above 0 activates the Autoreset. This means 

that after a trip, the AC drive will restart automatically 

according to the number of attempts selected. No restart 

attempts will take place unless all conditions are normal. 

If the Autoreset counter (not visible) contains more trips 

than the selected number of attempts, the Autoreset cycle 

will be interrupted. No Autoreset will then take place. 

If there are no trips for more than 10 minutes, the Autoreset 

counter decreases by one. 

If the maximum number of trips has been reached, the trip 

message hour counter is marked with an “A”. 

If the Autoreset is full then the AC drive must be reset by a 

normal Reset. 

Example: 

• Autoreset = 5 

• Within 10 minutes 6 trips occur 

• At the 6th trip there is no Autoreset, because the 

Autoreset trip log contains 5 trips already. 

• To reset, apply a normal reset: set the reset input high to 

low and high again to maintain the Autoreset function. 

The Autoreset counter is reset (not visible). 


Default: 0 (no Autoreset) 

Range: 0–10 attempts 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bff 




NOTE: An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp 

time. 

Over temperature [252] 

Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the 

time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function 

is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

251 No of Trips 

Stp 0 

A 

252 Overtemp 

Stp Off 

A 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4c00 





time. 

Overvolt D [253] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 









time. 

Overvolt G [254] 

Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the 


is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


253 Overvolt D 

Stp Off 

A 

254 Overvolt G 

Stp Off 

A 








Overvolt [255] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 








Motor Lost [256] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

NOTE: Only visible when Motor Lost is selected in menu 

[423]. 


255 Overvolt 

Stp Off 

A 

256 Motor Lost 

Stp Off 

A 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4c0b 




Locked Rotor [257] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4c0e 




Power Fault [258] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


257 Locked Rotor 

Stp Off 

A 

258 Power Fault 

Stp Off 

A 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4c0f 





Undervoltage [259] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 








Motor I 2 t [25A] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

259 Undervoltage 

Stp Off 

A 

25A Motor I 2 t 

Stp Off 

A 








Motor I 2 t Trip Type [25B] 

Select the preferred way to react to a Motor I 2 t trip. 

Default: Trip 

Trip 0 The motor will trip 

Deceleration 1 The motor will decelerate 








PT100 [25C] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 








PT100 Trip Type [25D] 



is active. 

Default: Trip 

25B Motor I 2 t TT 

Stp Trip 

A 

25C PT100 

Stp Off 

A 

25D PT100 TT 

Stp Trip 

A 

Selection: Same as menu [25B] 







Fieldbus format Uint 


PTC [25E] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4c0c 




PTC Trip Type [25F] 

Select the preferred way to react to a PTC trip. 

Default: Trip 

25E PTC 

Stp Off 

A 

25F PTC TT 

Stp Trip 

A 





EtherCAT index (hex) 4c0d 




External Trip [25G] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 








External Trip Type [25H] 

Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip. 

Default: Trip 



25G Ext Trip 

Stp Off 

A 

25H Ext Trip TT 

Stp Trip 

A 








Communication Error [25I] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 








Communication Error Trip Type [25J] 

Select the preferred way to react to a communication trip. 

Default: Trip 

25I Com Error 

Stp Off 

A 

25J Com Error TT 

Stp Trip 

A 









Min Alarm [25K] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 








Min Alarm Trip Type [25L] 

Select the preferred way to react to a min alarm trip. 

Default: Trip 



25K Min Alarm 

Stp Off 

A 

25L Min Alarm TT 

Stp Trip 

A 








Max Alarm [25M] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 








Max Alarm Trip Type [25N] 

Select the preferred way to react to a max alarm trip. 

Default: Trip 









Over current F [25O] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

25M Max Alarm 

Stp Off 

A 

25N Max Alarm TT 

Stp Trip 

A 

25O Over curr F 

Stp Off 

A 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4c0a 




Pump [25P] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 








Over Speed [25Q] 



is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

25P Pump 

Stp Off 

A 

25Q Over speed 

Stp Off 

A 









External Motor Temperature [25R] 

Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. When 

the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the 

function is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 








External Motor Trip Type [25S] 


Default: Trip 









Liquid cooling low level [25T] 




Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

25R Ext Mot Temp 

Stp Off 

A 

25S Ext Mot TT 

Stp Trip 

A 

25T LC Level 

Stp Off 

A 








Liquid Cooling Low level Trip Type [25U] 


Default: Trip 









Brake Fault [25V] 




Default Off 

25U LC Level TT 

Stp Trip 

A 

25V Brk Fault 

Stp Off 

A 

Off 0 Autoreset not activated. 

1 - 3600s 1 - 3600s Brake fault auto reset delay time. 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bfe 


Fieldbus format Long, 1=1s 



Encoder [25W] 

Encoder delay time, starts counting when the fault 

disappears. When the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will 

be reset if the function is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4de9 




Deviation [25X] 

Deviation delay time, starts counting when the fault is gone. 

When the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if 

the function is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s 

25W Encoder 

Stp Off 

A 

25X Deviation 

Stp Off 

A 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4dea 




11.2.8 Serial Communication [260] 

This function is to define the communication parameters for 

serial communication. There are two types of options 

available for serial communication, RS232/485 (Modbus/ 

RTU) and fieldbus modules (Profibus, DeviceNet, 

Modbus/TCP, Profinet IO and EtherCAT). 

For more information see Chapter 10. page 63 and 

respective option manual. 

Comm Type [261] 

Select RS232/485 [262] or Fieldbus [263]. 

Default: RS232/485 

RS232/485 0 RS232/485 selected 

Fieldbus 1 


Fieldbus selected (Profibus, DeviceNet, 

Modbus/TCP, Profinet IO or EtherCAT) 







NOTE: Toggling the setting in this menu will perform a 

soft reset (re-boot) of the Fieldbus module. 

RS232/485 [262] 

Press Enter to set up the parameters for RS232/485 

(Modbus/RTU) communication. 

Baud rate [2621] 

Set the baud rate for the communication. 

NOTE: This baud rate is only used for the isolated 

RS232/485 option. 


� 

261 Com Type 

Stp RS232/485 

A 

262 RS232/485 

Stp A

Default: 9600 

2400 0 

4800 1 

9600 2 

19200 3 

38400 4 

Selected baud rate 








Address [2622] 

Enter the unit address for the AC drive. 

NOTE: This address is only used for the isolated RS232/ 

485 option. 

Default: 1 

Selection: 1–247 


2621 Baudrate 

Stp 9600 

A 

2622 Address 

Stp 1 

A 







Fieldbus [263] 

Press Enter to set up the parameters for fieldbus 


263 Fieldbus 

Stp A 

Address [2631] 

Enter/view the unit/node address of the AC drive. Read & 

write access for Profibus, DeviceNet. Read - only for 

EtherCAT. 

Default: 62 

Range: Profibus 0–126, DeviceNet 0–63 

Node address valid for Profibus(RW), DeviceNet (RW) and 

EtherCAT (RO). 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bda 




Process Data Mode [2632] 

Enter the mode of process data (cyclic data). For further 

information, see the Fieldbus option manual. 

Default: Basic 

None 0 Control/status information is not used. 

Basic 4 

Extended 8 


2631 Address 

Stp 62 

A 

2632 PrData Mode 

Stp Basic 

A 

4 byte process data control/status 

information is used. 

4 byte process data (same as Basic 

setting) + additional proprietary protocol 

for advanced users is used. 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4bdb 





Read/Write [2633] 

Select read/write to control the inverter over a fieldbus 

network. For further information, see the Fieldbus option 

manual. 

Default: RW 

RW 0 

Read 1 

Valid for process data. Select R (read only) for logging 

process without writing process data. Select RW in normal 

cases to control inverter. 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bdc 




Additional Process Values [2634] 

Define the number of additional process values sent in cyclic 

messages. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0-8 

2633 Read/Write 

Stp RW 

A 

2634 AddPrValues 

Stp 0 

A 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4bdf 




Communication Fault [264] 

Main menu for communication fault/warning settings. For 

further details please see the Fieldbus option manual. 

Communication Fault Mode [2641]] 

Selects action if a communication fault is detected. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 No communication supervision. 

Trip 1 

Warning 2 


RS232/485 selected: 

The AC drive will trip if there is no 

communication for time set in parameter 

[2642]. 

Fieldbus selected: 

The AC drive will trip if: 

1. The internal communication between 

the control board and fieldbus option is 

lost for time set in parameter [2642]. 

2. If a serious network error has occurred. 

RS232/485 selected: 

The AC drive will give a warning if there is 

no communication for time set in 

parameter [2642]. 

Fieldbus selected: 

The AC drive will give a warning if: 

1. The internal communication between 

the control board and fieldbus option is 

lost for time set in parameter [2642]. 

2. If a serious network error has occurred. 

NOTE: Menu [214] and/or [215] must be set to COM to 

activate the communication fault function. 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4bdd 




Communication Fault Time [2642]] 

Defines the delay time for the trip/warning. 

Default: 0.5 s 

Range: 0.1-15 s 

2641 ComFlt Mode 

Stp Off 

A 

2642 ComFlt Time 

Stp 0.5s 

A 





EtherCAT index (hex) 4bde 




Ethernet [265] 

Settings for Ethernet module (Modbus/TCP, Profinet IO). 

For further information, see the Fieldbus option manual. 

NOTE: The Ethernet module must be re-booted to 

activate the below settings. For example by toggling 

parameter [261]. Non-initialized settings indicated by 

flashing display text. 

IP Address [2651] 

Default: 0.0.0.0 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 

MAC Address [2652] 


42701, 42702, 42703, 

42704 

Profibus slot/index 

167/115, 167/116, 

167/117, 167/118 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4a8d, 4a8e, 4a8f, 4a90 

Profinet IO index 

19085, 19086, 19087, 

19088 



Default: An unique number for the Ethernet module. 



EtherCAT index (hex) 

2651 IP Address 

000.000.000.000 

2652 MAC Address 

Stp 000000000000 

A 

42705, 42706, 42707, 

42708, 42709, 42710 

167/119, 167/120, 

167/121, 167/122, 

167/123, 167/124 

4a91, 4a92, 4a93, 

4a94, 4a95, 4a96, 


19089, 19090, 19091, 

19092, 19093, 19094 



Subnet Mask [2653] 




Gateway [2654] 


DHCP [2655] 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4a9f 




42711, 42712, 42713, 

42714 


167/125, 167/126, 

167/127, 167/128 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4a97, 4a98, 4a99, 4a9a 


19095, 19096, 19097, 

19098 





42715, 42716, 42717, 

42718 


167/129, 167/130, 

167/131, 167/132 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4a9b, 4a9c, 4a9e, 4a9f 


19099, 19100, 19101, 

19102 


Modbus formatPicknik UInt 

Default: Off 

Selection: On/Off 

2653 Subnet Mask 

0.000.000.000 

2654 Gateway 

0.000.000.000 

2655 DHCP 

Stp Off 

A 


Fieldbus Signals [266] 

Defines modbus mapping for additional process values. For 

further information, see the Fieldbus option manual. 

FB Signal 1 - 16 [2661]-[266G] 

Used to create a block of parameters which are read/written 

via communication. 1 to 8 read + 1 to 8 write parameters 

possible. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0-65535 

2661 FB Signal 1 

Stp 0 

A 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42801-42816 

Profibus slot/index 167/215-167/230 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4af1 - 4b00 

Profinet IO index 19185 - 19200 



FB Status [269] 

Sub menus showing status of fieldbus parameters. Please see 

the Fieldbus manual for detailed information. 

269 FB Status 

Stp A 

11.3 Process and Application 

Parameters [300] 

These parameters are mainly adjusted to obtain optimum 

process or machine performance. 

The read-out, references and actual values depends on 

selected process source, [321}: 

Table 22 

Selected process 

source 

Unit for reference and 

actual value 

Speed rpm 4 digits 

Torque % 3 digits 

PT100 �C 3 digits 

Frequency Hz 3 digits 

Resolution 

11.3.1 Set/View Reference Value 

[310] 

View reference value 

As default the menu [310] is in view operation. The value of 

the active reference signal is displayed. The value is displayed 

according to selected process source, [321] or the process 

unit selected in menu [322]. 

Set reference value 

If the function “Reference Control [214]” is set to 

“Keyboard”, the reference value can be set in menu “Set/ 

View Ref [310]” or as a motor potentiometer with the + and 

- keys (default) on the control panel. Selection is made with 

parameter Keyboard Reference Mode in menu [369]. The 

ramp times used when setting the reference value with 

MotPot function selected in [369] are according to menus 

“Acc MotPot [333]” and “Dec MotPot [334]”. 

The ramp times used for the reference value when Normal 

function is selected in menu [369], are according to “Acc 

Time [331]” and “Dec Time [332]”. 

Menu [310] displays on-line the actual reference value 

according to the Mode Settings in Table 22. 

Default: 0 rpm 

Dependent on: 

Process Source [321] and Process Unit 

[322] 

Speed mode 0 - max speed [343] 

Torque mode 0 - max torque [351] 

Other modes 

310 Set/View ref 

Stp 0rpm 

A 

Min according to menu [324] - max 

according to menu [325] 





EtherCAT index (hex) 4baf 


Long, 1=1 rpm, 

1 %,1 °C or 


0.001 if Process 

Value/Process Ref 

using a [322] unit 


NOTE: The actual value in menu [310] is not copied, or 

loaded from the control panel memory when Copy Set 

[242], Copy to CP [244] or Load from CP [245] is 

performed. 

NOTE: If the MotPot function is used, the reference value 

ramp times are according to the “Acc MotPot [333]” and 

“Dec MotPot [334]” settings. Actual speed ramp will be 

limited according to “Acc Time [331]” and 

“Dec Time [332]”. 

NOTE: Write access to this parameter is only allowed 

when menu “Ref Control [214]” is set to Keyboard. When 

Reference control is used, see section “10. Serial 

communication” on page 63 

11.3.2 Process Settings [320] 

With these functions, the AC drive can be set up to fit the 

application. The menus [110], [120], [310], [362]-[368] 

and [711] use the process unit selected in [321] and [322] 

for the application, e.g. rpm, bar or m3/h. This makes it 

possible to easily set up the AC drive for the required process 

requirements, as well as for copying the range of a feedback 

sensor to set up the Process Value Minimum and Maximum 

in order to establish accurate actual process information. 

Process Source [321] 

Select the signal source for the process value that controls 

the motor. The Process Source can be set to act as a function 

of the process signal on AnIn F(AnIn), a function of the 

motor speed F(Speed), a function of the shaft torque 

F(Torque) or as a function of a process value from serial 

communication F(Bus). The right function to select 

depends on the characteristics and behaviour of the process. 

If the selection Speed, Torque or Frequency is set, the AC 

drive will use speed, torque or frequency as reference value. 

Example 

An axial fan is speed-controlled and there is no feedback 

signal available. The process needs to be controlled within 

fixed process values in “m 3 /hr” and a process read-out of the 

air flow is needed. The characteristic of this fan is that the air 

flow is linearly related to the actual speed. So by selecting 

F(Speed) as the Process Source, the process can easily be 

controlled. 

The selection F(xx) indicates that a process unit and scaling 

is needed, set in menus [322]-[328]. This makes it possible 

to e.g. use pressure sensors to measure flow etc. If F(AnIn) is 

selected, the source is automatically connected to the AnIn 

which has Process Value as selected. 

Default: Speed 

F(AnIn) 0 

Function of analogue input. E.g. via PID 

control, [380]. 

Speed 1 Speed as process reference. 

PT100 3 Temperature as process reference. 

F(Speed) 4 Function of speed 

F(Bus) 6 Function of communication reference 

Frequency 7 Frequency as process reference1 . 

1 . Only when Drive mode [213] is set to Speed or V/Hz. 

NOTE: When PT100 is selected, use PT100 channel 1 on 

the PTC/PT100 option board. 

NOTE: If Speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu 

“[321] Proc Source”, menus [322] - [328] are hidden. 

NOTE: If F (Bus) is chosen in menu [321] see section 

10.5.1 Process value. 


321 Proc Source 

Stp Speed 

A 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4ce6 





Process Unit [322] 

Default: rpm 

Off 0 No unit selection 

% 1 Percent 

°C 2 Degrees Centigrade 

°F 3 Degrees Fahrenheit 

bar 4 bar 

Pa 5 Pascal 

Nm 6 Torque 

Hz 7 Frequency 

rpm 8 Revolutions per minute 

m3 /h 9 Cubic meters per hour 

gal/h 10 Gallons per hour 

ft3 /h 11 Cubic feet per hour 

User 12 User defined unit 


322 Proc Unit 

Stp rpm 

A 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4ce7 




User-defined Unit [323] 

This menu is only displayed if User is selected in menu 

[322]. The function enables the user to define a unit with six 

symbols. Use the Prev and Next key to move the cursor to 

required position. Then use the + and - keys to scroll down 

the character list. Confirm the character by moving the 

cursor to the next position by pressing the Next key. 

Character 

No. for serial 

comm. 

Character 

Space 0 m 58 

0–9 1–10 n 59 

A 11 ñ 60 

B 12 o 61 

C 13 ó 62 

D 14 ô 63 

E 15 p 64 

F 16 q 65 

G 17 r 66 

H 18 s 67 

I 19 t 68 

J 20 u 69 

K 21 ü 70 

L 22 v 71 

M 23 w 72 

N 24 x 73 

O 25 y 74 

P 26 z 75 

Q 27 å 76 

R 28 ä 77 

S 29 ö 78 

T 30 ! 79 

U 31 ¨ 80 

Ü 32 # 81 

V 33 $ 82 

W 34 % 83 

X 35 & 84 

Y 36 · 85 

Z 37 ( 86 

Å 38 ) 87 

Ä 39 * 88 

Ö 40 + 89 

a 41 , 90 

á 42 - 91 

b 43 . 92 

c 44 / 93 

d 45 : 94 

e 46 ; 95 

é 47 < 96 


comm. 


Character 


comm. 

ê 48 = 97 

ë 49 > 98 

f 50 ? 99 

g 51 @ 100 

h 52 ^ 101 

i 53 _ 102 

í 54 � 103 

j 55 2 104 

k 56 3 105 

l 57 

Example: 

Create a user unit named kPa. 

1. When in the menu [323] press to show the cursor. 

2. Press NEXT to move the cursor to the right most position. 

3. Press until the character a is displayed. 

4. Press . 

5. Then press the until P is displayed and press . 

6. Repeat until you have entered kPa, confirm with . 

Default: No characters shown 


Character 

323 User Unit 

Stp A 


comm. 

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43304 - 43309 


169/208 - 

169/213 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4ce8 - 4ced 




When sending a unit name you send one character at a time 

starting at the right most position. 

Process Min [324] 

This function sets the minimum process value allowed. 

Default: 0 

Range: 


Process Max [325] 

This menu is not visible when speed, torque or frequency is 

selected. The function sets the value of the maximum 

process value allowed. 


0.000-10000 (Speed, Torque, F(Speed), 

F(Torque)) 

-10000– +10000 (F(AnIn, PT100, F(Bus)) 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4cee 



1 %,1 °C or 






Default: 0 

Range: 0.000-10000 

324 Process Min 

Stp 0 

A 

325 Process Max 

Stp 0 

A 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4cef 



1 %,1 °C or 







Ratio [326] 

This menu is not visible when speed, frequency or torque is 

selected. The function sets the ratio between the actual 

process value and the motor speed so that it has an accurate 

process value when no feedback signal is used. See Fig. 73. 

Default: Linear 

Linear 0 Process is linear related to speed/torque 

Quadratic 1 


Fig. 73 Ratio 

326 Ratio 

Stp Linear 

A 

Process is quadratic related to speed/ 

torque 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4cf0 




Process 

unit 

Process 

Max 

[325] 

Ratio=Linear 

Ratio=Quadratic 

Process 

Min 

Speed 

[324] Min Max 

Speed 

Speed 

[341] 

[343] 

F(Value), Process Min [327] 

This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It offers 

you the possibility of increasing the process accuracy by 

scaling the process values. The process values are scaled by 

linking them to known data in the AC drive. With 

“F(Value) Proc Min [327]” the precise value at which the 

entered “Process Min [324]“ is valid can be entered. 


“[321] Proc Source”, menus [322]- [328] are hidden. 

Default: Min 

Min -1 


According to Min Speed setting in 

[341]. 

Max -2 

According to Max Speed setting in 

[343]. 

0.000-10000 0-10000 0.000-10000 







1 % 


F(Value), Process Max [328] 

This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It offers 

you the possibility of increasing the process accuracy by 

scaling the process values. The process values are scaled by 

linking them to known data in the AC drive. With F(Value), 

Proc Max the precise value at which the entered “Process 

Max [525]” is valid can be entered. 


“[321] Proc Source”, menus [322]- [328] are hidden. 

Default: Max 

Min -1 Min 

Max -2 Max 

0.000- 

10000 

0-10000 0.000-10000 

327 F(Val) PrMin 

Stp Min 

A 

328 F(Val) PrMax 

Stp Max 

A 









1 % 


Example 

A conveyor belt is used to transport bottles. The required 

bottle speed needs to be within 10 to 100 bottles/s. Process 

characteristics: 

10 bottles/s = 150 rpm 

100 bottles/s = 1500 rpm 

The amount of bottles is linearly related to the speed of the 

conveyor belt. 

Set-up: 

“Process Min [324]” = 10 

“Process Max [325]” = 100 

“Ratio [326]” = linear 

“F(Value), ProcMin [327]” = 150 

“F(Value), ProcMax [328]” = 1500 

With this set-up, the process data is scaled and linked to 

known values which results in an accurate control. 

F(Value) 

PrMax 1500 

[328] 

F(Value 

PrMin 

[327] 

Fig. 74 

150 

10 

Process Min [324] 

Linear 

Bottles/s 

100 

Process Max [325] 

11.3.3 Start/Stop settings [330] 

Submenu with all the functions for acceleration, 

deceleration, starting, stopping, etc. 

Acceleration Time [331] 

The acceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the 

motor to accelerate from 0 rpm to nominal motor speed. 

NOTE: If the Acc Time is too short, the motor is 

accelerated according to the Torque Limit. The actual 

Acceleration Time may then be longer than the value 

set. 


Range: 0.50–3600 s 








Fig. 75 shows the relationship between nominal motor 

speed/max speed and the acceleration time. The same is 

valid for the deceleration time. 

Nominal 

Speed 

Max Speed 80% nMOT 331 Acc Time 

Stp 10.0s 

A 

Fig. 75 Acceleration time and maximum speed 

Fig. 76 shows the settings of the acceleration and 

deceleration times with respect to the nominal motor speed. 


100% n MOT 

rpm 

(06-F12) 

8s 

10s 

t

pm 

(NG_06-F11) 

Nom. Speed 

Acc Time [331] Dec Time [332] 

Fig. 76 Acceleration and deceleration times 

Deceleration Time [332] 

The deceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the 

motor to decelerate from nominal motor speed to 0 rpm. 


Range: 0.50–3600 s 

332 Dec Time 

Stp 10.0s 

A 








NOTE: If the Dec Time is too short and the generator 

energy cannot be dissipated in a brake resistor, the 

motor is decelerated according to the overvoltage limit. 

The actual deceleration time may be longer than the 

value set. 

Acceleration Time Motor Potentiometer 

[333] 

It is possible to control the speed of the AC drive using the 

motor potentiometer function. This function controls the 

speed with separate up and down commands, over remote 

signals. The MotPot function has separate ramps settings 

which can be set in “Acc MotPot [333]” and “Dec MotPot 

[334]”. 

If the MotPot function is selected, this is the acceleration 

time for the MotPot up command. The acceleration time is 

defined as the time it takes for the motor potentiometer 

value to increase from 0 rpm to nominal speed. 


Range: 0.50–3600 s 








Deceleration Time Motor Potentiometer 

[334] 

If the MotPot function is selected, this is the deceleration 

time for the “MotPot” down command. The deceleration 

time is defined as the time it takes for the motor 

potentiometer value to decrease from nominal speed to 0 

rpm. 


Range: 0.50–3600 s 

333 Acc MotPot 

Stp 16.0s 

A 

334 Dec MotPot 

Stp 16.0s 

A 









Acceleration Time to Minimum Speed 

[335] 

If minimum speed, [341]>0 rpm, is used in an application, 

the AC drive uses separate ramp times below this level. With 

“Acc>MinSpeed [335]” and “DecMin Spd 

Stp 10.0s 

A 








rpm 

Motor Speed Max speed 

3000 

[225] 

[343] 

Min speed 

[341] 

600 

Fig. 77 Calculation example of accelerating times 

(graphics not proportional). 

Example: 

“Motor speed [225]” 3000 rpm 

Minimum speed [341] 600 rpm 

Maximum speed [343] 3000 rpm 

Acceleration time [331] 10 seconds 

Deceleration time [332] 10 seconds 

Acc>Min speed[335] 40 seconds 

DecMin speed [335]. 

Calculated as following: 

600 rpm is 20% of 3000 rpm => 20% of 40 s = 8 s. 

B. The acceleration continues from minimum speed level 

600 rpm to maximum speed level 3000 rpm with 

acceleration rate according to ramp time Acceleration 

time [331]. 

Calculate by following: 

3000 - 600= 2400 rpm which is 80 % of 3000 rpm => 

acceleration tim is 80 % x 10 s = 8 s. 

This means that the total acceleration time from 0 - 

3000 rpm will take 8 + 8 = 16 seconds. 

Deceleration Time from Minimum 

Speed [336] 

If a minimum speed is programmed, this parameter will be 

used to set the deceleration time from the minimum speed 

to 0 rpm at a stop command. The ramp time is defined as 

the time it takes for the motor to decelerate from the 

nominal motor speed to 0 rpm. 


Range: 0.50-3600 s 

336 Dec

Acceleration Ramp Type [337] 

Sets the type of all the acceleration ramps in a parameter set. 

See Fig. 78. Depending on the acceleration and deceleration 

requirements for the application, the shape of both the 

ramps can be selected. For applications where speed changes 

need to be started and stopped smoothly, such as a conveyor 

belt with materials that can drop following a quick speed 

change, the ramp shape can be adapted to a S-shape and 

prevent speed change shocks. For applications that are not 

critical in this, the speed change can be fully linear over the 

complete range. 


Linear 0 Linear acceleration ramp. 

S-Curve 1 S-shape acceleration ramp. 

NOTE: For S-curve ramps the ramp times, [331] and 

[332], defines the maximum acceleration and 

deceleration rated, i.e. linear part of S-curve, just as for 

the linear ramps. The S-curves are implemented so that 

for a speed step below sync speed the ramps are fully 

S-shaped while for larger steps the middle part will be 

linear. Therefore will a S-curve ramp from 0 –sync speed 

take 2 x Time while a step from 0–2 x sync speed will 

take 3 x Time (middle part 0.5sync speed – 1.5sync 

speed linear). Also valid for menu [338], Deceleration 

ramp type. 








rpm 

Linear 

Fig. 78 Shape of acceleration ramp 

337 Acc Rmp 

Stp Linear 

A 

S-curve 

t 

Deceleration Ramp Type [338] 

Sets the ramp type of all deceleration parameters in a 

parameter set Fig. 79. 


Selection: Same as menu [337] 








Fig. 79 Shape of deceleration ramp 

Start Mode [339] 

Sets the way of starting the motor when a run command is 

given. 

Default: Fast (fixed) 

Fast 0 


338 Dec Rmp 

Stp Linear 

A 

The motor flux increases gradually. The 

motor shaft starts rotating immediately 

once the Run command is given. 








Linear 

S-curve 

339 Start Mode 

Stp Fast 

A 

t

Spinstart [33A] 

The spinstart will smoothly start a motor which is already 

rotating by catching the motor at the actual speed and 

control it to the desired speed. If in an application, such as 

an exhausting fan, the motor shaft is already rotating due to 

external conditions, a smooth start of the application is 

required to prevent excessive wear. With the spinstart=On, 

the actual control of the motor is delayed due to detecting 

the actual speed and rotation direction, which depend on 

motor size, running conditions of the motor before the 

Spinstart, inertia of the application, etc. Depending on the 

motor electrical time constant and the size of the motor, it 

can take maximum a couple of minutes before the motor is 

caught. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 

On 1 

Use 

Encoder 2 


33A Spinstart 

Stp Off 

A 

No spinstart. If the motor is already running 

the AC drive can trip or will start with high 

current. 

Spinstart will allow the start of a running 

motor without tripping or high inrush currents. 

If encoder feedback is used, both encoder 

speed and current signals are used to 

perform spinstart function. 

Only encoder speed used for detecting 

rotating machine, i.e. no rotating machine 

detection via initial motor current. 

Note: Only active if encoder is present. If no 

Encoder, functionality is equal to selection 

Off. 







Stop Mode [33B] 

When the AC drive is stopped, different methods to come to 

a standstill can be selected in order to optimize the stop and 

prevent unnecessary wear, like water hammer. Stop Mode 

sets the way of stopping the motor when a Stop command is 

given. 

Default: Decel 

Decel 0 

33B Stop Mode 

Stp Decel 

A 

The motor decelerates to 0 rpm according 

to the set deceleration time. 

Coast 1 The motor freewheels naturally to 0 rpm. 









11.3.4 Mechanical brake control 

The four brake-related menus [33C] to [33F] can be used to 

control mechanical brakes 

Support is included for a Brake Acknowledge signal via a 

digital input. It is monitored using a brake fault time 

parameter. Additional output and trip/warning signals are 

also included. The acknowledge signal is either connected 

from the brake contactor or from a proximity switch on the 

brake. 

Brake not released - Brake Fault trip 

During start and running the brake acknowledge signal is 

compared to the actual brake output signal and if no 

acknowledge, i.e. brake not released, while brake output is 

high for the Brake Fault time [33H], then a Brake trip is 

generated. 

Brake not engaged - Brake Warning and 

continued operation (keep torque) 

The brake acknowledge signal is compared to the actual 

brake output signal at stop. If acknowledge is still active, i.e. 

brake not engaged, while brake output is low for the Brake 

Engage time [33E] then a Brake warning is generated and 

the torque is kept, i.e. prolonging normal brake engage 

mode, until brake closes or an emergency action is needed 

by the operator, such as setting down the load. 

Brake Release Time [33C] 

The Brake Release Time sets the time the AC drive delays 

before ramping up to whatever final reference value is 

selected. During this time a predefined speed can be 

generated to hold the load where after the mechanical brake 

finally releases. This speed can be selected at Release Speed, 

[33D]. Immediate after the brake release time expiration the 

brake lift signal is set. The user can set a digital output or 

relay to the function Brake. This output or relay can control 

the mechanical brake. 


Range: 0.00–3.00 s 


33C Brk Release 

Stp 0.00s 

A 







Fig. 80 shows the relation between the four Brake functions. 

• Brake Release Time [33C] 

• Start Speed [33D] 

• Brake Engage Time [33E] 

• Brake Wait Time [33F] 

The correct time setting depends on the maximum load and 

the properties of the mechanical brake. During the brake 

release time it is possible to apply extra holding torque by 

setting a start speed reference with the function start speed 

[33D]. 


Release Speed [33D] 

Mechanical 

Brake 

Brake Relay 

Output 

Start 

Open 

Closed 

On 

Off 

Fig. 80 Brake Output functions 

Release Speed [33D] 

The release speed only operates with the brake function: 

brake release [33C]. The release speed is the initial speed 

reference during the brake release time. 


Brake release 

time [33C] 

NOTE: This function is designed to operate a mechanical 

brake via the digital outputs or relays (set to brake 

function) controlling a mechanical brake. 


Range: - 4x Sync. Speed to 4x Sync. 

Depend on: 

33D Release Spd 

Stp 0rpm 

A 

4xmotor sync speed, 1500 rpm for 1470 

rpm motor. 






Modbus format Int, 1=1 rpm 

Action must take place within 

these time intervals 

Brake wait 

time [33F] 

Brake Engage Time [33E] 

The brake engage time is the time the load is held while the 

mechanical brake engages. It is also used to get a firm stop 

when transmissions, etc. cause “whiplash” effects. In other 

words, it compensates for the time it takes to engage a 

mechanical brake. 


Range: 0.00–3.00 s 


Brake engage 

time [33E] 

33E Brk Engage 

Stp 0.00s 

A 








Wait Before Brake Time [33F] 

The brake wait time is the time to keep brake open and to 

hold the load, either in order to be able to speed up 

immediately, or to stop and engage the brake. 


Range: 0.00–30.0 s 








Vector Brake [33G] 

Braking by increasing the internal electrical losses in the 

motor. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 

On 1 


33F Brk Wait 

Stp 0.00s 

A 

33G Vector Brake 

Stp Off 

A 

Vector brake switched off. AC drive brakes 

normal with voltage limit on the DC link. 

Maximum AC drive current (I CL ) is available 

for braking. 







Brake Fault trip time [33H] 

The “Brake Fault trip time” for “Brake not released” 

function is specified in this menu. 

Default: 1.00s 

Range 0.00 - 5.00s 






Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01s 


Note: The Brake Fault trip time should be set to longer 

time than the Brake release time[33C]. 

The “Brake not engaged” warning is using the setting of 

parameter “Brake Engaged time [33E]”. 

Following Figure shows principle of brake operation for 

fault during run (left) and during stop (right). 

Release torque [33I] 

The Brake Release Time [33C] sets the time the AC drive 

delays before ramping up to whatever final speed reference 

value is selected, to allow the brake to be fully opened. 

During this time a holding torque to prevent roll-back of the 

load can be activated. The parameter Release Torque [33I] is 

used for this purpose. 

The release torque initiates the torque reference from the 

speed controller during the Brake Release Time [33C]. The 

release torque defines a minimum level of release (holding) 

torque. The set release torque is internally overruled if the 

actual required holding torque measured at the previous 

closing of brake is higher. 

The release torque is set with sign in order to define the 

holding torque direction. 

Default: 0% 

33H Brk Fault 

Stp 1.00s 

A 

33I Release Trq 

Stp 0% 

A 

Range -400% to 400% 









Note! Function is deactivated if set to 0%. 

Note! Release Torque [33I] has priority over torque 

reference initialization by Release Speed [33D]. 

* 

Start 

Running 

Torque 

Speed>0 

Brake relay 

Brake acknowledge 

Brake Trip 

Brake warning 

Brake 

release time 

33C 

11.3.5 Speed [340] 

Menu with all parameters for settings regarding to speeds, 

such as Min/Max speeds, Jog speeds, Skip speeds. 

Minimum Speed [341] 

Sets the minimum speed. The minimum speed will operate 

as an absolute lower limit. Used to ensure the motor does 

not run below a certain speed and to maintain a certain 

performance. 


Range: 0 - Max Speed 

Dependent on: Set/View ref [310] 

NOTE: A lower speed value than the set minimum speed 

can be shown in the display due to motor slip. 








Stop/Sleep when less than Minimum 

Speed [342] 

With this function it is possible to put the AC drive in “sleep 

mode” when it is running at minimum speed for the length 

of time set in menu “Stp








NOTE: It is not possible to set the maximum speed lower 

than the minimum speed. 

Note: Maximum speed [343] has priority over Min Speed 

[341], i.e. if [343] is set below [341] then the drive will 

run at [343] Max Speed with acceleration times given by 

[335] and [336] respectively. 

Skip Speed 1 Low [344] 

Within the Skip Speed range High to Low, the speed cannot 

be constant in order to avoid mechanical resonance in the 

AC drive system. 

When Skip Speed Low ��Ref Speed ��Skip Speed High, then 

Output Speed=Skip Speed HI during deceleration and 

Output Speed=Skip Speed LO during acceleration. Fig. 83 

shows the function of skip speed hi and low. 

Between Skip Speed HI and LO, the speed changes with the 

set acceleration and deceleration times. Skipspd1 LO sets 

the lower value for the 1st skip range. 


344 SkipSpd 1 Lo 

Stp 0rpm 

A 

Range: 0 - 4 x Motor Sync Speed 








Skip Speed HI 

Skip Speed LO 

(NG_06-F17) 

Fig. 83 Skip Speed 

NOTE: The two Skip Speed ranges may be overlapped. 

Skip Speed 1 High [345] 

Skipspd1 HI sets the higher value for the 1st skip range. 


Range: 0 – 4 x Sync Speed 









n 

Speed Reference 

345 SkipSpd 1 Hi 

Stp 0rpm 

A

Skip Speed 2 Low [346] 

The same function as menu [344] for the 2nd skip range. 


Range: 0 – 4 x Motor Sync Speed 








Skip Speed 2 High [347] 

The same function as menu [345] for the 2nd skip range. 


Range: 0 – 4 x Motor Sync Speed 


346 SkipSpd 2 Lo 

Stp 0rpm 

A 

347 SkipSpd 2 Hi 

Stp 0rpm 

A 







Jog Speed [348] 

The Jog Speed function is activated by one of the digital 

inputs. The digital input must be set to the Jog function 

[520]. The Jog command/function will automatically 

generate a run command as long as the Jog command/ 

function is active. This is valid independent of settings in 

menu [215]. The rotation is determined by the polarity of 

the set Jog Speed. 

Example 

If Jog Speed = -10, this will give a Run Left command at 

10 rpm regardless of RunL or RunR commands. Fig. 84 

shows the function of the Jog command/function. 


Range: 

Dependent on: 


Fig. 84 Jog command 

348 Jog Speed 

Stp 50rpm 

A 

-4 x motor sync speed to +4 x motor sync 

speed 

Defined motor sync speed. Max = 400%, 

normally max=AC drive I max/motor I nom x 

100%. 








Jog 

Freq 

Jog 

command 

f 

t 

t 

(NG_06-F18)

11.3.6 Torques [350] 

Menu with all parameters for torque settings. 

Maximum Torque [351] 

Sets the maximum motor torque (according to menu group 

“Motor Data [220]”). This Maximum Torque operates as an 

upper torque limit. A Speed Reference is always necessary to 

run the motor. 

TMOT�Nm� PMOT�kw�x9550 = ----------------------------------------- = 100% 

nMOT�rpm� Default: 120% calculated from the motor data 

Range: 0–400% 

351 Max Torque 

Stp 120% 

A 








NOTE: The Max Torque parameter will limit the maxmum 

output current of the AC drive following the relation: 

100% Tmot corresponds to 100% Imot. 

The maximum possible setting for parameter 351 is 

limited by Inom/Imot x 120%, but not higher than 400%. 

NOTE: The power loss in the motor will increase by the 

square of the torque when operating above 100%. 400% 

torque will result in 1600% power loss, which will 

increase the motor temperature very quickly. 

IxR Compensation [352] 

This function compensates for the drop in voltage over 

different resistances such as (very) long motor cables, chokes 

and motor stator by increasing the output voltage at a 

constant frequency. IxR Compensation is most important at 

low frequencies and is used to obtain a higher starting 

torque. The maximum voltage increase is 25% of the 

nominal output voltage. See Fig. 85. 

Selecting “Automatic” will use the optimal value according 

to the internal model of motor. “User-Defined” can be 

selected when the start conditions of the application do not 

change and a high starting torque is always required. A fixed 

IxR Compensation value can be set in the menu [353]. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Function disabled 

Automatic 1 Automatic compensation 

User Defined 2 User defined value in percent. 








Fig. 85 IxR Comp at Linear V/Hz curve 

IxR Comp_user [353] 

Only visible if User-Defined is selected in previous menu. 

Default: 0.0% 

352 IxR Comp 

Stp Off 

A 

10 20 30 40 

f 

50 Hz 

Range: 0-25% x U NOM (0.1% of resolution) 






Fieldbus format Long, 1= 0.1 % 



% 

100 

25 

U 

IxR Comp=25% 

IxR Com=0% 

353 IxR CompUsr 

Stp 0.0% 

A

NOTE: A too high level of IxR Compensation could cause 

motor saturation. This can cause a “Power Fault” trip. 

The effect of IxR Compensation is stronger with higher 

power motors. 

NOTE: The motor may be overheated at low speed. 

Therefore it is important that the Motor I 2 t Current [232] 

is set correctly. 

Flux Optimization [354] 

Flux Optimization reduces the energy consumption and the 

motor noise, at low or no load conditions. 

Flux Optimization automatically decreases the V/Hz ratio, 

depending on the actual load of the motor when the process 

is in a steady situation. Fig. 86 shows the area within which 

the Flux Optimization is active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Function disabled 

On 1 Function enabled 








U 

% 

100 

Fig. 86 Flux Optimizing 

354 Flux optim 

Stp Off 

A 

Flux optimizing 

area 

f 

50 Hz 

NOTE: Flux optimization works best at stable situations 

in slow changing processes. 

Maximum power [355] 

Sets maximum power. Can be used for limiting motor 

power in field weakening operation. This function operates 

as an upper power limit and internally limits the parameter 

“Max Torque [351]” according to : 

Tlimit = Plimit[%] / (Actual Speed / Sync Speed) 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off. No power limit 

1 - 400 1 - 400 1 - 400% of motor nominal power 

NOTE: The maximum possible setting for parameter 

[355] is limited by I NOM/I MOT x 120%, but not higher 

than 400%. 


355 Max Power 

Stp Off 

A 








11.3.7 Preset References [360] 

Motor Potentiometer [361] 

Sets the properties of the motor potentiometer function. See 

the parameter “DigIn1 [521]” for the selection of the motor 

potentiometer function. 

Default: Non Volatile 

Volatile 0 

Non volatile 1 


Fig. 87 MotPot function 

361 Motor Pot 

Stp Non Volatie 

A 

After a stop, trip or power down, the AC 

drive will start always from zero speed (or 

minimum speed, if selected). 

Non Volatile. After a stop, trip or power 

down of the AC drive, the reference value 

at the moment of the stop will be 

memorized. After a new start command 

the output speed will resume to this saved 

value. 







Motpot 

UP 

Motpot 

DOWN 

n 

t 

t 

t 

Preset Ref 1 [362] to Preset Ref 7 

[368] 

Preset speeds have priority over the analogue inputs. Preset 

speeds are activated by the digital inputs. The digital inputs 

must be set to the function Pres. Ref 1, Pres. Ref 2 or Pres. 

Ref 4. 

Depending on the number of digital inputs used, up to 7 

preset speeds can be activated per parameter set. Using all 

the parameter sets, up to 28 preset speeds are possible. 

Default: Speed, 0 rpm 

Dependent on: Process Source [321] and Process Unit [322] 

Speed mode 0 - max speed [343] 

Torque mode 0 - max torque [351] 

Other modes 


362 Preset Ref 1 

Stp 0rpm 

A 

Min according to menu [324] - max according 

to menu [325] 

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43132–43138 

Profibus slot/index 169/36–169/42 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4c3c - 4c42 


Long, 1= 1 rpm, 1 %, 

1°C or 






The same settings are valid for the menus: 

“[363] Preset Ref 2”, with default 250 rpm 






The selection of the presets is as in Table 23. 


Table 23 

Preset 

Ctrl3 

Preset 

Ctrl2 

Preset 

Ctrl1 

1) 

= selected if only one preset reference is active 

1 = active input 

0 = non active input 

Keyboard reference mode [369] 

This parameter sets how the reference value [310] is edited. 


Output Speed 

0 0 0 Analogue reference 

0 0 1 1) Preset Ref 1 

0 1 1) 0 Preset Ref 2 

0 1 1 Preset Ref 3 

1 1) 

0 0 Preset Ref 4 




NOTE: If only Preset Ctrl3 is active, then the Preset Ref 4 

can be selected. If Presets Ctrl2 and 3 are active, then 

the Preset Ref 2, 4 and 6 can be selected. 

Default: MotPot 

Normal 0 

MotPot 1 

369 Key Ref Mode 

Stp MotPot 

A 

The reference value is edited as a normal 

parameter (the new reference value is 

activated when Enter is pressed after the 

value has been changed). The “Acc Time 

[331]” and “Dec Time [332]” are used. 

The reference value is edited using the 

motor potentiometer function (the new 

reference value is activated directly when 

the key + or - is pressed). The “Acc MotPot 

[333]” and “Dec MotPot [334]” are used. 







NOTE: When Key Ref Mode is set to MotPot, the 

reference value ramp times are according to the “Acc 

MotPot [333]” and “Dec MotPot [334]” settings. Actual 

speed ramp will be limited according to “Acc Time 

[331]” and “Dec Time [332]”. 

11.3.8 PID Process Control [380] 

The PID controller is used to control an external process via 

a feedback signal. The reference value can be set via analogue 

input AnIn1, at the Control Panel [310] by using a Preset 

Reference, or via serial communication. The feedback signal 

(actual value) must be connected to an analogue input that 

is set to the function Process Value. 

Process PID Control [381] 

This function enables the PID controller and defines the 

response to a changed feedback signal. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 PID control deactivated. 

On 1 

Invert 2 


The speed increases when the feedback 

value decreases. PID settings according to 

menus [381] to [385]. 

The speed decreases when the feedback 

value decreases. PID settings according to 

menus [383] to [385]. 







PID P Gain [383] 

Setting the P gain for the PID controller. 

Default: 1.0 

Range: 0.0–30.0 

381 PID Control 

Stp Off 

A 

383 PID P Gain 

Stp 1.0 

A 






Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 



Process 

reference 

Process 

feedback 

+ 

- 

Fig. 88 Closed loop PID control 

PID I Time [384] 

Setting the integration time for the PID controller. 


Process 

PID 

Range: 0.01–300 s 








Process PID D Time [385] 

Setting the differentiation time for the PID controller. 


Range: 0.00–30 s 


AC drive 

384 PID I Time 

Stp 1.00s 

A 

385 PID D Time 

Stp 0.00s 

A 







M 

Process 

06-F95 

PID sleep functionality 

This function is controlled via a wait delay and a separate 

wake-up margin condition. With this function it is possible 

to put the AC drive in “sleep mode” when the process value 

is at it’s set point and the motor is running at minimum 

speed for the length of the time set in [386]. By going into 

sleep mode, the by the application consumed energy is 

reduced to a minimum. When the process feedback value 

goes below the set margin on the process reference as set in 

[387], the AC drive will wake up automatically and normal 

PID operation continues, see examples. 

NOTE: When the drive is in Sleep mode, this is indicated 

with “slp” in the lower left corner of the display. 

PID sleep when less than minimum 

speed [386] 

If the PID output is equal to or less than minimum speed 

for given delay time, the AC drive will go to sleep. 

Default: Off 

386 PID

PID Activation Margin [387] 

The PID activation (wake-up) margin is related to the 

process reference and sets the limit when the AC drive 

should wake-up/start again. 

Default: 0 

387 PID Act Marg 

Stp 0rpm 

A 

Range: 0 –10000 in Process unit 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4d2c 


Long, 1= 1 rpm, 1 

%, 1°C or 






NOTE: The margin is always a positive value. 

Example 1 PID control = normal (flow or 

pressure control) 

[321] = F (AnIn) 

[322] = Bar 

[310] = 20 Bar 

[342] = 2 s (inactive since [386] is activated and have higher 

priority) 

[381]= On 

[386] = 10 s 

[387] = 1 Bar 

The AC drive will stop/sleep when the speed (PID output) is 

below or equal to Min Speed for 10 seconds. The AC drive 

will activate/wake up when the “Process value” goes below 

the PID Activation Margin which is related to the process 

reference, i.e. goes below (20-1) Bar. See Fig. 89. 

[711] Process Value 

[387] 

[712] Speed 

[386] 

Stop/Sleep 

[341] Min Speed 

[310] Process Ref 

Fig. 89 PID Stop/sleep with normal PID 

Activate/Wake up 

Example 2 PID control = inverted (tank level 

control) 

[321] = F (AnIn) 

[322] = m 

[310] = 7 m 

[342] = 2 s (inactive since [386] is activated and have higher 

priority) 

[381]= Inverted 

[386] = 30 s 

[387] = 1 m 

The AC drive will stop/sleep when the speed (PID output) is 

below or equal to Min Speed for 30 seconds. The AC drive 

will activate/wake up when the “Process value” goes above 

the PID Activation Margin which is related to the process 

reference, i.e. goes above (7+1) m. See Fig. 90. 


[387] 


[712] Speed 

[386] 

Stop/Sleep 

[341] Min Speed 

Fig. 90 PID Stop/sleep with inverted PID 

Activate/Wake up 


PID Steady State Test [388] 

In application situations where the feedback can become 

independent of the motor speed, this PID Steady Test 

function can be used to overrule the PID operation and 

force the AC drive to go in sleep mode i.e. the AC drive 

automatically reduces the output speed while at the same 

time ensures the process value. 

Example: pressure controlled pump systems with low/no 

flow operation and where the process pressure has become 

independent of the pump speed, e.g. due to slowly closed 

valves. By going into Sleep mode, heating of the pump and 

motor will be avoided and no energy is spilled. 

PID Steady state test delay. 

NOTE: It is important that the system has reached a 

stable situation before the Steady State Test is initiated. 

Default: Off 

Range: Off, 0.01–3600 s 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4d2d 






[712] Speed 

Fig. 91 Steady state test 

388 PID Stdy Tst 

Stp Off 

A 

[389] 

[389] 

[387] 

Normal PID 

[388] 

Start steady 

state test 

Steady state 

test 

Stop steady 

state test 

PID Steady State Margin [389] 

PID steady state margin defines a margin band around the 

reference that defines “steady state operation”. During the 

steady state test the PID operation is overruled and the AC 

drive is decreasing the speed as long as the PID error is 

within the steady state margin. If the PID error goes outside 

the steady state margin the test failed and normal PID 

operation continues, see example. 

Default: 0 

[341] Min Speed [386] PID

11.3.9 Pump/Fan Control [390] 

The Pump Control functions are in menu [390]. The 

function is used to control a number of drives (pumps, fans, 

etc.) of which one is always driven by the AC drive. 

Pump enable [391] 

This function will enable the pump control to set all relevant 

pump control functions. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Pump control is switched off. 

On 1 


Pump control is on: 

- Pump control parameters [392] to [39G] 

appear and are activated according to 


- View functions [39H] to [39M] are added 

in the menu structure. 







Number of Drives [392] 

Sets the total number of drives which are used, including the 

Master AC drive. The setting here depends on the parameter 

“Select Drive [393]”. After the number of drives is chosen it 

is important to set the relays for the pump control. If the 

digital inputs are also used for status feedback, these must be 

set for the pump control according to; Pump 1 OK– Pump6 

OK in menu [520]. 

Default: 1 

1-3 Number of drives if I/O Board is not used. 

1-6 

1-7 

391 Pump enable 

Stp Off 

A 

A 

392 No of Drives 

Stp 1 

Number of drives if 'Alternating MASTER' is 

used, see Select Drive [393]. (I/O Board is 

used.) 

Number of drives if 'Fixed MASTER' is used, 

see Select Drive [393]. 

(I/O Board is used.) 

NOTE: Used relays must be defined as Slave Pump or 

Master Pump. Used digital inputs must be defined as 

Pump Feedback. 







Select Drive [393] 

Sets the main operation of the pump system. 'Sequence' and 

'Runtime' are Fixed MASTER operation. 'All' means 

Alternating MASTER operation. 

Default: Sequence 

Sequence 0 

Run Time 1 

All 2 


393 Select Drive 

Stp Sequence 

A 

Fixed MASTER operation: 

- The additional drives will be selected in 

sequence, i.e. first pump 1 then pump 2 

etc. 

- A maximum of 7 drives can be used. 

Fixed MASTER operation: 

- The additional drives will be selected 

depending on the Run Time. So the drive 

with the lowest Run Time will be selected 

first. The Run Time is monitored in menus 

[39H] to [39M] in sequence. For each drive 

the Run Time can be reset. 

- When drives are stopped, the drive with 

the longest Run Time will be stopped first. 

- Maximum 7 drives can be used. 

Alternating MASTER operation: 

- When the drive is powered up, one drive is 

selected as the Master drive. The selection 

criteria depends on the Change Condition 

[394]. The drive will be selected according 

to the Run Time. So the drive with the 

lowest Run Time will be selected first. The 

Run Time is monitored in menus [39H] to 

[39M] in sequence. For each drive the Run 

Time can be reset. 

- A maximum of 6 drives can be used. 







NOTE: This menu will NOT be active if less than 3 drives 

are selected. 


Change Condition [394] 

This parameter determines the criteria for changing the 

master. This menu only appears if Alternating MASTER 

operation is selected. The elapsed run time of each drive is 

monitored. The elapsed run time always determines which 

drive will be the 'new' master drive. 

This function is only active if the parameter “Select Drive 

[393]”=All. 

Default: Both 

Stop 0 

Timer 1 

Both 2 

A 


394 Change Cond 

Stp Both 

The Runtime of the master drive 

determines when a master drive has to be 

changed. The change will only take place 

after a: 

- Power Up 

- Stop 

- Standby condition 

- Trip condition. 

The master drive will be changed if the 

timer setting in Change Timer [395] has 

elapsed. The change will take place 

immediately. So during operation the 

additional pumps will be stopped 

temporarily, the 'new' master will be 

selected according to the Run Time and the 

additional pumps will be started again. 

It is possible to leave 2 pumps running 

during the change operation. This can be 

set with Drives on Change [396]. 

The master drive will be changed if the 

timer setting in Change Timer [395] has 

elapsed. The 'new' master will be selected 

according to the elapsed Run Time. The 

change will only take place after a: 

- Power Up 

- Stop 

- Standby condition. 

- Trip condition. 







NOTE: If the Status feedback inputs (DigIn 9 to Digin 14) 

are used, the master drive will be changed immediately 

if the feedback generates an 'Error'. 

Change Timer [395] 

When the time set here is elapsed, the master drive will be 

changed. This function is only active if “Select Drive 

[393]”=All and “Change Cond [394]”= Timer/ Both. 

Default: 50 h 

Range: 1-3000 h 






Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 h 

Modbus format UInt, 1=1 h 

Drives on Change [396] 

If a master drive is changed according to the timer function 

(Change Condition=Timer/Both [394]), it is possible to 

leave additional pumps running during the change 

operation. With this function the change operation will be 

as smooth as possible. The maximum number to be 

programmed in this menu depends on the number of a 

dditional drives. 

Example: 

If the number of drives is set to 6, the maximum value will 

be 4. This function is only active if “Select Drive [393]”=All. 

Default: 0 

395 Change Timer 

Stp 50h 

A 

396 Drives on Ch 

Stp 0 

Range: 0 to (the number of drives - 2) 









A

Upper Band [397] 

If the speed of the master drive comes into the upper band, 

an additional drive will be added after a delay time that is set 

in “Start delay [399]”. 

Default: 10% 

Range: 0-100% of total min speed to max speed 








Example: 

Max Speed = 1500 rpm 

Min Speed = 300 rpm 

Upper Band = 10% 

Start delay will be activated: 

Range = Max Speed to Min Speed = 1500–300 = 1200 rpm 

10% of 1200 rpm = 120 rpm 

Start level = 1500–120 = 1380 rpm 

Speed 

Max 

Min 

Fig. 92 Upper band 

Lower Band [398] 

If the speed of the master drive comes into the lower band 

an additional drive will be stopped after a delay time. This 

delay time is set in the parameter “Stop Delay [39A]”. 

Default: 10% 

397 Upper Band 

Stp 10% 

A 

Upper band 

A 

Start Delay [399] 

398 Lower Band 

Stp 10% 

next pump starts 

Flow/Pressure 

(NG_50-PC-12_1) 









Example: 



Lower Band = 10% 

Stop delay will be activated: 

Range = Max Speed - Min Speed = 1500–300 = 1200 rpm 

10% of 1200 rpm = 120 rpm 

Start level = 300 + 120 = 420 rpm 

Fig. 93 Lower band 


This delay time must have elapsed before the next pump is 

started. A delay time prevents the nervous switching of 

pumps. 

Default: 0 s 

Range: 0-999 s 








(NG_50-PC-13_1) 


Speed 

Max 

Min 

“top” pump stops 

Stop Delay [39A] 

Lower band 

399 Start Delay 

Stp 0s 

A 

Flow/Pressure


This delay time must have elapsed before the 'top' pump is 

stopped. A delay time prevents the nervous switching of 

pumps. 

Default: 0 s 









Upper Band Limit [39B] 

If the speed of the pump reaches the upper band limit, the 

next pump is started immediately without delay. If a start 

delay is used this delay will be ignored. Range is between 

0%, equalling max speed, and the set percentage for the 

“UpperBand [397]”. 

Default: 0% 

Range: 


Fig. 94 Upper band limit 

39A Stop Delay 

Stp 0s 

A 

39B Upp Band Lim 

Stp 0% 

A 

0 to Upper Band level. 0% (=max speed) means 

that the Limit function is switched off. 







Speed 

Max 

Min 

Upper band 


next pump starts 

immediately 

Upper band 

limit [39B] 

Flow/Pressure 

(NG_50-PC-14_2) 

Lower Band Limit [39C] 

If the speed of the pump reaches the lower band limit, the 

'top' pump is stopped immediately without delay. If a stop 

delay is used this delay will be ignored. Range is from 0%, 

equalling min speed, to the set percentage for the “Lower 

Band [398]”. 

Default: 0% 

Range: 


Fig. 95 Lower band limit 

39C Low Band Lim 

Stp 0% 

0 to Lower Band level. 0% (=min speed) means 

that he Limit function is switched off. 








Speed 

Max 

Min 

A 

Lower band 

“top” pump stops 

immediately 


Lower band 

limit [39C] 

Flow/Pressure 

(NG_50-PC-15_2)

Settle Time Start [39D] 

The settle start allows the process to settle after a pump is 

switched on before the pump control continues. If an 

additional pump is started D.O.L. (Direct On Line) or Y/ 

�, 

the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the 'rough' 

start/stop method. This could cause unnecessary starting 

and stopping of additional pumps. 

During the Settle start: 

• PID controller is off. 

• The speed is kept at a fixed level after adding a pump. 

Default: 0 s 









Transition Speed Start [39E] 

The transition speed start is used to minimize a flow/ 

pressure overshoot when adding another pump. When an 

additional pump needs to be switched on, the master pump 

will slow down to the set transition speed start value, before 

the additional pump is started. The setting depends on the 

dynamics of both the master drive and the additional drives. 

The transition speed is best set by trial and error. 

In general: 

• If the additional pump has 'slow' start/stop dynamics, 

then a higher transition speed should be used. 

• If the additional pump has 'fast' start/stop dynamics, 

then a lower transition speed should be used. 

Default: 60% 

39D Settle Start 

Stp 0s 

A 

39E TransS Start 

Stp 60% 

A 









NOTE: If set to 100 %, the transition speed, when 

starting pumps, is ignored and no speed adaption is 

made. 

I.e. the slave pump is started directly and speed of the 

master pump is maintained. 

Example 



TransS Start = 60% 

When an additional pump is needed, the speed will be 

controlled down to min speed + (60% x (1500 rpm - 200 

rpm)) = 200 rpm + 780 rpm = 980 rpm. When this speed is 

reached, the additional pump with the lowest run time 

hours will be switched on. 

Fig. 96 Transition speed start 

Fig. 97 Effect of transition speed 

(NG_50-PC-16_1) 


Speed 

Actual 

Trans 

Min 

Flow/Pressure 

Switch on 

procedure starts 

Additional pump 

Master pump 

Actual start 

command of next 

pump (RELAY) 

Transition speed 

decreases overshoot 

Flow/Pressure 

Time

Settle Time Stop [39F] 

The settle stop allows the process to settle after a pump is 

switched off before the pump control continues. If an 

additional pump is stopped D.O.L. (Direct On Line) or Y/ 

�, 

the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the 'rough' 

start/stop method. This could cause unnecessary starting 

and stopping of additional pumps. 

During the Settle stop: 

• PID controller is off. 

• the speed is kept at a fixed level after stopping a pump 

Default: 0 s 

Range: 0–999 s 








Transition Speed Stop [39G] 

The transition speed stop is used to minimize a flow/ 

pressure overshoot when shutting down an additional pump. 

The setting depends on the dynamics of both the master 

drive and the additional drives. 

In general: 

• If the additional pump has 'slow' start/stop dynamics, 

then a higher transition speed should be used. 

• If the additional pump has 'fast' start/stop dynamics, 

then a lower transition speed should be used. 

Default: 60% 

39F Settle Stop 

Stp 0s 

A 

39G TransS Stop 

Stp 60% 

A 









NOTE: If set to 0 %, the transition speed when stopping 

pumps, is ignored and no speed adaption is made. 

I.e. the slave pump is stopped directly and speed of the 

master pump is continued. 

Example 



TransS Start = 60% 

When less additional pumps are needed, the speed will be 

controlled up to min speed + (60% x (1500 rpm - 200 

rpm)) = 200 rpm + 780 rpm = 980 rpm. When this speed is 

reached, the additional pump with the highest run time 

hours will be switched off. 

Fig. 98 Transition speed stop 


Speed 

Max 

Trans 

Actual 

Min 

Actual shut down of pump 

Master pump 

Additional pump 

Flow/Pressure 

Switch off procedure starts

Run Times 1-6 [39H] to [39M] 

Unit: h:mm:ss (hours:minutes:seconds) 

Range: 0:00:00–262143:59:59 


Modbus Instance no/ 

DeviceNet no: 



31051 : 31052 : 31053(hr:min:sec) 

31054 : 31055: 31056(hr:min:sec) 

31057 : 31058: 31059(hr:min:sec) 

31060 : 31061: 31062(hr:min:sec) 

31063 : 31064: 31065(hr:min:sec) 

31066 : 31067: 31068(hr:min:sec) 

121/195, 121/196, 121/197, 

121/198, 121/199, 121/200, 

121/201, 121/202, 121/203, 

121/204, 121/205, 121/206, 

121/207, 121/208, 121/209, 

121/210, 121/211, 121/212 

241b : 241c : 241d 

241e : 241f : 2420 

2421 : 2422 : 2423 

2424 : 2425 : 2426 

2427 : 2428 : 2429 

242a : 242b : 242c 


1051:1052:1053 

- 1068 

Fieldbus format Long, 1=1h/m/s 


Reset Run Times 1-6 [39H1] to [39M1] 

Default: No 

No 0 

Yes 1 

39H Run Time 1 

Stp h:mm:ss 

A 

39H1 Rst Run Tm1 

Stp No 

A 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 38–43, pump 1 -6 


EtherCAT index (hex) 2026 - 202b 




Pump Status [39N] 

39N Pump 123456 

Stp OCD 

A 

Indication Description 




EtherCAT index (hex) 242d 




Number backup/reserve [39P] 

Sets the number of pumps used for backup/reserve which in 

normal conditions can not be selected. This function can be 

used for increasing redundancy in the pump system by 

having pumps in reserve that can be activated when some 

pumps indicate fault or are shut off for maintenance. 









C 

Control, master pump, only when alternating 

master is used 

D Direct control 

O Pump is off 

E Pump error 

Default: 0 

Range: 0-3 

39P No of Backup 

Stp 0 

A

11.4 Load Monitor and Process 

Protection [400] 

11.4.1 Load Monitor [410] 

The monitor functions enable the AC drive to be used as a 

load monitor. Load monitors are used to protect machines 

and processes against mechanical overload and underload, 

e.g. a conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming, belt failure 

on a fan and a pump dry running. See explanation in section 

Fig. 44, page 44. 

Alarm Select [411] 

Selects the types of alarms that are active. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 No alarm functions active. 

Min 1 

Max 2 

Max+Min 3 


411 Alarm Select 

Stp Off 

A 

Min Alarm active. The alarm output 

functions as an underload alarm. 

Max Alarm active. The alarm output 

functions as an overload alarm. 

Both Max and Min alarm are active. The 

alarm outputs function as overload and 

underload alarms. 







Alarm Trip [412] 

Selects which alarm must cause a trip to the AC drive. 

Default: Off 

Selection: Same as in menu [411] 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4cfa 




Ramp Alarm [413] 

This function inhibits the (pre) alarm signals during 

acceleration/deceleration of the motor to avoid false alarms. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 

On 1 


412 Alarm trip 

Stp Off 

A 

413 Ramp Alarm 

Stp Off 

A 

(Pre) alarms are inhibited during 

acceleration/deceleration. 

(Pre) alarms active during acceleration/ 

deceleration. 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4cfb 





Alarm Start Delay [414] 

This parameter is used if, for example, you want to override 

an alarm during the start-up procedure. 

Sets the delay time after a run command, after which the 

alarm may be given. 

• If Ramp Alarm=On. The start delay begins after a RUN 

command. 

• If Ramp Alarm=Off. The start delay begins after the 

acceleration ramp. 

Default: 2 s 

Range: 0-3600 s 

414 Start Delay 

Stp 2s 

A 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4cfc 




Load Type [415] 

In this menu you select monitor type according to the load 

characteristic of your application. By selecting the required 

monitor type, the overload and underload alarm function 

can be optimized according to the load characteristic. 

When the application has a constant load over the whole 

speed range, i.e. extruder or screw compressor, the load type 

can be set to basic. This type uses a single value as a reference 

for the nominal load. This value is used for the complete 

speed range of the AC drive. The value can be set or 

automatically measured. See Autoset Alarm [41A] and 

“Normal Load [41B]” about setting the nominal load 

reference. 

The load curve mode uses an interpolated curve with 9 load 

values at 8 equal speed intervals. This curve is populated by 

a test run with a real load. This can be used with any smooth 

load curve including constant load. 

Fig. 99 

Default: Basic 

Basic 0 

Load 

Curve 


Max Alarm [416] 

Uses a fixed maximum and minimum load 

level over the full speed range. Can be used 

in situations where the torque is 

independent of the speed. 

Max Alarm Margin [4161] 

With load type Basic, [415], used the Max Alarm Margin 

sets the band above the “Normal Load [41B]” menu that 

does not generate an alarm. With load type Load Curve 

[415], used the Max Alarm Margin sets the band above the 

Load Curve [41C], that does not generate an alarm. The 

Max Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motor 

torque. 


Load 

1 

Uses the measured actual load 

characteristic of the process over the speed 

range. 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4cfd 




Default: 15% 

Range: 0–400% 

Load curve 

415 Load Type 

Stp Basic 

A 

4161 MaxAlarmMar 

Stp 15% 

A 

Max Alarm 

Basic 

Min Alarm 

Speed




EtherCAT index (hex) 4cfe 



Modbus format Eint 

Max Alarm delay [4162] 

When the load level without interruption exceeds the alarm 

level longer than set “Max Alarm delay” time, an alarm is 

activated. 


Range: 0-90 s 








Max Pre Alarm [417] 

Max Pre AlarmMargin [4171] 

With load type Basic [415], used the Max Pre-Alarm Margin 

sets the band above the Normal Load, [41B], menu that 

does not generate a pre-alarm. With load type Load Curve, 

[415], used the Max Pre-Alarm Margin sets the band above 

the Load Curve, [41C], that does not generate a pre-alarm. 

The Max Pre-Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal 

motor torque. 

Default: 10% 

Range: 0–400% 

4162 MaxAlarmDel 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

4171 MaxPreAlMar 

Stp 10% 

A 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4cff 




Max Pre Alarm delay [4172] 

When the load level without interruption exceeds the alarm 

level longer than set “Max PreAlarm delay” time, a warning 

is activated. 


Range: 0–90 s 








Min Pre Alarm [418] 

Min Pre Alarm Margin [4181] 

With load type Basic, [415], used the Min Pre-Alarm 

Margin sets the band under the Normal Load, [41B], menu 

that does not generate a pre-alarm. With load type Load 

Curve, [415], used the Min Pre-Alarm Margin sets the band 

under the Load Curve, [41C], that does not generate a 

pre-alarm. The Min Pre-Alarm Margin is a percentage of 

nominal motor torque. 

Default: 10% 

Range: 0-400% 


4172 MaxPreAlDel 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

4181 MinPreAlMar 

Stp 10% 

A 








Min Pre Alarm Response delay [4182] 

When the load level without interruption is below the alarm 

level longer than set “Min PreAlarm delay” time, a warning 

is activated. 


Range: 0-90 s 








Min Alarm [419] 

Min Alarm Margin [4191] 

With load type Basic, [415], used the Min Alarm Margin 

sets the band under the “Normal Load [41B]”, menu that 

does not generate an alarm. With load type “Load Curve 

[415]”, used the Min Alarm Margin sets the band under the 

“Load Curve [41C]”, that does not generate an alarm. The 

Max Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motor 

torque. 

Default: 15% 

Range: 0-400% 








Min Alarm Response delay [4192] 

When the load level without interruption is below the alarm 

level longer than set “Min Alarm delay” time, an alarm is 

activated. 


Range: 0-90 s 

4182 MinPreAlDel 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

4191 MinAlarmMar 

Stp 15% 

A 

4192 MinAlarmDel 

Stp 0.1s 

A 








Autoset Alarm [41A] 

The Autoset Alarm function can measure the nominal load 

that is used as reference for the alarm levels. If the selected 

“Load Type [415]” is Basic it copies the load the motor is 

running with to the menu “Normal Load [41B]”. The 

motor must run on the speed that generates the load that 

needs to be recorded. If the selected “Load Type [415]” is 

Load Curve it performs a test-run and populates the “Load 

Curve [41C]” with the found load values. 

WARNING! 

When autoset does a test run the motor and 

application/machine will ramp up to 

maximum speed. 

NOTE: The motor must be running for the Autoset Alarm 

function to succeed. A not running motor generates a 

“Failed!” message. 

Default: No 

No 0 

Yes 1 








The default set levels for the (pre)alarms are: 

Overload 

Underload 

41A AutoSet Alrm 

Stp No 

A 

Max Alarm menu [4161] + [41B] 

Max Pre Alarm menu [4171] + [41B] 

Min Pre Alarm menu [41B] - [4181] 

Min Alarm menu [41B] - [4191] 

These default set levels can be manually changed in menus 

[416] to [419]. After execution the message “Autoset OK!” is 

displayed for 1s and the selection reverts to “No”. 


Normal Load [41B] 

Set the level of the normal load. The alarm or pre alarm will 

be activated when the load is above/under normal load ± 

margin. 

Default: 100% 

Range: 0-400% of max torque 

NOTE: 100% Torque means: I NOM = I MOT . The maximum 

depends on the motor current and AC drive max current 

settings, but the absolute maximum adjustment is 

400%. 








Load Curve [41C] 

The load curve function can be used with any smooth load 

curve. The curve can be populated with a test-run or the 

values can be entered or changed manually. 

Load Curve 1-9 [41C1]-[41C9] 

The measured load curve is based on 9 stored samples. The 

curve starts at minimum speed and ends at maximum speed, 

the range in between is divided into 8 equal steps. The 

measured values of each sample are displayed in [41C1] to 

[41C9] and can be adapted manually. The value of the 1st 

sampled value on the load curve is displayed. 

Default: 100% 

41B Normal Load 

Stp 100% 

A 

41C1 Load Curve1 

Stp 0rpm 100% 

A 

Range: 0–400% of max torque 






Fig. 100 

43336%, 43337 rpm, 

43338 %, 43339 rpm, 

43340 %, 43341 rpm, 

43342 %, 43343 rpm, 

43344 %, 43345 rpm, 

43346 %, 43347 rpm, 

43348 %, 43349 rpm, 

43350 %, 43351 rpm, 

43352 %, 43353 rpm 

169/240, 169/242, 169/ 

244, 169/246, 169/248, 

169/250, 169/252, 169/ 

254, 170/1 

4d08 %, 4d09 rpm, 

4d0a %, 4d0b rpm, 

4d0c %, 4d0d rpm, 

4d0e %, 4d0f rpm, 

4d10 %, 4d11 rpm, 

4d12 %, 4d13 rpm, 

4d14 %, 4d15 rpm, 

4d16 %, 4d17 rpm, 

4d18 %, 4d19 rpm 

19720 %, 19721 rpm, 

19722 %, 19723 rpm, 

19724 %, 19725 rpm, 

19726 %, 19727 rpm, 

19728 %, 19729 rpm, 

19730 %, 19731 rpm, 

19732 %, 19733 rpm, 

19734 %, 19735 rpm, 

19736 %, 19738 rpm, 


Long, 1= 1 %, 

Int 1=1 rpm 


NOTE: The speed values depend on the Min- and Max 

Speed values. they are read only and cannot be 

changed. 

0 

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 


1 

0.5 

Min Speed 

Min-Max alarm tolerance band graph 

Speed 

Measured load samples 

Min-max tolerance band 

Max alarm limit 

Min alarm limit 

Max Speed

11.4.2 Process Protection [420] 

Submenu with settings regarding protection functions for 

the AC drive and the motor. 

Low Voltage Override [421] 

If a dip in the mains supply occurs and the low voltage 

override function is enabled, the AC drive will automatically 

decrease the motor speed to keep control of the application 

and prevent an under voltage trip until the input voltage 

rises again. Therefore the rotating energy in the motor/load 

is used to keep the DC link voltage level at the override level, 

for as long as possible or until the motor comes to a 

standstill. This is dependent on the inertia of the motor/load 

combination and the load of the motor at the time the dip 

occurs, see Fig. 101. 

Default: On 

Off 0 At a voltage dip the low voltage trip will protect. 

On 1 


Fig. 101 Low voltage override 

421 Low Volt OR 

Stp On 

A 

At mains dip, AC drive ramps down until 

voltage rises. 







DC link voltage 

Override 

level 

Low Volt. 

level 

Speed 

(06-F60new) 

NOTE: During the low voltage override the LED trip/limit 

blinks. 

t 

t 

Rotor locked [422] 

With the rotor locked function enabled, the AC drive will 

protect the motor and application when this is stalled whilst 

increasing the motor speed from standstill. This protection 

will coast the motor to stop and indicate a fault when the 

Torque Limit has been active at very low speed for more 

than 5 seconds. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 No detection 

On 1 


Motor lost [423] 

With the motor lost function enabled, the AC drive is able 

to detect a fault in the motor circuit: motor, motor cable, 

thermal relay or output filter. Motor lost will cause a trip, 

and the motor will coast to standstill, when a missing motor 

phase is detected during a period of 5 s. 


AC drive will trip when locked rotor is 

detected. Trip message “Locked Rotor”. 







Default: Off 

Off 0 

Trip 1 

Start 2 

422 Rotor locked 

Stp Off 

A 

423 Motor lost 

Stp Off 

A 

Function switched off to be used if no 

motor or very small motor connected. 

AC drive will trip when the motor is 

disconnected. Trip message “Motor Lost”. 

Test for disconnected motor will only be 

performed during start routine. 








Overvolt control [424] 

Used to switch off the overvoltage control function when 

only braking by brake chopper and resistor is required. The 

overvoltage control function, limits the braking torque so 

that the DC link voltage level is controlled at a high, but 

safe, level. This is achieved by limiting the actual 

deceleration rate during stopping. In case of a defect at the 

brake chopper or the brake resistor the AC drive will trip for 

“Overvoltage” to avoid a fall of the load e.g. in crane 

applications. 

NOTE: Overvoltage control should not be activated if 

brake chopper is used. 

Default: On 

On 0 Overvoltage control activated 

Off 1 Overvoltage control off 


424 Over Volt Ctl 

Stp On 

A 







11.5 I/Os and Virtual 

Connections [500] 

Main menu with all the settings of the standard inputs and 

outputs of the AC drive. 

11.5.1 Analogue Inputs [510] 

Submenu with all settings for the analogue inputs. 

AnIn1 Function [511] 

Sets the function for Analogue input 1. Scale and range are 

defined by AnIn1 Advanced settings [513]. 

Default: Process Ref 

Off 0 Input is not active 

Max Speed 1 The input acts as an upper speed limit. 

Max Torque 2 The input acts as an upper torque limit. 

Process Val 3 


511 AnIn1 Fc 

Stp Process Ref 

A 

The input value equals the actual process 

value (feedback) and is compared to the 

reference signal (set point) by the PID 

controller, or can be used to display and 

view the actual process value. 

Process Ref 4 

Reference value is set for control in 

process units, see Process Source [321] 

and Process Unit [322]. 

Min Speed 5 The input acts as a lower speed limit. 







NOTE: When AnInX Func=Off, the connected signal will 

still be available for Comparators [610]. 

Adding analogue inputs 

If more than one analogue input is set to the same function, 

the values of the inputs can be added together. In the 

following examples we assume that Process Source [321] is 

set to Speed. 

Example 1: Add signals with different weight (fine tuning). 

Signal on AnIn1 = 10 mA 

Signal on AnIn2 = 5 mA 

[511] AnIn1 Function = Process Ref. 

[512] AnIn1 Setup = 4-20 mA 

[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = Min (0 rpm) 

[5136] AnIn1 Function Max = Max (1500 rpm) 

[5138] AnIn1 Operation = Add+ 



[515] AnIn2 Setup = 4-20 mA 


[5166] AnIn2 Function Max = User defined 

[5167] AnIn2 Value Max = 300 rpm 


Calculation: 

AnIn1 = (10-4) / (20-4) x (1500-0) + 0 = 562.5 rpm 

AnIn2 = (5-4) / (20-4) x (300-0) + 0 = 18.75 rpm 

The actual process reference will be: 

+562.5 + 18.75 = 581 rpm 

Analogue Input Selection via Digital Inputs: 

When two different external Reference signals are used, 

e.g. 4-20mA signal from control centre and a 0-10 V locally 

mounted potentiometer, it is possible to switch between 

these two different analogue input signals via a Digital Input 

set to “AnIn Select”. 

AnIn1 is 4-20 mA 

AnIn2 is 0-10 V 

DigIn3 is controlling the AnIn selection; HIGH is 4-20 mA, 

LOW is 0-10 V 

“[511] AnIn1 Fc” = Process Ref; 

set AnIn1 as reference signal input 

“[512] AnIn1 Setup” = 4-20mA; 

set AnIn1 for a current reference signal 

“[513A] AnIn1 Enabl” = DigIn; 

set AnIn1 to be active when DigIn3 is HIGH 

“[514] AnIn2 Fc” = Process Ref; 

set AnIn2 as reference signal input 

“[515] AnIn2 Setup” = 0-10V; 

set AnIn2 for a voltage reference signal 

“[516A] AnIn2 Enabl” = !DigIn; 

set AnIn2 to be active when DigIn3 is LOW 

“[523] DigIn3=AnIn”; 

set DIgIn3 as input fot selection of AI reference 

Subtracting analogue inputs 

Example 2: Subtract two signals 

Signal on AnIn1 = 8 V 

Signal on AnIn2 = 4 V 


[512] AnIn1 Setup = 0-10 V 





[515] AnIn2 Setup = 0-10 V 



[5168] AnIn2 Operation = Sub- 

Calculation: 

AnIn1 = (8-0) / (10-0) x (1500-0) + 0 = 1200 rpm 

AnIn2 = (4-0) / (10-0) x (1500-0) + 0 = 600 rpm 

The actual process reference will be: 

+1200 - 600 = 600 rpm 

AnIn1 Setup [512] 

The analogue input setup is used to configure the analogue 

input in accordance with the signal used that will be 

connected to the analogue input. With this selection the 

input can be determined as current (4-20 mA) or voltage 

(0-10 V) controlled input. Other selections are available for 

using a threshold (live zero), a bipolar input function, or a 

user defined input range. With a bipolar input reference 

signal, it is possible to control the motor in two directions. 

See Fig. 102. 

NOTE: The selection of voltage or current input is done 

with S1. When the switch is in voltage mode only the 

voltage menu items are selectable. With the switch in 

current mode only the current menu items are 

selectable. 

Default: 4-20 mA 

Dependent on Setting of switch S1 

4–20mA 0 

0–20mA 1 

User mA 2 

User Bipol 

mA 

The current input has a fixed threshold 

(Live Zero) of 4 mA and controls the full 

range for the input signal. See Fig. 104. 

Normal full current scale configuration of 

the input that controls the full range for the 

input signal. See Fig. 103. 

The scale of the current controlled input, 

that controls the full range for the input 

signal. Can be defined by the advanced 

AnIn Min and AnIn Max menus. 


3 

0–10V 4 

2–10V 5 

User V 6 

User Bipol 

V 

7 

512 AnIn1 Setup 

Stp 4-20mA 

A 

Sets the input for a bipolar current input, 

where the scale controls the range for the 

input signal. Scale can be defined in 

advanced menu AnIn Bipol. 

Normal full voltage scale configuration of 

the input that controls the full range for the 

input signal. See Fig. 103. 

The voltage input has a fixed threshold 

(Live Zero) of 2 V and controls the full range 

for the input signal. See Fig. 104. 

The scale of the voltage controlled input, 

that controls the full range for the input 


AnIn Min and AnIn Max menus. 

Sets the input for a bipolar voltage input, 

where the scale controls the range for the 

input signal. Scale can be defined in 

advanced menu AnIn Bipol.

NOTE: For bipol function, input RunR and RunL needs to 

be active and Rotation, [219] must be set to “R+L”. 

NOTE: Always check the needed set up when the setting 

of S1 is changed; selection will not adapt automatically. 








-10 V 

Fig. 102 

100 % 

n 

0 

Speed 

100 % 

100 % 

Fig. 103 Normal full-scale configuration 

n 

0 

10 V 

20 mA 

(NG_06-F21) 

0–10 V 

0–20 mA 

Ref 

10 V 

20mA 

(NG_06-F21) 

Fig. 104 2–10 V/4–20 mA (Live Zero) 

AnIn1 Advanced [513] 

NOTE: The different menus will automatically be set to 

either “mA” or “V”, based on the selection in AnIn 1 

Setup [512]. 

AnIn1 Min [5131] 

Parameter to set the minimum value of the external 

reference signal. Only visible if [512] = User mA/V. 

Default: 0 V/4.00 mA 

Range: 

0.00–20.00 mA 

0–10.00 V 







Long, 1=0.01 mA, 

0.01 V 


AnIn1 Max [5132] 

Parameter to set the maximum value of the external 

reference signal. Only visible if [512] = User mA/V. 

Default: 10.00 V/20.00 mA 

Range: 

0.00–20.00 mA 

0–10.00 V 


100 % 

n 

0 

2 V 

4mA 

513 AnIn1 Advan 

Stp A 

10 V 

2 0mA 

5131 AnIn1 Min 

Stp 0V/4.00mA 

A 

5132 AnIn1 Max 

Stp 10.0V/20.00mA 

2–10 V 

4–20 mA 

Ref







Long, 1=0.01 mA, 

0.01 V 


Special function: Inverted reference signal 

If the AnIn minimum value is higher than the AnIn 

maximum value, the input will act as an inverted reference 

input, see Fig. 105. 

100 % 

n 

0 1 0 V 

Fig. 105 Inverted reference 

AnIn1 Bipol [5133] 

This menu is automatically displayed if AnIn1 Setup is set to 

User Bipol mA or User Bipol V. The window will 

automatically show mA or V range according to selected 

function. The range is set by changing the positive 

maximum value; the negative value is automatically adapted 

accordingly. Only visible if [512] = User Bipol mA/V. The 

inputs RunR and RunL input need to be active, and 

“Rotation [219]”, must be set to “R+L”, to operate the 

bipolar function on the analogue input. 

Default: 10.00 V/20.00 mA 

Range: 0.0–20.0 mA, 0.00–10.00 V 






Invert 

AnIn Min > 

AnIn Max 


Long, 1=0.01 mA, 

0.01 V 


Ref 

5133 AnIn1 Bipol 

Stp 10.00V/20.00mA 

A 

(NG_06-F25) 

AnIn1 Function Min [5134] 

With AnIn1 Function Min the physical minimum value is 

scaled to selected process unit. The default scaling is 

dependent of the selected function of AnIn1 [511]. 

Default: Min 

Min 0 Min value 

Max 1 Max value 

Userdefined 

2 Define user value in menu [5135] 

Table 24 shows corresponding values for the min and max 

selections depending on the function of the analogue input 

[511]. 

Table 24 

AnIn Function Min Max 

Speed Min Speed [341] Max Speed [343] 

Torque 0% Max Torque [351] 

Process Ref Process Min [324] Process Max [325] 

Process Value Process Min [324] Process Max [325] 








AnIn1 Function Value Min [5135] 

With AnIn1 Function ValMin you define a user-defined 

value for the signal. Only visible when user-defined is 

selected in menu [5134]. 

Default: 0.000 

5134 AnIn1 FcMin 

Stp Min 

A 

5135 AnIn1 VaMin 

Stp 0.000 

A 

Range: -10000.000 – 10000.000 





EtherCAT index (hex) 4dd5 


Long, 1=1 rpm, 1 %, 1° 

or 0.001 if Process Value/ 


Process Ref using a [322] 

unit 


AnIn1 Function Max [5136] 

With AnIn1 Function Max the physical maximum value is 

scaled to selected process unit. The default scaling is 

dependent of the selected function of AnIn1 [511]. See 

Table 24. 

Default: Max 



User-defined 2 Define user value in menu [5137] 








AnIn1 Function Value Max [5137] 

With AnIn1 Function VaMax you define a user-defined 




5136 AnIn1 FcMax 

Stp Max 

A 

5137 AnIn1 VaMax 

Stp 0.000 

A 

Range: -10000.000 – 10000.000 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4ddf 


Long, 1=1 rpm, 1 %, 1° 

or 0.001 if Process Value/ 



unit 


NOTE: With AnIn Min, AnIn Max, AnIn Function Min and 

AnIn Function Max settings, loss of feedback signals 

(e.g. voltage drop due to long sensor wiring) can be 

compensated to ensure an accurate process control. 

Example: 

Process sensor is a sensor with the following specification: 

Range: 0–3 bar 

Output: 2–10 mA 

Analogue input should be set up according to: 

[512] AnIn1 Setup = User mA 

[5131] AnIn1 Min = 2 mA 

[5132] AnIn1 Max = 10 mA 

[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = User-defined 

[5135] AnIn1 VaMin = 0.000 bar 

[5136] AnIn 1 Function Max = User-defined 

[5137] AnIn1 VaMax = 3.000 bar 

AnIn1 Operation [5138] 

Default: Add+ 

Add+ 0 

Sub- 1 


5138 AnIn1 Oper 

Stp Add+ 

A 

Analogue signal is added to selected 

function in menu [511]. 

Analogue signal is subtracted from 

selected function in menu [511]. 








AnIn1 Filter [5139] 

If the input signal is unstable (e.g. fluctuation reference 

value), the filter can be used to stabilize the signal. A change 

of the input signal will reach 63% on AnIn1 within the set 

AnIn1 Filter time. After 5 times the set time, AnIn1 will 

have reached 100% of the input change. See Fig. 106. 


Range: 0.001 – 10.0 s 








AnIn change 

100% 

63% 

Fig. 106 

AnIn1 Enable [513A] 

Parameter for enable/disable analogue input selection via 

digital inputs (DigIn set to function AnIn Select). 

Default: On 

5139 AnIn1 Filt 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

Original input signal 

T 5 X T 

Filtered AnIn signal 

513A AnIn1 Enabl 

Stp On 

A 

On 0 AnIn1 is always active 

!DigIn 1 AnIn1 is only active if the digital input is low. 

DigIn 2 AnIn1 is only active if the digital input is high. 









Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2. 

Same function as “AnIn1 Fc [511]”. 

Default: Off 











Same functions as “AnIn1 Setup [512]”. 

Default: 4 – 20 mA 


Selection: Same as in menu [512]. 


514 AnIn2 Fc 

Stp Off 

A 


Stp 4-20mA 

A 








Same functions and submenus as under “AnIn1 Advan 

[513]”. 


Stp A 








Modbus format 



Same function as “AnIn1 Fc [511]”. 




43213–43220, 

43542, 

43552 

169/117–124, 

170/191, 

170/201 

4c8d - 4c94, 

4dd6, 

4de0 

Default: Off 


19597-19604, 

19926, 

19936 

See [5131] - [5137]. 







Default: 4–20 mA 

517 AnIn3 Fc 

Stp Off 

A 


Stp 4-20mA 

A 











Same functions and submenus as under “AnIn1 Advan 

[513]”. 







Modbus format 


Stp A 

43223–43230, 

43543, 

43553 

169/127–169/134, 

170/192, 

170/202 

4c97 - 4c9e, 

4dd7, 

4de1 

19607-19614, 

19927, 

19937 

AnIn4 Function [51A] 


Same function as “AnIn1 Fc [511].” 

Default: Off 









See [5131] - [5137]. 

51A AnIn4 Fc 

Stp Off 

A 


AnIn4 Set-up [51B] 


Default: 4-20 mA 






EtherCAT index (hex) 4ca0 




AnIn4 Advanced [51C] 

Same functions and submenus as under “AnIn1 

Advan[513]”. 







Modbus format 

51B AnIn4 Setup 

Stp 4-20mA 

A 

51C AnIn4 Advan 

Stp A 

43233–43240, 

43544, 

43554 

169/137–144, 

170/193, 

170/203 

4ca1 - 4ca8, 

4dd8, 

4de2 

19617-19624, 

19928, 

19938 

See [5131] - [5137]. 

11.5.2 Digital Inputs [520] 

Submenu with all the settings for the digital inputs. 

NOTE: Additional inputs will become available when the 

I/O option boards are connected. 

Digital Input 1 [521] 

To select the function of the digital input. 

On the standard control board there are eight digital inputs. 

If the same function is programmed for more than one input 

that function will be activated according to “OR” logic if 

nothing else is stated. 

Default: RunL 

Off 0 The input is not active. 

Ext. Trip 3 

Stop 4 

Enable 5 

RunR 6 

RunL 7 

Be aware that if there is nothing connected 

to the input, the AC drive will trip at 

“External trip” immediately. 

NOTE: The External Trip is active low. 

NOTE: Activated according to “AND” logic. 

Stop command according to the selected 

Stop mode in menu [33B]. 

NOTE: The Stop command is active low. 


Enable command. General start condition 

to run the AC drive. If made low during 

running the output of the AC drive is cut off 

immediately, causing the motor to coast to 

zero speed. 

NOTE: If none of the digital inputs are 

programmed to “Enable”, the internal 

enable signal is active. 


Run Right command (positive speed). The 

output of the AC drive will be a 

clockwise rotary field. 

Run Left command (negative speed). The 

output of the AC drive will be a 

counter-clockwise rotary field. 

Reset command. To reset a Trip condition 

Reset 9 

and to enable the Autoreset function. 

Preset Ctrl1 10 To select the Preset Reference. 



MotPot Up 13 

MotPot 

Down 

Increases the internal reference value 

according to the set AccMotPot time [333]. 

Has the same function as a “real” motor 

potentiometer, see Fig. 87. 


14 

521 DigIn 1 

Stp RunL 

A 

Decreases the internal reference value 

according to the set DecMotPot time 

[334]. See MotPot Up.

Pump1 

Feedb 

Pump2 

Feedb 

Pump3 

Feedb 

Pump4 

Feedb 

Pump5 

Feedb 

Pump6 

Feedb 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

Timer 1 21 

Timer 2 22 

Set Ctrl 1 23 

Set Ctrl 2 24 

Mot PreMag 25 

Jog 26 

Ext Mot 

Temp 

27 

Loc/Rem 28 

AnIn select 29 

LC Level 30 

Brk Ackn 31 

Feedback input pump1 for Pump/Fan 

control and informs about the status of the 

auxiliary connected pump/fan. 

Feedback input pump 2 for Pump/Fan 















Timer 1 Delay [643] will be activated on the 

rising edge of this signal. 

Timer 2 Delay [653] will be activated on the 

rising edge of this signal. 

Activates other parameter set. See Table 

25 for selection possibilities. 

Activates other parameter set. See Table 

25 for selection possibilities. 

Pre-magnetises the motor. Used for faster 

motor start. 

To activate the Jog function. Gives a Run 

command with the set Jog speed and 

Direction, page 113. 

Be aware that if there is nothing connected 

to the input, the AC drive will trip at 

“External Motor Temp” immediately. 

NOTE: The External Motor Temp is active 

low. 

Activate local mode defined in [2171] and 

[2172]. 

Activate/deactivate analogue inputs 

defined in [513A], [516A], [519A] and 

[51CA] 

Liquid cooling low level signal. 

NOTE: The Liquid Cooling Level is active 

low. 

Brake acknowledge input for Brake Fault 

control. Function is activated via this 

selection see menu [33H] page 109 

NOTE: For bipol function, input RunR and RunL needs to 

be active and “Rotation [219]” must be set to “R+L”. 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4ca9 




Table 25 

Parameter Set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2 

A 0 0 

B 1 0 

C 0 1 

D 1 1 

NOTE: To activate the parameter set selection, menu 

241 must be set to DigIn. 

Digital Input 2 [522] to Digital Input 8 

[528] 

Same function as “DigIn 1[521]”. Default function for 

DigIn 8 is Reset. For DigIn 3 to 7 the default function is 

Off. 

Default: RunR 



522 DigIn 2 

Stp RunR 

A 

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43242 – 43248 

Profibus slot/index 169/146 – 169/152 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4caa - 4cb0 





Additional digital inputs [529] to [52H] 

Additional digital inputs with I/O option board installed, 

“B1 DigIn 1 [529]” - “B3 DigIn 3 [52H]”. B stands for 

board and 1 to 3 is the number of the board which is related 

to the position of the I/O option board on the option 

mounting plate. The functions and selections are the same as 

“DigIn 1 [521]”. 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4dad - 4db5 




11.5.3 Analogue Outputs [530] 

Submenu with all settings for the analogue outputs. 

Selections can be made from application and AC drive 

values, in order to visualize actual status. Analogue outputs 

can also be used as a mirror of the analogue input. Such a 

signal can be used as: 

• a reference signal for the next AC drive in a Master/Slave 

configuration (see Fig. 107). 

• a feedback acknowledgement of the received analogue 

reference value. 

AnOut1 Function [531] 

Sets the function for the Analogue Output 1. Scale and 

range are defined by AnOut1 Advanced settings [533]. 


Process Val 0 

Actual process value according to 

Process feedback signal. 

Speed 1 Actual speed. 

Torque 2 Actual torque. 

Process Ref 3 Actual process reference value. 

Shaft Power 4 Actual shaft power. 

Frequency 5 Actual frequency. 

Current 6 Actual current. 

El power 7 Actual electrical power. 

Output volt 8 Actual output voltage. 

DC-voltage 9 Actual DC link voltage. 

AnIn1 10 

AnIn2 11 

AnIn3 12 

AnIn4 13 

Speed Ref 14 

Torque Ref 15 

531 AnOut1 Fc 

Stp Speed 

A 

Mirror of received signal value on 

AnIn1. 


AnIn2. 


AnIn3. 


AnIn4. 

Actual internal speed reference Value 

after ramp and V/Hz. 

Actual torque reference value 

(=0 in V/Hz mode) 

NOTE: When selections AnIn1, AnIn2 …. AnIn4 is 

selected, the setup of the AnOut (menu [532] or [535]) 

has to be set to 0-10V or 0-20mA. When the AnOut Setup 

is set to e.g. 4-20mA, the mirroring is not working 

correct. 





EtherCAT index (hex) 4cb3 




AnOut 1 Setup [532] 

Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration. 

Default: 4-20mA 

4–20mA 0 

0–20mA 1 

User mA 2 

User Bipol 

mA 

3 

0-10V 4 

2–10V 5 

User V 6 

User Bipol V 7 


532 AnOut1 Setup 

Stp 4-20mA 

A 

The current output has a fixed threshold 

(Live Zero) of 4 mA and controls the full 

range for the output signal. See Fig. 104. 

Normal full current scale configuration of 

the output that controls the full range for 

the output signal. See Fig. 103. 

The scale of the current controlled output 

that controls the full range for the output 


AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus. 

Sets the output for a bipolar current 

output, where the scale controls the 

range for the output signal. Scale can be 

defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol. 

Normal full voltage scale configuration of 

the output that controls the full range for 

the output signal. See Fig. 103. 

The voltage output has a fixed threshold 

(Live Zero) of 2 V and controls the full 

range for the output signal. See Fig. 104. 

The scale of the voltage controlled output 

that controls the full range for the output 


AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus. 

Sets the output for a bipolar voltage 

output, where the scale controls the 

range for the output signal. Scale can be 

defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol. 







Fig. 107 

AC drive 1 

Master 

AnOut1 Advanced [533] 

With the functions in the AnOut1 Advanced menu, the 

output can be completely defined according to the 

application needs. The menus will automatically be adapted 

to “mA” or “V”, according to the selection in “AnOut1 

Setup [532]”. 

AnOut1 Min [5331] 

This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or 

User V is selected in menu “AnOut 1 Setup [532]”. The 

menu will automatically adapt to current or voltage setting 

according to the selected setup. Only visible if [532] = User 

mA/V. 

Default: 4 mA 

Range: 0.00 – 20.00 mA, 0 – 10.00 V 






AC drive 2 

Slave 


Long, 1=0.01 V, 

0.01 mA 



Ref. 

AnOut 

Ref. 

533 AnOut 1 Adv 

Stp A 

5331 AnOut 1 Min 

Stp 4mA 

A

AnOut1 Max [5332] 

This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or 

User V is selected in menu “AnOut1 Setup [532]”. The 

menu will automatically adapt to current or voltage setting a 

ccording to the selected setup. Only visible if [532] = User 

mA/V. 

Default: 20.00 mA 

Range: 0.00–20.00 mA, 0–10.00 V 







Long, 1=0.01 V, 

0.01 mA 


AnOut1 Bipol [5333] 

Automatically displayed if User Bipol mA or User Bipol V is 

selected in menu AnOut1 Setup. The menu will 

automatically show mA or V range according to the selected 

function. The range is set by changing the positive 

maximum value; the negative value is automatically adapted 

accordingly. Only visible if [512] = User Bipol mA/V. 

Default: -10.00–10.00 V 

Range: -10.00–10.00 V, -20.0–20.0 mA 


5332 AnOut 1 Max 

Stp 20.0mA 

A 

5333 AnOut1Bipol 

Stp -10.00-10.00V 

A 






Long, 1=0.01 V, 

0.01 mA 


AnOut1 Function Min [5334] 

With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value is 

scaled to selected presentation. The default scaling is 

dependent of the selected function of “AnOut1 [531]”. 

Default: Min 



User-defined 2 Define user value in menu [5335] 

Table 26 shows corresponding values for the min and max 

selections depending on the function of the analogue output 

[531]. 

Table 26 

AnOut 

Function 

5334 AnOut1FCMin 

Stp Min 

A 

Min Value Max Value 

Process Value Process Min [324] Process Max [325] 

Speed Min Speed [341] Max Speed [343] 

Torque 0% Max Torque [351] 

Process Ref Process Min [324] Process Max [325] 

Shaft Power 0% Motor Power [223] 

Frequency Fmin * Motor Frequency [222] 

Current 0 A Motor Current [224] 

El Power 0 W Motor Power [223] 

Output Voltage 0 V Motor Voltage [221] 

DC voltage 0 V 1000 V 

AnIn1 AnIn1 Function Min AnIn1 Function Max 




*) Fmin is dependent on the set value in menu 

“Minimum Speed [341]”. 









Example 

Set the AnOut function for Motorfrequency to 0Hz, set 

AnOut functionMin [5334] to “User-defined” and AnOut1 

VaMin[5335] = 0.0. This results in an anlogue output signal 

from 0/4 mA to 20mA: 0Hz to Fmot. 

This principle is valid for all Min to Max settings. 

AnOut1 Function Value Min [5335] 

With AnOut1 Function VaMin you define a user-defined 




Range: -10000.000–10000.000 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4dd9 


Long, 1=1 rpm, 1 %, 1W, 

0.1 Hz, 0.1 V, 0.1 A or 


0.001 via process value 

[322] 


AnOut1 Function Max [5336] 

With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value is 

scaled to selected presentation. The default scaling is 

dependent on the selected function of AnOut1 [531]. See 

Table 26. 

Default: Max 



User defined 2 Define user value in menu [5337] 


5335 AnOut1VaMin 

Stp 0.000 

A 

5336 AnOut1FCMax 

Stp Max 

A 







NOTE: It is possible to set AnOut1 up as an inverted 

output signal by setting AnOut1 Min > AnOut1 Max. See 

Fig. 105. 

AnOut1 Function Value Max [5337] 

With AnOut1 Function VaMax you define a user-defined 




5337 AnOut1VaMax 

Stp 0.000 

A 

Range: -10000.000–10000.000 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4de3 


Long, 1=1 rpm, 1 %, 1W, 

0.1 Hz, 0.1 V, 0.1 A or 


0.001 via process value 

[322] 


AnOut2 Function [534] 

Sets the function for the Analogue Output 2. 

534 AnOut2 Fc 

Stp Torque 

A 

Default: Torque 





EtherCAT index (hex) 4cbd 





AnOut2 Setup [535] 

Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration for 

analogue output 2. 

Default: 4-20mA 





EtherCAT index (hex) 4cbe 




AnOut2 Advanced [536] 

Same functions and submenus as under AnOut1 Advanced 

[533]. 







Modbus format 

535 AnOut2 Setup 

Stp 4-20mA 

A 

536 AnOut2 Advan 

Stp A 

43263–43267, 

43546, 

43556 

169/167–169/171, 

170/195, 

170/205 

4cbf - 4cc3, 

4dda, 

4de4 

19647 - 19651, 

19930, 

19940 

See [533]- [5367]. 

11.5.4 Digital Outputs [540] 

Submenu with all the settings for the digital outputs. 

Digital Out 1 [541] 

Sets the function for the digital output 1. 

NOTE: The definitions described here are valid for the 

active output condition. 

Default: Ready 

Off 0 

On 1 

Output is not active and constantly 

low. 

Output is made constantly high, i.e. 

for checking circuits and trouble 

shooting. 

Run 2 

Running. The AC drive output is active 

= produces current for the motor. 

Stop 3 The AC drive output is not active. 

0Hz 4 

The output frequency=0±0.1Hz when 

in Run condition. 

Acc/Dec 5 

The speed is increasing or decreasing 

along the acc. ramp dec. ramp. 

At Process 6 The output = Reference. 

At Max spd 7 

The frequency is limited by the 

Maximum Speed. 

No Trip 8 No Trip condition active. 

Trip 9 A Trip condition is active. 

AutoRst Trip 10 Autoreset trip condition active. 

Limit 11 A Limit condition is active. 

Warning 12 A Warning condition is active. 

Ready 13 

T= T lim 

The AC drive is ready for operation 

and to accept a start command. This 

means that the AC drive is powered 

up and healthy. 


I>I nom 

14 

15 

Brake 16 

Sgnl

Max Alarm 20 

Max PreAlarm 21 

Min Alarm 22 

The max alarm , 

level has been 

reached. 

The max pre alarm level has been 

reached. 

The min alarm level has been 

reached. 

Min PreAlarm 23 

The min pre alarm Level has been 

reached. 

LY 24 Logic output Y. 

!LY 25 Logic output Y inverted. 

LZ 26 Logic output Z. 

!LZ 27 Logic output Z inverted. 

CA 1 28 Analogue comparator 1 output. 

!A1 29 Analogue comp 1 inverted output. 

CA 2 30 Analogue comparator 2 output. 

!A2 31 Analogue comp 2 inverted output. 

CD 1 32 Digital comparator 1 output. 

!D1 33 Digital comp 1 inverted output. 

CD 2 34 Digital comparator 2 output. 

!D2 35 Digital comp 2 inverted output. 

Operation 36 

Run command is active or AC drive 

running. The signal can be used to 

control the mains contactor if the AC 

drive is equipped with Standby supply 

option. 

T1Q 37 Timer1 output 

!T1Q 38 Timer1 inverted output 

T2Q 39 Timer2 output 

!T2Q 40 Timer2 inverted output 

Sleeping 41 Sleeping function activated 

PumpSlave1 43 Activate pump slave 1 






PumpMaster1 49 Activate pump master 1 






All Pumps 55 All pumps are running 

Only Master 56 Only the master is running 

Loc/Rem 57 Local/Rem function is active 

Standby 58 Standby supply option is active 

PTC Trip 59 Trip when function is active 

PT100 Trip 60 Trip when function is active 

Overvolt 61 Overvoltage due to high main voltage 

Overvolt G 62 Overvoltage due to generation mode 

Overvolt D 63 Overvoltage due to deceleration 

Acc 64 Acceleration along the acc. ramp 

Dec 65 Deceleration along the dec. ramp 

I 2 t 66 I 2 t limit protection active 

V-Limit 67 Overvoltage limit function active 

C-Limit 68 Overcurrent limit function active 

Overtemp 69 Over temperature warning 

Low voltage 70 Low voltage warning 

DigIn 1 71 Digital input 1 








ManRst Trip 79 

Active trip that needs to be manually 

reset 

Com Error 80 Serial communication lost 

External Fan 81 

The AC drive requires external cooling. 

Internal fans are active. 

LC Pump 82 Activate liquid cooling pump 

LC HE Fan 83 

Activate liquid cooling heat exchanger 

fan 

LC Level 84 Liquid cooling low level signal active 

Run Right 85 

Positive speed (>0.5%), i.e. forward/ 

clockwise direction. 

Run Left 86 

Negative speed (

!D3 96 Digital comparator 3 inverted output 

CD4 97 Digital comparator 4 output 

!D4 98 Digital comparator 4 inverted output 

C1Q 99 Counter 1 output 

!C1Q 100 Counter 1 inverted output 

C2Q 101 Counter 2 output 

!C2Q 102 Counter 2 Inverted output 

Enc Error 103 Tripped on Encoder error 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4cc7 




Digital Out 2 [542] 



Sets the function for the digital output 2. 

Default: Brake 



542 DigOut2 

Stp Brake 

A 







11.5.5 Relays [550] 

Submenu with all the settings for the relay outputs. The 

relay mode selection makes it possible to establish a “fail 

safe” relay operation by using the normal closed contact to 

function as the normal open contact. 

NOTE: Additional relays will become available when I/O 

option boards are connected. Maximum 3 boards with 3 

relays each. 

Relay 1 [551] 

Sets the function for the relay output 1. Same function as 

digital output 1 [541] can be selected. 

Default: Trip 









Relay 2 [552] 



Sets the function for the relay output 2. 

Default: Run 



551 Relay 1 

Stp Trip 

A 

552 Relay 2 

Stp Run 

A 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4cca 





Relay 3 [553] 

Sets the function for the relay output 3. 

Default: Off 





EtherCAT index (hex) 4ccb 




Board Relay [554] to [55C] 

These additional relays are only visible if an I/O option 

board is fitted in slot 1, 2, or 3. The outputs are named B1 

Relay 1–3, B2 Relay 1–3 and B3 Relay 1–3. B stands for 

board and 1–3 is the number of the board which is related to 

the position of the I/O option board on the option 

mounting plate. 

NOTE: Visible only if optional board is detected or if any 

input/output is activated. 


553 Relay 3 

Stp Off 

A 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4db7 - 4dbf 




Relay Advanced [55D] 

This function makes it possible to ensure that the relay will 

also be closed when the AC drive is malfunctioning or 

powered down. 

Example 

A process always requires a certain minimum flow. To 

control the required number of pumps by the relay mode 

NC, the e.g. the pumps can be controlled normally by the 

pump control, but are also activated when the AC drive is 

tripped or powered down. 

Relay 1 Mode [55D1] 

Default: N.O 

N.O 0 

N.C 1 


The normal open contact of the relay will 

be activated when the function is active. 

The normally closed contact of the relay 

will act as a normal open contact. The 

contact will be opened when function is 

not active and closed when function is 

active. 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4ccc 




Relay Modes [55D2] to [55DC] 

Same function as for “Relay 1 Mode [55D1]”. 





55D Relay Adv 

Stp A 

55D1 Relay1 Mode 

Stp N.O 

A 

43277, 43278, 

43521–43529 

169/181, 169/182, 

170/170–170/178 

4ccd, 4cce, 

4dc1 - 4dc9 


19661, 19662, 

19905 - 19913 




11.5.6 Virtual Connections [560] 

Functions to enable eight internal connections of 

comparator, timer and digital signals, without occupying 

physical digital in/outputs. Virtual connections are used to 

wireless connection of a digital output function to a digital 

input function. Available signals and control functions can 

be used to create your own specific functions. 

Example of start delay 

The motor will start in RunR 10 seconds after DigIn1 gets 

high. DigIn1 has a time delay of 10 s. 

Menu Parameter Setting 

[521] DigIn1 Timer 1 

[561] VIO 1 Dest RunR 

[562] VIO 1 Source T1Q 

[641] Timer1 Trig DigIn 1 

[642] Timer1 Mode Delay 

[643] Timer1 Delay 0:00:10 

NOTE: When a digital input and a virtual destination are 

set to the same function, this function will act as an OR 

logic function. 

Virtual Connection 1 Destination [561] 

With this function the destination of the virtual connection 

is established. When a function can be controlled by several 

sources, e.g. VC destination or Digital Input, the function 

will be controlled in conformity with “OR logic”. See DigIn 

for descriptions of the different selections. 

Default: Off 

Selection: 


561 VIO 1 Dest 

Stp Off 

A 

Same selections as for Digital Input 1, 

menu [521]. 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4cd1 




Virtual Connection 1 Source [562] 

With this function the source of the virtual connection is 

defined. See DigOut 1 for description of the different 

selections. 

Default: Off 

Selection: Same as for menu [541]. 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4cd2 




Virtual Connections 2-8 [563] to [56G] 

Same function as virtual connection 1 [561] and [562]. 

Communication information for virtual connections 2-8 

Destination. 




43283, 43285, 43287, 

43289, 43291, 43293, 

43295 

169/ 187, 189, 191, 193, 

195, 197, 199 

4cd3, 4cd5, 4cd17, 4cd9, 

4cdb, 4cdd, 4cdf 

19667, 19669, 19671, 


19673, 19675, 19677, 

19679 



Communication information for virtual connections 2-8 

Source. 




562 VIO 1 Source 

Stp Off 

A 

43284, 43286, 43288, 

43290, 43292, 43294, 

43296 

169/ 188, 190, 192, 194, 

196, 198, 200 

4cd4, 4cd6, 4cd8, 4cda, 

4cdc, 4cde, 4ce0 

19668, 19670, 19672, 


19674, 19676, 19678, 

19680 




11.6 Logical Functions and 

Timers [600] 

With the Comparators, Logic Functions and Timers, 

conditional signals can be programmed for control or 

signalling features. This gives you the ability to compare 

different signals and values in order to generate monitoring/ 

controlling features. 

11.6.1 Comparators [610] 

The comparators available make it possible to monitor 

different internal signals and values, and visualize via digital 

relay outputs, when a specific value or status is reached or 

established. 

Analogue comparators [611] - [614] 

There are 4 analogue comparators that compare any 

available analogue value (including the analogue reference 

inputs) with two adjustable levels. The two levels available 

are Level HI and Level LO. There are two analogue 

comparator types selectable, an analogue comparator with 

hysteresis and an analogue window comparator. 

The analogue hysteresis type comparator uses the two 

available levels to create a hysteresis for the comparator 

between setting and resetting the output. This function gives 

a clear difference in switching levels, which lets the process 

adapt until a certain action is started. With such a hysteresis, 

even an unstable analogue signal can be monitored without 

getting a nervous comparator output signal. Another feature 

is the possibility to get a fixed indication that a certain level 

has been passed. The comparator can latch by setting Level 

LO to a higher value than Level HI. 

The analogue window comparator uses the two available 

levels to define the window in which the analogue value 

should be within for setting the comparator output. 

The input analogue value of the comparator can also be 

selected as bipolar, i.e. treated as signed value or 

unipolar, i.e. treated as absolute value. 

Refer to Fig. 112, page 157 where these functions are 

illustrated. 

Digital comparators [615] 

There are 4 digital comparators that compare any available 

digital signal. 

The output signals of these comparators can be logically tied 

together to yield a logical output signal. 

All the output signals can be programmed to the digital or 

relay outputs or used as a source for the virtual connections 

[560]. 

CA1 Setup [611] 

Analogue comparator 1, parameter group. 

Analogue Comparator 1, Value [6111] 

Selection of the analogue value for Analogue Comparator 1 

(CA1). 

Analogue comparator 1 compares the selectable analogue 

value in menu [6111] with the constant Level HI in menu 

[6112] and constant Level LO in menu [6113]. If Bipolar 

type[6115] input signal is selected then the comparison is 

made with sign otherwise if unipolar selected then 

comparison is made with absolute values. 

For Hysteresis comparator type [6114], when the value 

exceeds the upper limit level high, the output signal CA1 is 

set high and !A1 low, see Fig. 108. When the value decreases 

below the lower limit, the output signal CA1 is set low and 

!A1 high. 

Analogue value: 

Menu [6111] 

Adjustable Level HI. 

Menu [6112] 

Adjustable Level LO. 

Menu [6113] 

Fig. 108 Analogue comparator type Hysteresiss 

For Window comparator type [6114], when the value is 

between the lower and upper levels, the output signal value 

CA1 is set high and !A1 low, see Fig. 111. When the value is 

outside the band of lower and upper levels, the output CA1 

is set low and !A1 high. 

Level High[6112] 

An Value [6111] 

Level Low [6113] 

Fig. 109 Analogue comparator type “Window” 


0 

1 

Signal:CA1 

(NG_06-F125) 

AND Signal 

CA1

The output signal can be programmed as a virtual 

connection source and to the digital or relay outputs. 


Process Val 0 

Speed 1 rpm 

Torque 2 % 

Shaft Power 3 kW 

El Power 4 kW 

Current 5 A 

Output Volt 6 V 

Frequency 7 Hz 

DC Voltage 8 V 

Heatsink Tmp 9 °C 

PT100_1 10 °C 

PT100_2 11 °C 

PT100_3 12 °C 

Energy 13 kWh 

Run Time 14 h 

Mains Time 15 h 

AnIn1 16 % 

AnIn2 17 % 

AnIn3 18 % 

AnIn4 19 % 


6111 CA1 Value 

Stp Speed 

A 

Set by Process settings [321] and 

[322] 

Process Ref 20 Set by Process settings [321] and 

[322] 

Process Err 21 







Example 

Create automatic RUN/STOP signal via the analogue 

reference signal. Analogue current reference signal, 4-20 

mA, is connected to Analogue Input 1. “AnIn1 Setup”, 

menu [512] = 4-20 mA and the threshold is 4 mA. Full scale 

(100%) input signal on “AnIn 1” = 20 mA. When the 

reference signal on “AnIn1” increases 80% of the threshold 

(4 mA x 0.8 = 3.2 mA), the AC drive will be set in RUN 

mode. When the signal on “AnIn1” goes below 60% of the 

threshold (4 mA x 0.6 = 2.4 mA) the AC drive is set to 

STOP mode. The output of CA1 is used as a virtual 

connection source that controls the virtual connection 

destination RUN. 

Menu Function Setting 

511 AnIn1 Function Process reference 

512 AnIn1 Set-up 4-20 mA, threshold is 4 mA 

341 Min Speed 0 

343 Max Speed 1500 

6111 CA1 Value AnIn1 

6112 CA1 Level HI 16% (3.2mA/20mA x 100%) 

6113 CA1 Level LO 12% (2.4mA/20mA x 100%) 

6114 CA1 Type Hysteresis 

561 VIO 1 Dest RunR 

562 VIO 1 Source CA1 

215 Run/Stp Ctrl Remote 


20 mA 

4 mA 

3.2 mA 

2.4 mA 

CA1 

Mode 

RUN 

STOP 

Fig. 110 

No. Description 

1 

2 

3 

T 

4 

5 

6 

Reference signal AnIn1 

T 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

Max speed 

CA1 Level HI = 16% 

The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 

below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output stays 

low, mode=RUN. 

The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 

below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output is set 

high, mode=RUN. 

The reference signal passes the threshold level of 4 mA, 

the motor speed will now follow the reference signal. 

During this period the motor speed will follow the 

reference signal. 

CA1 Level LO = 12% 

The reference signal reaches the threshold level, motor 

speed is 0 rpm, mode = RUN. 

The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 

above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 output stays 

high, mode =RUN. 

The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 

above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 

output=STOP. 

t 

t 

t 

Analogue Comparator 1, 

Level High [6112] 

Sets the analogue comparator high level, with range 

according to the selected value in menu [6111]. 


Range: See min/max in table below. 

Min/Max setting range for menu [6112] 

Mode Min Max Decimals 

Process Val 

Set by Process settings 

[321] and [322] 

3 

Speed, rpm 0 Max speed 0 

Torque, % 0 Max torque 0 

Shaft Power, kW 0 Motor Pnx4 0 

El Power, kW 0 Motor Pnx4 0 

Current, A 0 Motor Inx4 1 

Output volt, V 0 1000 1 

Frequency, Hz 0 400 1 

DC voltage, V 0 1250 1 

Heatsink temp, �C 0 100 1 

PT 100_1_2_3, �C -100 300 1 

Energy, kWh 0 1000000 0 

Run time, h 0 65535 0 

Mains time, h 0 65535 0 

AnIn 1-4% 0 100 0 

Process Ref 

Process Err 


6112 CA1 Level HI 

Stp 300rpm 

A 


[321] and [322] 


[321] and [322] 

NOTE: If Bipolar selected [6115] then Min value is equal 

to -Max in the table. 



EtherCAT index (hex) 4d4a 


Long, 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 


0.1 Hz, 0.1�C, 1 kWh, 1H, 

1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via 

process value 



3 

3

Example 

This example describes, both for hysteresis and window type 

comparator, the normal use of the constant level high and 

low. 

Menu Function Setting 

343 Max Speed 1500 

6111 CA1 Value Speed 

6112 CA1 Level HI 300 rpm 

6113 CA1 Level LO 200 rpm 


561 VC1 Dest Timer 1 

562 VC1 Source CA1 

MAX 

speed 

[343] 

300 

200 

Output 

CA1 

High 

Low 

Output 

CA1 

High 

Low 

Fig. 111 

[6114] Hysteresis 

[6114] Window 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

CA1 Level HI [6112] 

Hysteresis/Window 

band 

CA1 Level LO [6113] 

t 

t 

t 

Table 27 Comments to Fig. 111 regarding Hysteresis 

selection. 

No. Description Hysteresis 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

The reference signal passes the Level LO 

value from below (positive edge), the 

comparator CA1 does not change, output 

stays low. 

The reference signal passes the Level HI 


comparator CA1 output is set high. 


value from above (negative edge), the 


stays high. 



comparator CA1 is reset, output is set low. 




stays low. 



comparator CA1 output is set high. 




stays high. 



comparator CA1 is reset, output is set low.

Table 28 Comments to Fig. 111 regarding Window 

selection. 

No. Description Window 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 


value from below (signal inside Window 

band), the comparator CA1 output is set high. 


value from above (signal outside Window 

band), the comparator CA1 is reset, output is 

set low. 


value from above (signal inside Window 





set low. 


value from below (signal inside Window 



value from below (signal outside Window 

band),the comparator CA1 is reset, output is 

set low. 


value from above (signal inside Window 





set low. 



Sets the analogue comparator low level, with unit and range 

according to the selected value in menu [6111]. 


Range: Range as [6112]. 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4d4b 


Long, 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 


0.1 Hz, 0.1�C, 1 kWh, 1H, 

1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via 

process value 


Analogue Comparator 1, Type [6114] 

Selects the analogue comparator type, i.e. Hysteresis or 

Window type. See Fig. 112 and Fig. 113. 

Default: Hysteresis 

6113 CA1 Level LO 

Stp 200rpm 

A 

6114 CA1 Type 

Stp Hysteresis 

A 

Hysteresis 0 Hysteresis type comparator 

Window 1 Window type comparator 









Analogue Comparator 1, Polarity[6115] 

Selects how the selected value in [6111] should be handled 

prior to the the analogue comparator , i.e. as absolute value 

or handled with sign. See Fig. 112 

Default: Unipolar 

6115 CA1 Polar 

Stp Unipolar 

A 

Unipolar 0 Absolute value of [6111] used 

Bipolar 1 Signed value of [6111] used 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4d9e 




Example 

See Fig. 112 and Fig. 113 for different principle 

functionality of comparator features 6114 and 6115. 

Type [6114]= Hysteresis 

CA1 

[6115] Unipolar 

[6112] HI > 0 

[6113] LO > 0 

[6115] Bipolar 

[6112] HI > 0 

[6113] LO > 0 


[6112] HI > 0 

[6113] LO < 0 


[6112] HI < 0 

[6113] LO < 0 

CA1 

CA1 

CA1 

An.Value 

[6111] 

An.Value 

[6111] 

An.Value 

[6111] 

An.Value 

[6111] 

Fig. 112 Principle functionality of comparator features for 

“Type [6114] = Hysteresis ” and “Polar [6115]”. 

[6115] Unipolar 

[6112] HI > 0 

[6113] LO > 0 


[6112] HI > 0 

[6113] LO > 0 


[6112] HI > 0 

[6113] LO < 0 


[6112] HI < 0 

[6113] LO < 0 

Fig. 113 Principle functionality of comparator features for 

“Type [6114] =Window ” and “Polar [6115]”. 

NOTE: When “Unipolar “ is selected, absolute value of 

signal is used. 

NOTE: When “Bipolar” is selected in [6115] then: 

1. Functionality is not symmetrical and 

2. Ranges for high/low are bipolar 


Analogue comparator 2, parameter group. 


Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, 

value [6111]. 

Default: Torque 

Type [6114] = Window 

Selections: Same as in menu [6111] 








An.Value 

[6111] 

An.Value 

[6111] 

An.Value 

[6111] 

An.Value 

[6111] 


CA1 

CA1 

CA1 

CA1 


Stp Torque 

A




level high [6112]. 

Default: 20% 

Range: Enter a value for the high level. 






Long 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 


0.1 Hz, 0.1�C, 1 kWh, 1H, 

1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via 

process value 





level low [6113]. 

Default: 10% 


Stp 20% 

A 


Stp 10% 

A 

Range: Enter a value for the low level. 






Long, 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 


0.1 Hz, 0.1�C, 1 kWh, 1H, 

1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via 

process value 




Type [6114]. 







EtherCAT index (hex) 4d9a 




Analogue Comparator 2, Polar [6125] 


Polar [6115]. 


6124 CA2 Type 


A 


Stp Unipolar 

A 






EtherCAT index (hex) 4d9f 






Analogue comparators 3, parameter group. 



value [6111]. 

Default: Process Value 












level high [6112]. 

Default: 300rpm 


Stp Process Val 

A 


Stp 300rpm 

A 







Long 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 


0.1 Hz, 0.1�C, 1 kWh, 1H, 

1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via 

process value 





level low [6113]. 








Long, 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 


0.1 Hz, 0.1�C, 1 kWh, 1H, 

1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via 

process value 


Analogue Comparator, 3 Type [6134] 

Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, level Type 

[6114]. 



Stp 200rpm 

A 

6134 CA3 Type 


A 













Polar [6115]. 







EtherCAT index (hex) 4da0 





Analogue comparators 4, parameter group. 



value [6111]. 

Default: Process Error 


Stp Unipolar 

A 


Stp Process Err 

A 









Analogue Comparator 4, Level High 

[6142] 

Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level high 

[6112]. 

Default: 100rpm 







Long 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 


0.1 Hz, 0.1�C, 1 kWh, 1H, 

1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via 

process value 




Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, level low 

[6113]. 

Default: -100 rpm 


Stp 100rpm 

A 


Stp -100rpm 

A 







Long, 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 


0.1 Hz, 0.1�C, 1 kWh, 1H, 

1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via 

process value 




Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, level Type 

[6114] 

Default: Window 












Polar [6115] 

Default: Bipolar 

6144 CA4 Type 

Stp Window 

A 


Stp Bipolar 

A 






EtherCAT index (hex) 4da1 




Digital comparator Setup [615] 

Digital comparators, parameter group. 

Digital Comparator 1 [6151] 

Selection of the input signal for digital comparator 1 (CD1). 

The output signal CD1 is set high if the selected input 

signal is active. See Fig. 114. 

The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay 

outputs or used as a source for the virtual connections 

[560]. 

Digital signal: 

Menu [6151] 

Fig. 114 Digital comparator 

Default: Run 

Selection: Same selections as for “DigOut 1 [541]”. 









Function is identical to digital comparator 1 [6151]. 

Default: DigIn 1 










+ 

- 

DComp 1 

Signal: CD1 

(NG_06-F126) 

6151 CD1 

Stp Run 

A 

6152 CD 2 

Stp DigIn 1 

A



Default: Trip 











Default: Ready 

6153 CD 3 

Stp Trip 

A 

6154 CD 4 

Stp Ready 

A 









11.6.2 Logic Output Y [620] 

By means of an expression editor, the comparator signals can 

be logically combined into the Logic Y function. 

The expression editor has the following features: 

• The following signals can be used: 

CA1, CA2, CD1, CD2 or LZ (or LY) 

• The following signals can be inverted: 

!A1, !A2, !D1, !D2, or !LZ (or !LY) 

• The following logical operators are available: 

"+" : OR operator 

"&" : AND operator 

"^" : EXOR operator 

Expressions according to the following truth table can be 

made: 


outputs or used as a Virtual Connection Source [560]. 

The expression must be programmed by means of the 

menus [621] to [625]. 

Example: 

Input Result 

A B & (AND) + (OR) ^(EXOR) 

0 0 0 0 0 

0 1 0 1 1 

1 0 0 1 1 

1 1 1 1 0 

620 LOGIC Y 

Stp CA1&!A2&CD1 

Broken belt detection for Logic Y 

This example describes the programming for a so-called 

“broken belt detection” for fan applications. 

The comparator CA1 is set for frequency>10Hz. 

The comparator !A2 is set for load < 20%. 

The comparator CD1 is set for Run. 

The 3 comparators are all AND-ed, given the “broken belt 

detection”. 

In menus [621]-[625] expression entered for Logic Y is 

visible. 

Set menu [621] to CA1 

Set menu [622] to & 

Set menu [623] to !A2 

Set menu [624] to & 

Set menu [625] to CD1 


Menu [620] now holds the expression for Logic Y: 

CA1&!A2&CD1 

which is to be read as: 

(CA1&!A2)&CD1 

NOTE: Set menu [624] to "�" to finish the expression 

when only two comparators are required for Logic Y. 

Y Comp 1 [621] 

Selects the first comparator for the logic Y function. 

Default: CA1 

CA1 0 

!A1 1 

CA2 2 

!A2 3 

CD1 4 

!D1 5 

CD2 6 

!D2 7 

LZ/LY 8 

!LZ/!LY 9 

T1 10 

!T1 11 

T2 12 

!T2 13 

CA3 14 

!A3 15 

CA4 16 

!A4 17 

CD3 18 

!D3 19 

CD4 20 

!D4 21 

C1 22 

!C1 23 

C2 24 

!C2 25 

621 Y Comp 1 

Stp CA1 

A 








Y Operator 1 [622] 

Selects the first operator for the logic Y function. 

Default: & 

& 1 &=AND 

+ 2 +=OR 

^ 3 ^=EXOR 








Y Comp 2 [623] 

Selects the second comparator for the logic Y function. 

Default: !A2 


622 Y Operator 1 

Stp & 

A 

623 Y Comp 2 

Stp !A2 

A 









Y Operator 2 [624] 

Selects the second operator for the logic Y function. 

Default: & 

. 0 

& 1 &=AND 

+ 2 +=OR 

^ 3 ^=EXOR 

When · (dot) is selected, the Logic Y 

expression is finished (when only two 

expressions are tied together). 








Y Comp 3 [625] 

Selects the third comparator for the logic Y function. 

Default: CD1 


624 Y Operator 2 

Stp & 

A 

625 Y Comp 3 

Stp CD1 

A 








11.6.3 Logic Output Z [630] 

630 LOGIC Z 

Stp CA1&!A2&CD1 

A 

The expression must be programmed by means of the 

menus [631] to [635]. 

Z Comp 1 [631] 

Selects the first comparator for the logic Z function. 

Default: CA1 









Z Operator 1 [632] 

Selects the first operator for the logic Z function. 

Default: & 

631 Z Comp 1 

Stp CA1 

A 

632 Z Operator 1 

Stp & 

A 










Z Comp 2 [633] 

Selects the second comparator for the logic Z function. 

Default: !A2 









Z Operator 2 [634] 

Selects the second operator for the logic Z function. 

Default: & 









Z Comp 3 [635] 

Selects the third comparator for the logic Z function. 

Default: CD1 

633 Z Comp 2 

Stp !A2 

A 

634 Z Operator 2 

Stp & 

A 

635 Z Comp 3 

Stp CD1 

A 









11.6.4 Timer1 [640] 

The Timer functions can be used as a delay timer or as an 

interval with separate On and Off times (alternate mode). In 

delay mode, the output signal T1Q becomes high if the set 

delay time is expired. See Fig. 115. 

Timer1 Trig 

Fig. 115 

In alternate mode, the output signal T1Q will switch 

automatically from high to low etc. according to the set 

interval times. See Fig. 116. 


outputs used in logic functions [620] and [630], or as a 

virtual connection source [560]. 

NOTE: The actual timers are common for all parameter 

sets. If the actual set is changed, the timer functionality 

[641] to [645] will change according set settings but the 

timer value will stay unchanged. So initialization of the 

timer might differ for a set change compared to normal 

triggering of a timer. 

Fig. 116 


T1Q 

Timer1 Trig 

T1Q 

Timer1 delay 

T1 T2 T1 T2

Timer 1 Trig [641] 

Default: Off 

Selection: Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu [541]. 








Timer 1 Mode [642] 

Default: Off 

Off 0 

Delay 1 

Alternate 2 

641 Timer1 Trig 

Stp Off 

A 

642 Timer1 Mode 

Stp Off 

A 








Timer 1 Delay [643] 

This menu is only visible when timer mode is set to delay. 

This menu can only be edited as in alternative 2, see section 

9.5, page 61. 

Timer 1 delay sets the time that will be used by the first 

timer after it is activated. Timer 1 can be activated by a high 

signal on a DigIn that is set to Timer 1 or via a virtual 

destination [560]. 

Default: 0:00:00 (hr:min:sec) 

Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 



643 Timer1Delay 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 

43433 hours 

43434 minutes 

43435 seconds 


170/82, 170/83, 

170/84 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4d69, 4d6a, 4d6b 

Profinet IO index 19817, 19818, 19819 

Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 h/m/s 

Modbus format UInt, 1=1 h/m/s 

Timer 1 T1 [644] 

When timer mode is set to Alternate and Timer 1 is enabled, 

this timer will automatically keep on switching according to 

the independently programmable up and down times. The 

Timer 1 in Alternate mode can be enabled by a digital input 

or via a virtual connection. See Fig. 116. Timer 1 T1 sets the 

up time in the alternate mode. 

644 Timer 1 T1 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 

Default: 0:00:00 (hr:min:sec) 

Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 




Timer 1 T2 [645] 

Timer 1 T2 sets the down time in the alternate mode. 


Timer 1 Value [649] 

Timer 1 Value shows actual value of the timer. 


43436 hours 

43437 minutes 

43438 seconds 


170/85, 170/86, 

170/87 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4d6c, 4d6d, 4d6e 




Default: 0:00:00, hr:min:sec 

Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 


43439 hours 

43440 minutes 

43441 seconds 


170/88, 170/89, 

170/90 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4d6f, 4d70, 4d71 




NOTE: “Timer 1 T1 [644]” and “Timer 2 T1 [654]” are 

only visible when Timer Mode is set to Alternate. 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 


645 Timer1 T2 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 

649 Timer1 Value 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 

42921 hours 

42922 minutes 

42923 seconds 


168/80, 168/81, 

168/82 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4b69, 4b6a, 4b6b 




11.6.5 Timer2 [650] 

Refer to the descriptions for Timer1. 

Timer 2 Trig [651] 

Default: Off 

Selection: 


Timer 2 Mode [652] 

Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu 

[541]. 







Default: Off 

651 Timer2 Trig 

Stp Off 

A 

652 Timer2 Mode 

Stp Off 

A 










Timer 2 Delay [653] 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 



Timer 2 T1 [654] 


43453 hours 

43454 minutes 

43455 seconds 


170/102, 170/103, 

170/104 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4d7d, 4d7e, 4d7f 





Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 


653 Timer2Delay 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 


Stp 0:00:00 

A 

43456 hours 

43457 minutes 

43458 seconds 


170/105, 170/106, 

170/107 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4d80, 4d81, 4d82 




Timer 2 T2 [655] 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 



Timer 2 Value [659] 

Timer 2 Value shows actual value of the timer. 


43459 hours 

43460 minutes 

43461 seconds 


170/108, 170/109, 

170/110 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4d83, 4d84, 4d85 





Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 



Stp 0:00:00 

A 

659 Timer2 Value 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 

42924 hours 

42925 minutes 

42926 seconds 


168/83, 168/84, 

168/84 

EtherCAT index (hex) 4b6c, 4b6d, 4b6f 





11.6.6 Counters [660] 

Counter functions for counting pulses and signalling on 

digital output when counter reaches specified high and low 

limit levels. 

The counter is counting up on positive flanks on the 

triggered signal, the counter is cleared as long as the Reset 

signal is active. 

The counter can be automatically decremented with 

specified decrement time, if no new trigger signal has 

occurred within the decrement time. 

The counter value is clamped to the high limit value and the 

digital output function (C1Q or C2Q) is active when 

counter value equals high limit value. 

See Fig. 117 for more information of the counters. 

6613 

6614 

6611 

6612 

541 

Fig. 117 Counters, operating principle. 

Counter 1 [661] 

Counter 1 parameter group. 

Counter 1 Trigger [6611] 

Selection of the digital output signal used as trigger signal 

for counter 1. Counter 1 is incremented by 1 on every 

positive flank on the trigger signal. 

NOTE: Maximum counting frequency is 8 Hz. 

Default: Off 

6619 

541 = Digital Out 1 function 

6611= Counter 1 trigger 

6612= Counter 1 reset 

6613= Counter 1 High value 

6614= Counter 1 Low value 

6615= Counter 1 Decrement timer 

6619= Counter 1 value 

6615 

6611 C1 Trig 

Stp Off 

A 

Selection: Same selections as “Digital Out 1 [541]”. 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4df3 




Counter 1 Reset [6612] 

Selection of the digital signal used as reset signal for counter 

1. Counter 1 is cleared to 0 and held to 0 as long as reset 

input is active (high). 

NOTE: Reset input has top priority. 

Default: Off 

Selection: Same selections as “Digital Out 1 [541]”. 








Counter 1 High value [6613] 

Sets counter 1 high limit value. Counter 1 value is clamped 

to selected high limit value and the counter 1 output (C1Q) 

is active (high) when the counter value equals the high value. 

NOTE: Value 0 means that counter output is always 

true (high). 

Default: 0 

Range: 0 - 10000 

6612 C1 Reset 

Stp Off 

A 

6613 C1 High Val 

Stp 0 

A 






Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 



Counter 1 Low value [6614] 

Sets counter 1 low limit value. Counter 1 output (C1Q) is 

de-activated (low) when the counter value is equal or smaller 

than the low value. 

NOTE: Counter high value has priority so if high and low 

values are equal then the counter output is de-activated 

when the value is smaller than the low value. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0 - 10000 








Counter 1 Decrement timer [6615] 

Sets counter 1 automatic decrement timer value. The 

counter 1 is decremented by 1 after elapsed decrement time 

and if no new trigger has happened within the decrement 

time. The decrement timer is reset to 0 at every counter 1 

trig pulse 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

6614 C1 Low Val 

Stp 0 

A 

1 - 3600 1 - 3600 1 - 3600 s 

6615 C1 DecTimer 

Stp Off 

A 








Counter 1 Value [6619] 

Parameter shows the actual value of counter 1. 

NOTE: Counter 1 value is common for all parameter sets. 

NOTE: The value is volatile and lost at power down. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0 - 10000 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4b6f 




Counter 2 [662] 

Refer to description for Counter 1 [661]. 

Counter 2 Trigger [6621] 

Function is identical to Counter 1 Trigger [6611]. 

Default: Off 

Selection: Same selections as Digital Out 1 [541]. 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4dfd 




Counter 2 Reset [6622] 

Function is identical to Counter 1 Reset [6612]. 

Default: Off 

6619 C1 Value 

Stp 0 

A 

6621 C2 Trig 

Stp Off 

A 

6622 C2 Reset 

Stp Off 

A 

Selection: Same selections as Digital Out 1 [541]. 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4dfe 





Counter 2 High value [6623] 

Function is identical to Counter 1 High value [6613]. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0 - 10000 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4dff 




Counter 2 Low value [6624] 

Function is identical to Counter 1 Low value [6614]. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0 - 10000 




EtherCAT index (hex) 4e00 




Counter 2 Decrement timer [6625] 

Function is identical to Counter 1 Decrement timer [6615]. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Off 

6623 C2 High Val 

Stp 0 

A 

6624 C2 Low Val 

Stp 0 

A 

1 - 3600 1 - 3600 1 - 3600 s 

6625 C2 DecTimer 

Stp Off 

A 








Counter 2 Value [6629] 

Parameter shows the actual value of counter 2. 

NOTE: Counter 2 value is common for all parameter sets. 

NOTE: The value is volatile and lost at power down. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0 - 10000 

6629 C2 Value 

Stp 0 

A 









11.7 View Operation/Status 

[700] 

Menu with parameters for viewing all actual operational 

data, such as speed, torque, power, etc. 

11.7.1 Operation [710] 

Process Value [711] 

The process value is showing the process actual value, 

depending on selection done in chapter, Process Source 

[321]. 

Unit 

Resolution 


Speed [712] 

Displays the actual shaft speed. 

Depends on selected Pocess source [321] 

and Process Unit [322]. 

Speed: 1 rpm, 4 digits 

Other units: 3 digits 





Long, 1=1rpm, 1%, 1°C or 

0.001 if Process Value/ 



unit 


Unit: rpm 

711 Process Val 

Stp 

Resolution: 1 rpm, 4 digits 

712 Speed 

Stp rpm 




EtherCAT index (hex) 23ea 




Torque [713] 

Displays the actual shaft torque. 

Unit: %, Nm 

Resolution: 1 %, 0.1 Nm 






Shaft power [714] 

Displays the actual shaft power. 

31003 Nm 

31004 % 

121/147 

121/148 

23eb Nm 

23ec % 

1003 Nm 

1004 % 


Long, 1=0.1 Nm 

Long, 1=1 % 


Unit: W 

Resolution: 1W 




EtherCAT index (hex) 23ed 


Fieldbus format Long, 1=1W 


Electrical Power [715] 

Displays the actual electrical output power. 

Unit: kW 

Resolution: 1 W 

713 Torque 

Stp 0% 0.0Nm 

714 Shaft Power 

Stp W 

715 El Power 

Stp kW 





EtherCAT index (hex) 23ee 


Fieldbus format Long, 1=1W 


Current [716] 

Displays the actual output current. 

Unit: A 

Resolution: 0.1 A 




EtherCAT index (hex) 23ef 


Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 A 


Output Voltage [717] 

Displays the actual output voltage. 

Unit: V 

Resolution: 0.1 V 

716 Current 

Stp A 

717 Output Volt 

Stp V 




EtherCAT index (hex) 23f0 




Frequency [718] 

Displays the actual output frequency. 

Unit: Hz 

Resolution: 0.1 Hz 






Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 Hz 


DC Link Voltage [719] 

Displays the actual DC link voltage. 

Unit: V 

Resolution: 0.1 V 

718 Frequency 

Stp Hz 

719 DC Voltage 

Stp V 









Heatsink Temperature [71A] 

Displays the actual heatsink temperature, measured. The 

signal is generated by a sensor in the IGBT module. 

Unit: °C 

Resolution: 0.1°C 






Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 �C 


PT100_1_2_3 Temp [71B] 

Displays the actual PT100 temperature. 

Unit: °C 

Resolution: 1°C 

71A Heatsink Tmp 

Stp °C 

71B PT100 1,2,3 

Stp °C 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31012, 31013, 31014 


121/156 

121/157 

121/158 

EtherCAT index (hex) 23f4, 23f5, 23f6 


Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 °C 


11.7.2 Status [720] 

VSD Status [721] 

Indicates the overall status of the AC drive. 

721 VSD Status 

Stp 1/222/333/44 

Fig. 118 AC drive status 

Display 

position 

Example: “A/Key/Rem/TL” 

This means: 

A: Parameter Set A is active. 

Key: Reference value comes from the keyboard (CP). 

Rem: Run/Stop commands come from terminals 1-22. 

TL: Torque Limit active. 


Function Status value 

1 Parameter Set A,B,C,D 


222 

333 

Source of reference 

value 

Source of Run/ 

Stop/Reset 

command 

44 Limit functions 

-Rem (remote) 

-Key (keyboard) 

-Com (Serial comm.) 

-Opt (option) 

-Rem (remote) 

-Key (keyboard) 

-Com (Serial comm.) 

-Opt (option) 

- - - -No limit active 

-VL (Voltage Limit) 

-SL (Speed Limit) 

-CL (Current Limit) 

-TL (Torque Limit) 






Modbus format UInt

Description of communication format 

Integer values and bits used 

1 - 0 

4 - 2 

7 - 5 

13 - 8 

14 

Bit Integer representation 

Active Parameter set, where 

0=A, 1=B, 2=C, 3=D 

Source of Reference control value, where 

0=Rem, 1=Key, 2=Com, 3=Option 

Source of Run/Stop/Reset command, where 

0=Rem, 1=Key, 2=Com, 3=Option 

Active limit functions, where 

0=No limit, 1=VL, 2=SL, 3=CL, 4=TL 

Inverter is in warning (A warning condition is 

active) 

15 Inverter is tripped (A Trip condition is active) 

Example: 

Previous example “A/Key/Rem/TL” 

is interpreted “ 0/1/0/4” 

In bit format this is presented as 

Bit Interpretation Integer representation 

0 LSB 0 

1 0 

2 1 

3 0 

4 0 

5 0 

6 0 

7 0 

8 0 

A(0) Parameter set 

Key (1) Source of control 

Rem (0) Source of command 

9 0 

10 

11 

1 

0 

TL (4) Limit functions 

12 0 

13 0 

14 0 Warning condition 

15 MSB 0 Trip condition 

In the example above it is assumed that we have no trip or 

warning condition (the alarm LED on the control panel is 

off). 

Warning [722] 

Display the actual or last warning condition. A warning 

occurs if the AC drive is close to a trip condition but still in 

operation. During a warning condition the red trip LED 

will start to blink as long as the warning is active. 

722 Warnings 

Stp warn.msg 

The active warning message is displayed in menu [722]. If 

no warning is active the message “No Error” is displayed. 

The following warnings are possible: 

Fieldbus 

integer 

value 

0 No Error 

1 Motor I²t 

2 PTC 

3 Motor lost 

4 Locked rotor 

5 Ext trip 

6 Mon MaxAlarm 

7 Mon MinAlarm 

8 Comm error 

9 PT100 

11 Pump 

12 Ext Mot Temp 

13 LC Level 

14 Brake 

15 Option 

16 Over temp 

17 Over curr F 

18 Over volt D 

19 Over volt G 

20 Over volt M 

21 Over speed 

22 Under voltage 

23 Power fault 

24 Desat 

25 DClink error 

26 Int error 

27 Ovolt m cut 

28 Over voltage 

29 Not used 

30 Not used 

31 Encoder 








See also the Chapter 12. page 183. 

Warning message 


Digital Input Status [723] 

Indicates the status of the digital inputs. See Fig. 119. 

1 DigIn 1 

2 DigIn 2 

3 DigIn 3 

4 DigIn 4 

5 DigIn 5 

6 DigIn 6 

7 DigIn 7 

8 DigIn 8 

The positions one to eight (read from left to right) indicate 

the status of the associated input: 

1 High 

0 Low 

The example in Fig. 119 indicates that DigIn 1, 

DigIn 3 and DigIn 6 are active at this moment. 

723 DigIn Status 

Stp 1010 0100 

Fig. 119 Digital input status example 






Fieldbus format UInt, bit 0=DigIn1, 

Modbus format 

bit 8=DigIn8 

Digital Output Status [724] 

Indicates the status of the digital outputs and relays. See Fig. 

120. 

RE indicate the status of the relays on position: 

1 Relay1 

2 Relay2 

3 Relay3 

DO indicate the status of the digital outputs on position: 

1 DigOut1 

2 DigOut2 

The status of the associated output is shown. 

1 High 

0 Low 

The example in Fig. 120 indicates that DigOut1 is active 

and Digital Out 2 is not active. Relay 1 is active, relay 2 and 

3 are not active. 

724 DigOutStatus 

Stp RE 100 DO 10 

Fig. 120 Digital output status example 




EtherCAT index (hex) 23fa 


Fieldbus format UInt, bit 0=DigOut1, 

bit 1=DigOut2 

Modbus format 

bit 8=Relay1 

bit 9=Relay2 

bit 10=Relay3 

Analogue Input Status [725] 

Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 1 and 2. 

725 AnIn 1 2 

Stp -100% 65% 

Fig. 121 Analogue input status 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31019, 31020 

Profibus slot/index 121/163, 121/164 

EtherCAT index (hex) 23fb, 23fc 

Profinet IO index 1019, 1020 



The first row indicates the analogue inputs. 

1 AnIn 1 

2 AnIn 2 

Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the 

status of the belonging input is shown in %: 

-100% AnIn1 has a negative 100% input value 

65% AnIn2 has a 65% input value 

So the example in Fig. 121 indicates that both the Analogue 

inputs are active. 

NOTE: The shown percentages are absolute values 

based on the full range/scale of the in- or output; so 

related to either 0–10 V or 0–20 mA. 

Analogue Input Status [726] 

Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 3 and 4. 

726 AnIn 3 4 

Stp -100% 65% 

Fig. 122 Analogue input status 





EtherCAT index (hex) 23fd, 23fe 




Analogue Output Status [727] 

Indicates the status of the analogue outputs. Fig. 119. E.g. if 

4-20 mA output is used, the value 20% equals to 4 mA. 

727 AnOut 1 2 

Stp -100% 65% 

Fig. 123 Analogue output status 




EtherCAT index (hex) 23ff, 2400 




The first row indicates the Analogue outputs. 

1 AnOut 1 

2 AnOut 2 

Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the 

status of the belonging output is shown in %: 

-100%AnOut1 has a negative 100% output value 

65%AnOut2 has a 65% output value 

The example in Fig. 119 indicates that both the Analogue 

outputs are active. 

NOTE: The shown percentages are absolute values 

based on the full range/scale of the in- or output; so 

related to either 0–10 V or 0–20 mA. 

I/O board Status [728] - [72A] 

Indicates the status for the additional I/O on option boards 

1 (B1), 2 (B2) and 3 (B3). 

728 IO B1 

Stp RE 000 DI100 



Profibus slot/index 121/170 - 172 

EtherCAT index (hex) 2401 - 2403 


Fieldbus format UInt, bit 0=DigIn1 

bit 1=DigIn2 

bit 2=DigIn3 

Modbus format 

bit 8=Relay1 

bit 9=Relay2 

bit 10=Relay3 


11.7.3 Stored values [730] 

The shown values are the actual values built up over time. 

Values are stored at power down and updated again at power 

up. 

Run Time [731] 

Displays the total time that the AC drive has been in the 

Run Mode. 

Unit: h: mm:ss (hours: minutes: seconds) 

Range: 00: 00: 00–262143: 59: 59 



Reset Run Time [7311] 

Reset the run time counter. The stored information will be 

erased and a new registration period will start. 




EtherCAT index (hex) 2007 




31028:31029:31030 

(hr:min:sec) 


121/172:121/173: 121/ 

174 

EtherCAT index (hex) 2404:2405:2406 

Profinet IO index 1028:1029:1030 

Fieldbus format Long, 1=1h:m:s 


Default: No 

No 0 

Yes 1 

731 Run Time 

Stp h:mm:ss 

7311 Reset RunTm 

Stp No 

A 

NOTE: After reset the setting automatically reverts to 

“No”. 

Mains time [732] 

Displays the total time that the AC drive has been connected 

to the mains supply. This timer cannot be reset. 

Unit: h: mm:ss (hours: minutes: seconds) 

Range: 00: 00: 00–262143: 59: 59 




732 Mains Time 

Stp h:mm:ss 

31031:31032:31033 

(hr:min:sec) 

121/175:121/176: 121/ 

177 


2407 : 2408 : 

2409 

Profinet IO index 1031:1032:1033 

Fieldbus format Long, 1=1h:m:s 


Energy [733] 

Displays the total energy consumption since the last energy 

reset [7331] took place. 

733 Energy 

Stp kWh 

Unit: Wh (shows Wh, kWh, MWh or GWh) 

Range: 0.0–999999GWh 




EtherCAT index (hex) 240a 


Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 Wh 



Reset Energy [7331] 

Resets the energy counter. The stored information will be 

erased and a new registration period will start. 

Default: No 

Selection: No, Yes 

7331 Rst Energy 

Stp No 

A 








NOTE: After reset the setting automatically goes back to 

“No”. 

11.8 View Trip Log [800] 

Main menu with parameters for viewing all the logged trip 

data. In total the AC drive saves the last 10 trips in the trip 

memory. The trip memory refreshes on the FIFO principle 

(First In, First Out). Every trip in the memory is logged on 

the time of the “Run Time [731]” counter. At every trip, the 

actual values of several parameter are stored and available for 

troubleshooting. 

11.8.1 Trip Message log [810] 

Display the cause of the trip and what time that it occurred. 

When a trip occurs the status menus are copied to the trip 

message log. There are nine trip message logs [810]–[890]. 

When the tenth trip occurs the oldest trip will disappear. 

After reset of occurred trip, the trip message will be removed 

and menu [100] will be indicated. 

Unit: h: m (hours: minutes) 

Range: 0h: 0m–65355h: 59m 

For fieldbus integer value of trip message, see message table 

for warnings, [722]. 

NOTE: Bits 0–5 used for trip message value. Bits 6–15 

for internal use. 


8x0 Trip message 

Stp h:mm:ss 

810 Ext Trip 

Stp 132:12:14 








Trip message [811]-[81O] 

The information from the status menus are copied to the 

trip message log when a trip occurs. 

Trip menu Copied from Description 

811 711 Process Value 

812 712 Speed 

813 712 Torque 

814 714 Shaft Power 

815 715 Electrical Power 

816 716 Current 

817 717 Output voltage 

818 718 Frequency 

819 719 DC Link voltage 

81A 71A Heatsink Temperature 

81B 71B PT100_1, 2, 3 

81C 721 AC drive Status 

81D 723 Digital input status 

81E 724 Digital output status 

81F 725 Analogue input status 1-2 

81G 726 Analogue input status 3-4 

81H 727 Analogue output status 1-2 

81I 728 I/O status option board 1 

81J 729 I/O status option board 2 

81K 72A I/O status option board 3 

81L 731 Run Time 

81M 732 Mains Time 

81N 733 Energy 

81O 310 Process reference 




121/246 - 254, 

122/0 - 24 

EtherCAT index (hex) 244e - 246f 



Modbus format 

Depends on parameter, see 

respective parameter. 

Depends on parameter, see 

respective parameter. 

Example: 

Fig. 120 shows the third trip memory menu [830]: Over 

temperature trip occurred after 1396 hours and 13 minutes 

in Run time. 

Fig. 124 Trip 3 

11.8.2 Trip Messages [820] - [890] 

Same information as for menu [810]. 


Modbus Instance no/ 

DeviceNet no: 




Modbus format 

31151–31185 

31201–31235 

31251–31285 

31301–31335 

31351–31385 

31401–31435 

31451–31485 

31501–31535 

122/40–122/74 

122/90–122/124 

122/140–122/174 

122/190–122/224 

122/240–123/18 

123/35 - 123/68 

123/85–123/118 

123/135–123/168 

All nine alarm lists contain the same type of data. For 

example DeviceNet parameter 31101 in alarm list 1 

contains the same data information as 31151 in alarm list 2. 

11.8.3 Reset Trip Log [8A0] 

Resets the content of the 10 trip memories. 

Default: No 

No 0 

Yes 1 

830 Over temp 

Stp 1396h:13m 

1151 - 1185 

1201 - 1235 

1251 - 1285 

1301 - 1335 

1351 - 1385 

1401 - 1435 

1451 - 1485 

1501 - 1535 

See Trip 811 - 81O 

Trip log list 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

Trip log list 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

Trip log list 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

8A0 Reset Trip 

Stp No 


Communication information 11.9 System Data [900] 







NOTE: After the reset the setting goes automatically 

back to “NO”. The message “OK” is displayed for 2 sec. 

Main menu for viewing all the AC drive system data. 

11.9.1 VSD Data [920] 

VSD Type [921] 

Shows the AC drive type according to the type number. 

The options are indicated on the type plate of the AC drive. 

NOTE: If the control board is not configured, then type 

type shown is FDU40-XXX. 

921 FDU2.0 

Stp FDU48-046 

Example of type 








Examples: 

FDU48-046AC drive-series suited for 380-480 volt mains 

supply, and a rated output current of 46 A. 


Software [922] 

Shows the software version number of the AC drive. 

Fig. 125 gives an example of the version number. 

922 Software 

Stp V 4.32 - 03.07 

Fig. 125 Example of software version 

V 4.32 = Software version 

- 03.07 = option version, is only visible and valid for special 

software, type OEM adapted software. 

03 = (major) special software variant number 

07= (minor) revision of this special software 



31038 software version 

31039 option version 

Profibus slot/index 121/182-183 

EtherCAT index (hex) 240e, 240f 




Table 29 Information for Modbus and Profibus number, 

software version 

Bit Example Description 

7–0 32 minor 

13–8 4 major 

15–14 

release 

00: V, release version 

01: P, pre-release 

version 

10: �, Beta version 

11: �, Alpha version 

Table 30 Information for Modbus and Profibus number, 

option version 

Bit Example Description 

7–0 07 minor 

15–8 03 major 

NOTE: It is important that the software version displayed 

in menu [922] is the same software version number as 

the software version number written on the title page of 

this instruction manual. If not, the functionality as 

described in this manual may differ from the 

functionality of the AC drive. 

Unit name [923] 

Option to enter a name of the unit for service use or 

customer identity. The function enables the user to define a 

name with max 12 characters. Use the Prev and Next key to 

move the cursor to the required position. Then use the + 

and - keys to scroll in the character list. Confirm the 

character by moving the cursor to the next position by 

pressing the Next key. See section User-defined Unit [323]. 

Example 

Create user name USER 15. 

1. When in the menu [923] press Next to move the cursor 

to the right most position. 

2. Press the + key until the character U is displayed. 

3. Press Next. 

4. Then press the + key until S is displayed and confirm 

with Next. 

5. Repeat until you have entered USER15. 

923 USER 15 

Stp 

Default: No characters shown 



Profibus slot/index 165/225–236 

EtherCAT index (hex) 48fd - 4908 




When sending a unit name you send one character at a time 

starting at the right most position. 


12. Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 

12.1 Trips, warnings and limits 

In order to protect the AC drive the principal operating 

variables are continuously monitored by the system. If one 

of these variables exceeds the safety limit an error/warning 

message is displayed. In order to avoid any possibly 

dangerous situations, the inverter sets itself into a stop Mode 

called Trip and the cause of the trip is shown in the display. 

Trips will always stop the AC drive. Trips can be divided into 

normal and soft trips, depending on the setup Trip Type, see 

menu “[250] Autoreset”. Normal trips are default. For normal 

trips the AC drive stops immediately, i.e. the motor 

coasts naturally to a standstill. For soft trips the AC drive 

stops by ramping down the speed, i.e. the motor decelerates 

to a standstill. 

“Normal Trip” 

• The AC drive stops immediately, the motor coasts to 

naturally to a standstill. 

• The Trip relay or output is active (if selected). 

• The Trip LED is on. 

• The accompanying trip message is displayed. 

• The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of the 

display). 

• After reset command, the trip message will disappear and 

menu [100] will be indicated. 

“Soft Trip” 

• the AC drive stops by decelerating to a standstill. 

During the deceleration. 

• The accompanying trip message is displayed, including 

an additional soft trip indicator “S” before the trip time. 

• The Trip LED is flashing. 

• The Warning relay or output is active (if selected). 

After standstill is reached. 

• The Trip LED is on. 

• The Trip relay or output is active (if selected). 

• The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of the 

display). 

• After reset command, the trip message will disappear and 

menu [100] will be indicated. 

Apart from the TRIP indicators there are two more 

indicators to show that the inverter is in an “abnormal” 

situation. 

“Warning” 

• The inverter is close to a trip limit. 

• The Warning relay or output is active (if selected). 


• The accompanying warning message is displayed in 

window “[722] Warning”. 

• One of the warning indications is displayed (area F of 

the display). 

“Limits” 

• The inverter is limiting torque and/or frequency to avoid 

a trip. 

• The Limit relay or output is active (if selected). 


• One of the Limit status indications is displayed (area D 

of the display). 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 183

Table 31 List of trips and warnings 

Trip/Warning 

messages 

Selections 

Trip 

(Normal/ 

Soft) 

Motor I2 t Trip/Off/Limit Normal/Soft I 2 t 

PTC Trip/Off Normal/Soft 

Motor PTC On Normal 

PT100 Trip/Off Normal/Soft 

Motor lost Trip/Off Normal 

Locked rotor Trip/Off Normal 

Ext trip Via DigIn Normal/Soft 

Ext Mot Temp Via DigIn Normal/Soft 

Mon MaxAlarm Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft 

Mon MinAlarm Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft 

Comm error Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft 

Deviation Via Option Normal 

Encoder Trip/Off Normal 

Pump Via Option Normal 

Over temp On Normal OT 

Over curr F On Normal 

Over volt D On Normal 

Over volt G On Normal 

Over volt On Normal 

Under voltage On Normal LV 

LC Level 

Trip/Off/Warn 

Via DigIn 

Normal/Soft LCL 

Desat ### * On Normal 

DClink error On Normal 

Power Fault 

PF #### * 

On Normal 

Ovolt m cut On Normal 

Over voltage Warning VL 

Safe stop Warning SST 

Brake Trip/Off/Warn Normal 

OPTION On Normal 

*) Refer to table Table 32regarding which Desat or 

Power Fault is triggered. 

Warning 

indicators 

(Area D) 

12.2 Trip conditions, causes and 

remedial action 

The table later on in this section must be seen as a basic aid 

to find the cause of a system failure and to how to solve any 

problems that arise. An AC drive is mostly just a small part 

of a complete AC drive system. Sometimes it is 

difficult to determine the cause of the failure, although the 

AC drive gives a certain trip message it is not always easy to 

find the right cause of the failure. Good knowledge of the 

complete drive system is therefore 

necessary. Contact your supplier if you have any questions. 

The AC drive is designed in such a way that it tries to avoid 

trips by limiting torque, overvolt etc. 

Failures occurring during commissioning or shortly after 

commissioning are most likely to be caused by incorrect 

settings or even bad connections. 

Failures or problems occurring after a reasonable period of 

failure-free operation can be caused by changes in the system 

or in its environment (e.g. wear). 

Failures that occur regularly for no obvious reasons are 

generally caused by Electro Magnetic Interference. Be sure 

that the installation fulfils the demands for installation 

stipulated in the EMC directives. See chapter 8. page 55. 

Sometimes the so-called “Trial and error” method is a 

quicker way to determine the cause of the failure. This can 

be done at any level, from changing settings and functions to 

disconnecting single control cables or replacing entire drives. 

The Trip Log can be useful for determining whether certain 

trips occur at certain moments. The Trip Log also records 

the time of the trip in relation to the run time counter. 

WARNING! 

If it is necessary to open the AC drive or any 

part of the system (motor cable housing, 

conduits, electrical panels, cabinets, etc.) to 

inspect or take measure-ments as suggested in this 

instruction manual, it is absolutely necessary to read 

and follow the safety instructions in the manual. 

184 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

12.2.1 Technically qualified personnel 

Installation, commissioning, demounting, making measurements, 

etc., of or at the AC drive may only be carried out by 

personnel technically qualified for the task. 

12.2.2 Opening the AC drive 

The connections for the control signals and the switches are 

isolated from the mains voltage. Always take adequate 

precautions before opening the AC drive. 

12.2.3 Precautions to take with a 

connected motor 

If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the 

driven machine, the mains voltage must always first be 

disconnected from the AC drive. Wait at least 7 minutes 

before continuing. 

12.2.4 Autoreset Trip 

If the maximum number of Trips during Autoreset has been 

reached, the trip message hour counter is marked with an 

“A”. 

Fig. 126 Autoreset trip 

WARNING! 

Always switch the mains voltage off if it is 

necessary to open the AC drive and wait at 

least 7 minutes to allow the capacitors to 

discharge. 

WARNING! 

In case of malfunctioning always check the 

DC-link voltage, or wait one hour after the 

mains voltage has been switched off, before 

dismantling the AC drive for repair. 

830 OVERVOLT G 

Trp A 345:45:12 

Fig. 126 shows the 3rd trip memory menu [830]: 

Overvoltage G trip after the maximum Autoreset attempts 

took place after 345 hours, 45 minutes and 12 seconds of 

run time. 


Table 32 Trip condition, their possible causes and remedial action 

Trip condition Possible Cause Remedy Size** 

Motor I 2 t 

“I 2 t” 

PTC 

Motor PTC 

PT100 

Motor lost 

Locked rotor 

Ext trip 

Ext Mot Temp 

Mon MaxAlarm 

Mon MinAlarm 

I 2 t value is exceeded. 

- Overload on the motor according to the 

programmed I 2 t settings. 

Motor thermistor (PTC) exceeds maximum 

level. 

NOTE: Only valid if option board PTC/ 

PT100 is used. 

Motor thermistor (PTC) exceeds maximum 

level. 

NOTE: Only valid if [237] is enabled. 

Motor PT100 elements exceeds maximum 

level. 

NOTE: Only valid if option board PTC/ 

PT100 is used. 

Phase loss or too great imbalance on the 

motor phases 

Torque limit at motor standstill: 

- Mechanical blocking of the rotor. 

External input (DigIn 1-8) active: 

- active low function on the input. 



Max alarm level (overload) has been 

reached. 

Min alarm level (underload) has been 

reached. 

Comm error Error on serial communication (option) 

- Check on mechanical overload on the 

motor or the machinery (bearings, 

gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.) 

- Change the Motor I 2 t Current setting in 

menu group [230] 




- Check the motor cooling system. 

- Self-cooled motor at low speed, too high 

load. 

- Set PTC, menu [234] to OFF 






load. 

- Set PTC, menu [237] to OFF 






load. 

- Set PT100 to OFF, menu [234] 

- Check the motor voltage on all phases. 

- Check for loose or poor motor cable 

connections 

- If all connections are OK, contact your 

supplier 

- Set motor lost alarm to OFF. 

- Check for mechanical problems at the 

motor or the machinery connected to the 

motor 

- Set locked rotor alarm to OFF. 

- Check the equipment that initiates the 

external input 

- Check the programming of the digital 

inputs DigIn 1-8 

- Check the equipment that initiates the 


- Check the programming of the digital 

inputs DigIn 1-8 

- Check the load condition of the machine 

- Check the monitor setting in section 11.4.1, page 

128. 

- Check the load condition of the machine 

- Check the monitor setting in section 11.4.1, page 

128. 

- Check cables and connection of the 

serial communication. 

- Check all settings with regard to the 

serial communication 

- Restart the equipment including the 

AC drive 

186 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 

B,C,D



Deviation1 

Deviation2 

Encoder 

Pump 

Over temp 

Over curr F 

Over volt 

D(eceleration) 

Over volt 

G(eneration) 

CRANE board detecting deviation in motor 

operation. 

NOTE: Only used in Crane Control. 

Motor speed deviation in between reference 

and measured speed detected. 

NOTE: Only valid if option board Encoder is 

used. 

Lost encoder board, encoder cable or 

encoder pulses. 

NOTE: Only valid if option board Encoder is 

used. 

No master pump can be selected due to 

error in feedback signalling. 

NOTE: Only used in Pump Control. 

Heatsink temperature too high: 

- Too high ambient temperature of the 

AC drive 

- Insufficient cooling 

- Too high current 

- Blocked or stuffed fans 

Motor current exceeds the peak AC drive 

current: 

- Too short acceleration time. 

- Too high motor load 

- Excessive load change 

- Soft short-circuit between phases or 

phase to earth 

- Poor or loose motor cable connections 

- Too high IxR Compensation level 

Too high DC Link voltage: 

- Too short deceleration time with 

respect to motor/machine inertia. 

- Too small brake resistor malfunctioning 

Brake chopper 

Over volt (Mains) 

Too high DC Link voltage, due to too high 

O(ver) volt mains voltage 

M(ains) cut 

Under voltage 

LC Level 

Too low DC Link voltage: 

- Too low or no supply voltage 

- Mains voltage dip due to starting other 

major power consuming machines on 

the same line. 

Low liquid cooling level in external reservoir. 



NOTE: Only valid for AC drive types with Liquid 

Cooling option. 

- Check encoder signals 

- Check Deviation jumper on Crane option board. 

- Check the settings in menus [3AB] & [3AC] 

- Check motor operation. 

- Check speed deviation settings [22G#]. 

- Check speed PI controller settings [37#]. 

- Check torque limit setting [351] 

- Check encoder board. 

- Check encoder cable and signals. 

- Disable encoder, set menu [22B] to OFF. 

- Check cables and wiring for Pump feedback 

signals 

- Check settings with regard to the pump feedback 

digital inputs 

- Check the cooling of the AC drive cabinet. 

- Check the functionality of the built-in fans. The 

fans must switch on automatically if the heatsink 

temperature gets too high. At power up the fans 

are briefly switched on. 

- Check AC drive and motor rating 

- Clean fans 

- Check the acceleration time settings and 

make them longer if necessary. 

- Check the motor load. 

- Check on bad motor cable connections 

- Check on bad earth cable connection 

- Check on water or moisture in the motor housing 

and cable connections. 

- Lower the level of IxR Compensation [352] 

- Check the deceleration time settings and make 

them longer if necessary. 

- Check the dimensions of the brake resistor and 

the functionality of the Brake chopper (if used) 

- Check the main supply voltage 

- Try to take away the interference cause or use 

other main supply lines. 

- Make sure all three phases are properly connected 

and that the terminal screws are tightened. 

- Check that the mains supply voltage is within the 

limits of the AC drive. 

- Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused 

by other machinery 

- Use the function low voltage override [421] 

- Check liquid cooling 

- Check the equipment and wiring that initiates the 


- Check the programming of the digital inputs DigIn 

1-8 

OPTION If an Option specific trip occurs Check the description of the specific option 




Desat 

Desat U+ * 

Desat U- * 

Desat V+ * 

Desat V- * 

Desat W+ * 

Desat W- * 

Desat BCC * 

DC link error 

Power Fault 

Failure in output stage, 

- desaturation of IGBTs 

- Hard short circuit between phases or 

phase to earth 

- Earth fault 

- For size B - D also the Brake IGBT 

DC link voltage ripple exceeds maximum 

level 

One of the 10 PF (Power Fault) trips below 

has occured, but could not be determined. 

* = 2...6 Module number if parallel power units (size 300–1500 A) 

** = If no size is mentioned in this column, the information is valid for all sizes. 

- Check on bad motor cable connections 

- Check on bad earth cable connections 

- Check on water and moisture in the 

motor housing and cable connections 

- Check that the rating plate data of the motor is 

correctly entered. 

- Check the brake resistor, brake IGBT and wiring. 

- For size G and up, check the cables from the 

PEBBs to the motor, that all are in correct order in 

parallell connection 

- Make sure all three phases are properly connected 

and that the terminal screws are tightened. 

- Check that the mains supply voltage is within the 

limits of the AC drive. 

- Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused 

by other machinery. 

- Check the PF errors and try to determine the 

cause. The trip history can be helpful. 

188 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 

B - D 

E & Up 

PF Fan Err * Error in fan module 

- Check for clogged air inlet filters in panel door and 

E & Up 

blocking material in fan module. 

PF HCB Err* Error in controlled rectifier module (HCB) - Check mains supply voltage D & Up 

PF Curr Err * 

PF Overvolt * 

Error in current balancing: 

- between different modules. 

- between two phases within one module. 

Error in voltage balancing, overvoltage 

detected in one of the power modules 

(PEBB) 

- Check motor. 

- Check fuses and line connections 

- Check the individual motor current leads with an 

clamp on amp meter. 

- Check motor. 

- Check fuses and line connections. 

PF Comm Err * Internal communication error Contact service 

PF Int Temp * Internal temperature too high Check internal fans 

PF Temp Err * Malfunction in temperature sensor Contact service 

PF DC Err * DC-link error and mains supply fault 

PF Sup Err * Mains supply fault 

Brake 

Brake tripped on brake fault (not released) 

or Brake not engaged during stop. 

- Check mains supply voltage 


- Check mains supply voltage 


- Check Brake acknowledge signal wiring to selected 

digital input. 

- Check programming of digital input DigIn 1-8, 

[520]. 

- Check circuit breaker feeding mechanical brake 

circuit. 

- Check mechanical brake if acknowledge signal is 

wired from brake limit switch. 

- Check brake contactor. 

- Check settings [33C], [33D], [33E], [33F]. 

G& Up 

G& Up 

D & Up

12.3 Maintenance 

The AC drive is designed not to require any servicing or 

maintenance. There are however some things which must be 

checked regularly. 

All AC drives have built-in fan which is speed controlled 

using heatsink temperature feedback. This means that the 

fans are only running if the AC drive is running and loaded. 

The design of the heatsinks is such that the fan does not 

blow the cooling air through the interior of the AC drive, 

but only across the outer surface of the heatsink. However, 

running fans will always attract dust. Depending on the 

environment the fan and the heatsink will collect dust. 

Check this and clean the heatsink and the fans when 

necessary. 

If AC drives are built into cabinets, also check and clean the 

dust filters of the cabinets regularly. 

Check external wiring, connections and control signals. 

Tighten terminal screws if necessary. For more information 

on maintenance, please contact your CG Drives & Automation 

service partner. 


190 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

13. Options 

The standard options available are described here briefly. 

Some of the options have their own instruction or 

installation manual. For more information please contact 

your supplier. See also Emotron VFX/FDU 2.0 Technical 

catalogue for more info. 

13.1 Options for the control 

panel 

Part number Description 

01-3957-00 Panel kit complete including panel 

01-3957-01 Panel kit complete including blank panel 

Mounting cassette, blank panel and straight RS232-cable are 

available as options for the control panel. These options may 

be useful, for example for mounting a control panel in a 

cabinet door. 

Fig. 127 Control panel in mounting cassette 

13.2 Handheld 

Control Panel 2.0 


01-5039-00 

Handheld Control Panel 2.0 complete for 

FDU/VFX2.0 or CDU/CDX 2.0 

The Handheld Control Panel - HCP 2.0 is a complete 

control panel, easy to connect to the AC drive, for 

temporary use when e.g. commissioning, servicing and so 

on. 

The HCP has full functionality including memory. It is 

possible to set parameters, view signals, actual values, fault 

logger information and so on. It is also possible to use the 

memory to copy all data (such as parameter set data and 

motor data) from one AC drive to the HCP and then load 

this data to other AC drives 

13.3 EmoSoftCom 

EmoSoftCom is an optional software that runs on a personal 

computer. It can also be used to load parameter settings 

from the AC drive to the PC for backup and printing. 

Recording can be made in oscilloscope mode. Please contact 

CG Drives & Automation sales for further information. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Options 191

13.4 Brake chopper 

All AC drive sizes can be fitted with an optional built-in 

brake chopper. The brake resistor must be mounted outside 

the AC drive. The choice of the resistor depends on the 

application switch-on duration and duty-cycle. This option 

can not be after mounted. 

WARNING! 

The table gives the minimum values of the 

brake resistors. Do not use resistors lower 

than this value. The AC drive can trip or even 

be damaged due to high braking currents. 

The following formula can be used to define the power of 

the connected brake resistor: 

P resistor = 

Where: 

Presistor required power of brake 

resistor 

Brake level VDC DC brake voltage level (see Table 34) 

Rmin minimum allowable brake resistor 

(see Table 35, Table 36 and Table 37 

ED effective braking period. Defined as: 

ED = tbr 

120 [s] 

tbr Active braking time at nominal braking 

power during a 2 minute operation 

cycle. 

Maximum value of ED = 1, meaning continuous braking. 

Table 33 

(Brake level V DC ) 2 

R min 

x ED 

Supply voltage (VAC) (set in menu [21B] 

Brake level (VDC) 220–240 380 

380–415 660 

440–480 780 

500–525 860 

550–600 1000 

660–690 1150 

Table 34 Brake resistor FDU48 V types 

192 Options CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 

Type 

Rmin [ohm] if 

supply 380–415 

V AC 

Rmin [ohm] if 


V AC 

FDU48- 

003 

43 50 

-004 43 50 

-006 43 50 

-008 43 50 

-010 43 50 

-013 43 50 

-018 43 50 

-026 26 30 

-031 26 30 

-037 17 20 

-046 17 20 

-061 10 12 

-074 10 12 

-090 3.8 4.4 

-109 3.8 4.4 

-146 3.8 4.4 

-175 3.8 4.4 

-210 2.7 3.1 

-250 2.7 3.1 

-300 2 x 3.8 2 x 4.4 

-375 2 x 3.8 2 x 4.4 

-430 2 x 2.7 2 x 3.1 

-500 2 x 2.7 2 x 3.1 

-600 3 x 2.7 3 x 3.1 

-650 3 x 2.7 3 x 3.1 

-750 3 x 2.7 3 x 3.1 

-860 4 x 2.7 4 x 3.1 

-1K0 4 x 2.7 4 x 3.1 

-1K15 5 x 2.7 5 x 3.1 

-1K25 5 x 2.7 5 x 3.1 

-1K35 6 x 2.7 6 x 3.1 

-1K5 6 x 2.7 6 x 3.1 

-1K75 7 x 2.7 7 x 3.1 

-2K0 8 x 2.7 8 x 3.1 

-2K25 9 x 2.7 9 x 3.1 

-2K5 10 x 2.7 10 x 3.1


Type 

Rmin [ohm] if 


V AC 

Rmin [ohm] if 


V AC 

FDU52- 

003 

50 55 

-004 50 55 

-006 50 55 

-008 50 55 

-010 50 55 

-013 50 55 

-018 50 55 

-026 30 32 

-031 30 32 

-037 20 22 

-046 20 22 

-061 12 14 

-074 12 14 


Type 

Rmin [ohm] 

if supply 

500–525 

V AC 

Rmin [ohm] 

if supply 

550–600 

V AC 

Rmin [ohm] 

if supply 

660–690 

V AC 

FDU69- 

090 

4.9 5.7 6.5 

-109 4.9 5.7 6.5 

-146 4.9 5.7 6.5 

-175 4.9 5.7 6.5 

-200 4.9 5.7 6.5 

-250 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5 

-300 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5 

-375 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5 

-400 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5 

-430 3 x 4.9 3 x 5.7 3 x 6.5 

-500 3 x 4.9 3 x 5.7 3 x 6.5 

-595 3 x 4.9 3 x 5.7 3 x 6.5 

-650 4 x 4.9 4 x 5.7 4 x 6.5 

-720 4 x 4.9 4 x 5.7 4 x 6.5 

-800 4 x 4.9 4 x 5.7 4 x 6.5 

-905 5 x 4.9 5 x 5.7 5 x 6.5 

-995 5 x 4.9 5 x 5.7 5 x 6.5 

-1K2 6 x 4.9 6 x 5.7 6 x 6.5 

-1K4 7 x 4.9 7 x 5.7 7 x 6.5 

-1K6 8 x 4.9 8 x 5.7 8 x 6.5 

-1K8 9 x 4.9 9 x 5.7 9 x 6.5 

-2K0 10 x 4.9 10 x 5.7 10 x 6.5 

-2K2 11 x 4.9 11 x 5.7 11 x 6.5 

-2K4 12 x 4.9 12 x 5.7 12 x 6.5 

-2K6 13 x 4.9 13 x 5.7 13 x 6.5 

-2K8 14 x 4.9 14 x 5.7 14 x 6.5 

-3K0 15 x 4.9 15 x 5.7 15 x 6.5 

NOTE: Although the AC drive will detect a failure in the 

brake electronics, the use of resistors with a thermal 

overload which will cut off the power at overload is 

strongly recommended. 

The brake chopper option is built-in by the manufacturer 

and must be specified when the AC drive is ordered. 

13.5 I/O Board 


01-3876-01 I/O option board 2.0 

Each I/O option board 2.0 provides three extra relay outputs 

and three extra isolated digital inputs (24V). The I/O Board 

works in combination with the Pump/Fan Control, but can 

also be used as a separate option. Maximum 3 I/O boards 

possible. This option is described in a separate manual. 

13.6 Encoder 


01-3876-03 Encoder 2.0 option board 

The Encoder 2.0 option board, used for connection of 

feedback signal of the actual motor speed via an incremental 

encoder is described in a separate manual. 

For Emotron FDU this function is for speed read-out only 

or for spin start function. No speed control. 

13.7 PTC/PT100 


01-3876-08 PTC/PT100 2.0 option board 

The PTC/PT100 2.0 option board for connecting motor 

thermistors and max 3 PT100 elements to the AC drive is 

described in a separate manual. 


13.8 Serial communication 

and fieldbus 


From FDUsoftware 

version 

(see menu [922]) 

01-3876-04 RS232/485 4.0 

01-3876-05 Profibus DP 4.0 

01-3876-06 DeviceNet 4.0 

01-3876-09 

01-3876-10 

01-3876-11 

01-3876-12 

Modbus/TCP, Industrial 

Ethernet 

EtherCAT, Industrial 

Ethernet 

Profinet IO, one port 

Industrial Ethernet 

Profinet IO, two port 

Industrial Ethernet 

4.11 

4.32 

For communication with the AC drive there are several 

option boards for communication. There are different 

options for Fieldbus communication and one serial 

communication option with RS232 or RS485 interface 

which has galvanic isolation. 

13.9 Standby supply board 

option 


4.32 

4.32 

01-3954-00 Standby power supply kit for after mounting 

The standby supply board option provides the possibility of 

keeping the communication system up and running without 

having the 3-phase mains connected. One advantage is that 

the system can be set up without mains power. The option 

will also give backup for communication failure if main 

power is lost. 

The standby supply board option is supplied with external 

±10% 24 VDC protected by a 2 A slow acting fuse, from a 

double isolated transformer. The terminals X1:1, X1:2 (on 

size B,C and E to F) are voltage polarity independent. 

The terminals A- and B+ (on size D) are voltage polarity 

dependent. 

Fig. 128 Connection of standby supply option on size B,C and 

E-F 

X1 

terminal 

1 Ext. supply 1 

2 Ext. supply 2 

Name Function Specification 

External, AC drive 

main power independent, 

supply 

voltage for control 

and communication 

circuits 

Fig. 129 Connection of standby supply option on size D 

24 V DC ±10% 

Double isolated 

Terminal Name Function Specification 

A - 0V 

B + +24V 

External, AC drive 

main power 

independent, supply 

voltage for control and 

communication 

circuits 

24 V DC ±10% 

Double isolated 


Z3 

~ 

X1:1 Left terminal 

X1:2 Right terminal 

Connect the 

power supply 

board to the 

two blue 

terminals 

marked 

A- and B+ 

= 

0V to A- 

24V to B+

13.10 Safe Stop option 

To realize a Safe Stop configuration in accordance with Safe 

Torque Off (STO) EN-IEC 62061:2005 SIL 2 & EN-ISO 

13849-1:2006, the following three parts need to be attended 

to: 

1. Inhibit trigger signals with safety relay K1 (via Safe Stop 

option board). 

2. Enable input and control of AC drive (via normal I/O 

control signals of AC drive). 

3. Power conductor stage (checking status and feedback of 

driver circuits and IGBT’s). 

To enable the AC drive to operate and run the motor, the 

following signals should be active: 

• "Inhibit" input, terminals 1 (DC+) and 2 (DC-) on the 

Safe Stop option board should be made active by connecting 

24 VDC to secure the supply voltage for the 

driver circuits of the power conductors via safety relay 

K1. See also Fig. 132. 

• High signal on the digital input, e.g. terminal 10 in Fig. 

132, which is set to "Enable". For setting the digital 

input please refer to section 11.5.2, page 141. 

These two signals need to be combined and used to enable 

the output of the AC drive and make it possible to activate a 

Safe Stop condition. 

NOTE: The "Safe Stop" condition according to EN-IEC 

62061:2005 SIL 2 & EN-ISO 13849-1:2006, can only be 

realized by de-activating both the "Inhibit" and "Enable" 

inputs. 

When the "Safe Stop" condition is achieved by using these 

two different methods, which are independently controlled, 

this safety circuit ensures that the motor will not start 

running because: 

• The 24VDC signal is disconnected from the "Inhibit" 

input, terminals 1 and 2, the safety relay K1 is switched 

off. 

The supply voltage to the driver circuits of the power 

conductors is switched off. This will inhibit the trigger 

pulses to the power conductors. 

• The trigger pulses from the control board are shut down. 

The Enable signal is monitored by the controller circuit 

which will forward the information to the PWM part on 

the Control board. 

To make sure that the safety relay K1 has been switched off, 

this should be guarded externally to ensure that this relay did 

not refuse to act. The Safe Stop option board offers a 

feedback signal for this via a second forced switched safety 

relay K2 which is switched on when a detection circuit has 

confirmed that the supply voltage to the driver circuits is 

shut down. See Table 37 for the contacts connections. 

To monitor the "Enable" function, the selection "RUN" on 

a digital output can be used. For setting a digital output, e.g. 

terminal 20 in the example Fig. 132, please refer to section 

11.5.4, page 147 [540]. 

When the "Inhibit" input is de-activated, the AC drive 

display will show a flashing "SST" indication in section D 

(bottom left corner) and the red Trip LED on the Control 

panel will be flashing. 

To resume normal operation, the following steps have to be 

taken: 

• Release "Inhibit" input; 24VDC (High) to terminal 1 

and 2. 

• Give a STOP signal to the AC drive, according to the set 

Run/Stop Control in menu [215]. 

• Give a new Run command, according to the set Run/ 

Stop Control in menu [215]. 

NOTE: The method of generating a STOP command is 

dependent on the selections made in Start Signal Level/ 

Edge [21A] and the use of a separate Stop input via 

digital input. 

WARNING! 

The safe stop function can never be used for 

electrical maintenance. For electrical 

maintenance the AC drive should always be 

disconnected from the supply voltage. 

Fig. 130 Connection of safe stop option in size B - D. 

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Options 195 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1

Fig. 131 Connection of safe stop option in size E and up. 

NC 

Enable 

Stop 

Safe Stop 

K1 

Fig. 132 Safe Stop connection 

K2 

+24 V DC 

DigIn 

DigOut 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

+5V 

Controller 

PWM 

Table 37 Specification of Safe Stop option board 


X1 

pin 

Name Function Specification 

1 Inhibit + Inhibit driver circuits of 

2 Inhibit - power conductors 

3 

4 

NO contact 

relay K2 Feedback; confirmation 

P contact 

relay K2 

of activated inhibit 

5 GND Supply ground 

6 +24 VDC 

Power board 

Supply Voltage for operating 

Inhibit input only. 

DC 24 V 

(20–30 V) 

48 V DC / 

30 V AC /2 A 

+24 V DC , 

50 mA

13.11 Output chokes 

Output chokes, which are supplied separately, are 

recommended for lengths of screened motor cable longer 

than 100 m. Because of the fast switching of the motor 

voltage and the capacitance of the motor cable (both line to 

line and line to earth screen), large switching currents can be 

generated with long lengths of motor cable. Output chokes 

prevent the AC drive from tripping and should be installed 

as closely as possible to the AC drive. 

See also Emotron VFX/FDU 2.0 Technical catalogue for 

filter selection guide. 

13.12 Liquid cooling 

AC drive modules in frame sizes E - O and F69 - T69 are 

available in a liquid cooled version. These units are designed 

for connection to a liquid cooling system, normally a heat 

exchanger of liquid-liquid or liquid-air type. Heat exchanger 

is not part of the liquid cooling option. 

Drive units with parallel power modules (frame size 

G - T69) are delivered with a dividing unit for connection of 

the cooling liquid. The drive units are equipped with rubber 

hoses with leak-proof quick couplings. 

The Liquid cooling option is described in a separate manual. 

13.13 AFE - Active Front End 

Emotron AC Drives from CG Drives & Automation are also 

available as Low harmonic drives and Regenerative drives. 

You will find more information on www.emotron.com / 

www.cgglobal.com. 


198 Options CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

14. Technical Data 

14.1 Electrical specifications related to model 

Table 38 Typical motor power at mains voltage 400 V 

Model 

Max. output 

current [A]* 

Normal duty 

(120%, 1 min every 10 min) 

Power @400V 

[kW] 

Rated current 

[A] 

* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature. 

Heavy duty 

(150%, 1 min every 10 min) Frame size 

Power 

@400V 

[kW] 

Rated 

current 

[A] 

FDU48-003 3.0 0.75 2.5 0.55 2.0 

FDU48-004 4.8 1.5 4.0 1.1 3.2 

FDU48-006 7.2 2.2 6.0 1.5 4.8 

FDU48-008 9.0 3 7.5 2.2 6.0 

FDU48-010 11.4 4 9.5 3 7.6 

FDU48-013 15.6 5.5 13.0 4 10.4 

FDU48-018 21.6 7.5 18.0 5.5 14.4 

FDU48-026 31 11 26 7.5 21 

FDU48-031 37 15 31 11 25 

FDU48-037 44 18.5 37 15 29.6 

FDU48-046 55 22 46 18.5 37 

FDU48-061 73 30 61 22 49 

FDU48-074 89 37 74 30 59 

FDU48-090 108 45 90 37 72 

FDU48-109 131 55 109 45 87 

FDU48-146 175 75 146 55 117 

FDU48-175 210 90 175 75 140 

FDU48-210 252 110 210 90 168 

FDU48-228 300 110 228 90 182 

FDU48-250 300 132 250 110 200 

FDU48-300 360 160 300 132 240 

FDU48-375 450 200 375 160 300 

FDU48-430 516 220 430 200 344 

FDU48-500 600 250 500 220 400 

FDU48-600 720 315 600 250 480 

FDU48-650 780 355 650 315 520 

(Number of 

PEBB´s) 

FDU48-750 900 400 750 355 600 

FDU48-860 

FDU48-1K0 

1032 

1200 

450 

560 

860 

1000 

400 

450 

688 

800 

J(4) 

FDU48-1K15 

FDU48-1K25 

1380 

1500 

630 

710 

1150 

1250 

500 

560 

920 

1000 

KA(5) 

FDU48-1K35 

FDU48-1K5 

1620 

1800 

710 

800 

1350 

1500 

600 

630 

1080 

1200 

K(6) 

FDU48-1K75 2100 900 1750 800 1400 L(7) 

FDU48-2K0 2400 1120 2000 900 1600 M(8) 

FDU48-2K25 2700 1250 2250 1000 1800 N(9) 

FDU48-2K5 3000 1400 2500 1120 2000 O(10) 

Larger sizes available on request 

CG Drives & Automation 01-5325-01r1 Technical Data 199 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G(2) 

H(2) 

I(3)


Model 

Max. output 

current [A]* 

Normal duty 


Power @460V 

[hp] 

Rated current 

[A] 


Heavy duty 


Power @460V 

[hp] 

Rated current 

[A] 

FDU48-003 3.0 1 2.5 1 2.0 

FDU48-004 4.8 2 4.0 1.5 3.2 

FDU48-006 7.2 3 6.0 2 4.8 

FDU48-008 9.0 3 7.5 3 6.0 

FDU48-010 11.4 5 9.5 3 7.6 

FDU48-013 15.6 7.5 13.0 5 10.4 

FDU48-018 21.6 10 18.0 7.5 14.4 

FDU48-026 31 15 26 10 21 

FDU48-031 37 20 31 15 25 

FDU48-037 44 25 37 20 29.6 

FDU48-046 55 30 46 25 37 

FDU48-061 73 40 61 30 49 

FDU48-074 89 50 74 40 59 

FDU48-090 108 60 90 50 72 

FDU48-109 131 75 109 60 87 

FDU48-146 175 100 146 75 117 

FDU48-175 210 125 175 100 140 

FDU48-210 252 150 210 125 168 

FDU48-228 300 200 228 150 182 

FDU48-250 300 200 250 150 200 

FDU48-300 360 250 300 200 240 

FDU48-375 450 300 375 250 300 

FDU48-430 516 350 430 250 344 

FDU48-500 600 400 500 350 400 

FDU48-600 720 500 600 400 480 

FDU48-650 780 550 650 400 520 

Frame size 

(Number of 

PEBB´s) 

FDU48-750 900 600 750 500 600 

FDU48-860 

FDU48-1K0 

1032 

1200 

700 

800 

860 

1000 

550 

650 

688 

800 

J(4) 

FDU48-1K15 

FDU48-1K25 

1380 

1500 

900 

1000 

1150 

1250 

750 

800 

920 

1000 

KA(5) 

FDU48-1K35 

FDU48-1K5 

1620 

1800 

1100 

1250 

1350 

1500 

900 

1000 

1080 

1200 

K(6) 

FDU48-1K75 2100 1500 1750 1200 1400 L(7) 

FDU48-2K0 2400 1700 2000 1300 1600 M(8) 

FDU48-2K25 2700 1900 2250 1500 1800 N(9) 

FDU48-2K5 3000 2100 2500 1700 2000 O(10) 

Larger sizes available on request 

200 Technical Data CG Drives & Automation 01-5325-01r1 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G(2) 

H(2) 

I(3)


Model 

Max. output 

current [A]* 

Normal duty 


Power @525V 

[kW] 

Rated current 

[A] 


Heavy duty 


Power @525V 

[kW] 

Rated current 

[A] 

FDU52-003 3.0 1.1 2.5 1.1 2.0 

FDU52-004 4.8 2.2 4.0 1.5 3.2 

FDU52-006 7.2 3 6.0 2.2 4.8 

FDU52-008 9.0 4 7.5 3 6.0 

FDU52-010 11.4 5.5 9.5 4 7.6 

FDU52-013 15.6 7.5 13.0 5.5 10.4 

FDU52-018 21.6 11 18.0 7.5 14.4 

FDU52-026 31 15 26 11 21 

FDU52-031 37 18.5 31 15 25 

FDU52-037 44 22 37 18.5 29.6 

FDU52-046 55 30 46 22 37 

FDU52-061 73 37 61 30 49 

FDU52-074 89 45 74 37 59 

FDU69-090 108 55 90 45 72 

FDU69-109 131 75 109 55 87 

FDU69-146 175 90 146 75 117 

FDU69-175 210 110 175 90 140 

FDU69-200 240 132 200 110 160 

FDU69-250 300 160 250 132 200 

FDU69-300 360 200 300 160 240 

FDU69-375 450 250 375 200 300 

FDU69-400 480 250 400 220 320 

FDU69-430 516 300 430 250 344 

FDU69-500 600 315 500 300 400 

Frame size 

(Number of 

PEBB´s) 


B 

C 

D 

F69 

H69 (2) 

I69 (3) 

FDU69-595 720 400 600 315 480 

FDU69-650 780 450 650 355 520 

FDU69-720 864 500 720 400 576 

J69 (4) 

FDU69-800 960 560 800 450 640 

FDU69-995 1200 630 1000 500 800 KA69 (5) 

FDU69-1K2 1440 800 1200 630 960 K69 (6) 

FDU69-1K4 1680 1000 1400 800 1120 L69 (7) 

FDU69-1K6 1920 1100 1600 900 1280 M69 (8) 

FDU69-1K8 2160 1300 1800 1000 1440 N69 (9) 

FDU69-2K0 2400 1400 2000 1100 1600 O69 (10) 

FDU69-2K2 2640 1600 2200 1200 1760 P69 (11) 

FDU69-2K4 2880 1700 2400 1400 1920 Q69 (12) 

FDU69-2K6 3120 1900 2600 1500 2080 R69 (13) 

FDU69-2K8 3360 2000 2800 1600 2240 S69 (14) 

FDU69-3K0 3600 2200 3000 1700 2400 T69 (15)


Model 

Max. 

output 

current 

[A]* 

Normal duty 


Power @575V 

[hp] 

Rated current 

[A] 


Heavy duty 


Power @575V 

[hp] 

Rated current 

[A] 

FDU69-090 108 75 90 60 72 

FDU69-109 131 100 109 75 87 

FDU69-146 175 125 146 100 117 

FDU69-175 210 150 175 125 140 

FDU69-200 240 200 200 150 160 

FDU69-250 300 250 250 200 200 

FDU69-300 360 300 300 250 240 

FDU69-375 450 350 375 300 300 

FDU69-400 480 400 400 300 320 

FDU69-430 516 400 430 350 344 

FDU69-500 600 500 500 400 400 

FDU69-595 720 600 600 500 480 

FDU69-650 780 650 650 550 520 

FDU69-720 864 750 720 600 576 

Frame size 

(Number of 

PEBB´s) 


F69 

H69 (2) 

I69 (3) 

J69 (4) 

FDU69-800 960 850 800 650 640 

FDU69-905 

FDU69-995 

1080 

1200 

950 

1000 

900 

1000 

750 

850 

720 

800 

KA69 (5) 

FDU69-1K2 1440 1200 1200 1000 960 K69 (6) 

FDU69-1K4 1680 1500 1400 1200 1120 L69 (7) 

FDU69-1K6 1920 1700 1600 1300 1280 M69 (8) 

FDU69-1K8 2160 1900 1800 1500 1440 N69 (9) 

FDU69-2K0 2400 2100 2000 1700 1600 O69 (10) 

FDU69-2K2 2640 2300 2200 1800 1760 P69 (11) 

FDU69-2K4 2880 2500 2400 2000 1920 Q69 (12) 

FDU69-2K6 3120 2700 2600 2200 2080 R69 (13) 

FDU69-2K8 3360 3000 2800 2400 2240 S69 (14) 

FDU69-3K0 3600 3200 3000 2500 2400 T69 (15)


Model 

Max. output 

current [A]* 

Normal duty 


Power @690V 

[kW] 

Rated current 

[A] 


Heavy duty 


Power @690V 

[kW] 

Rated current 

[A] 

FDU69-090 108 90 90 75 72 

FDU69-109 131 110 109 90 87 

FDU69-146 175 132 146 110 117 

FDU69-175 210 160 175 132 140 

FDU69-200 240 200 200 160 160 

FDU69-250 300 250 250 200 200 

FDU69-300 360 315 300 250 240 

FDU69-375 450 355 375 315 300 

FDU69-400 480 400 400 315 320 

FDU69-430 516 450 430 315 344 

FDU69-500 600 500 500 355 400 

FDU69-595 720 600 600 450 480 

FDU69-650 780 630 650 500 520 

FDU69-720 864 710 720 560 576 

Frame size 

(Number of 

PEBB´s) 


F69 

H69 (2) 

I69 (3) 

J69 (4) 

FDU69-800 960 800 800 630 640 

FDU69-905 

FDU69-995 

1080 

1200 

900 

1000 

900 

1000 

710 

800 

720 

800 

KA69 (5) 

FDU69-1K2 1440 1200 1200 900 960 K69 (6) 

FDU69-1K4 1680 1400 1400 1120 1120 L69 (7) 

FDU69-1K6 1920 1600 1600 1250 1280 M69 (8) 

FDU69-1K8 2160 1800 1800 1400 1440 N69 (9) 

FDU69-2K0 2400 2000 2000 1600 1600 O69 (10) 

FDU69-2K2 2640 2200 2200 1700 1760 P69 (11) 

FDU69-2K4 2880 2400 2400 1900 1920 Q69 (12) 

FDU69-2K6 3120 2600 2600 2000 2080 R69 (13) 

FDU69-2K8 3360 2800 2800 2200 2240 S69 (14) 

FDU69-3K0 3600 3000 3000 2400 2400 T69 (15)

14.2 General electrical specifications 

Table 43 General electrical specifications 

General 

Mains voltage:FDU48 

FDU52 

FDU69 

Mains frequency: 

Input power factor: 

Output voltage: 

Output frequency: 

Output switching frequency: 

Efficiency at nominal load: 

Control signal inputs: 

Analogue (differential) 

Analogue Voltage/current: 

Max. input voltage: 

Input impedance: 

Resolution: 

Hardware accuracy: 

Non-linearity 

Digital: 

Input voltage: 

Max. input voltage: 

Input impedance: 

Signal delay: 

Control signal outputs 

Analogue 

Output voltage/current: 

Max. output voltage: 

Short-circuit current (�): 

Output impedance: 

Resolution: 

Maximum load impedance for current 

Hardware accuracy: 

Offset: 

Non-linearity: 

Digital 

Output voltage: 

Shortcircuit current(�): 

Relays 

230-480V +10%/-15% (-10% at 230 V) 

440-525 V +10 %/-15 % 

500-690V +10%/-15% 

45 to 65 Hz 

0.95 

0–Mains supply voltage: 

0–400 Hz 

3 kHz (adjustable 1,5-6 kHz) 

97% for models 003 to 018 

98% for models 026 to 3K0 

0-±10 V/0-20 mA via switch 

+30 V/30 mA 

20 k��(voltage) 

250 ��(current) 

11 bits + sign 

1% type + 1 ½ LSB fsd 

1½ LSB 

High: >9 VDC, Low: 23 VDC open 

Low:

14.3 Operation at higher 

temperatures 

Most Emotron AC drives are made for operation at 

maximum of 40°C ambient temperature. However, for most 

models, it is possible to use the AC drive at higher 

temperatures with little loss in performance. Table 44 shows 

ambient temperatures as well as derating for higher 

temperatures. 

Table 44 Ambient temperature and derating 400–690 V types 

Model 

Example 

In this example we have a motor with the following data that 

we want to run at the ambient temperature of 45°C: 

Voltage400 V 

Current68 A 

Power37 kW 

Select AC drive 

The ambient temperature is 5 °C higher than the maximum 

ambient temperature. The following calculation is made to 

select the correct AC drive model. 

Derating is possible with loss in performance of 2.5%/°C. 

Derating will be: 5 X 2.5% = 12.5% 

Calculation for model FDU48-074 

74 A - (12.5% x 74) = 64.8 A; this is not enough. 

Calculation for model FDU48-090 

90 A - (12.5% x 90) = 78.8A 

In this example we select the FDU48-090. 

IP20 IP54 

Max temp. Derating: possible Max temp. Derating: possible 

FDU**-003 to FDU**-074 – – 40°C -2.5%/°C to max +10°C 

FDU48-090 to FDU48-250 

FDU69-090 to FDU69-200 

FDU48-300 to FDU48-2K5 

FDU69-250 to FDU69-3K0 

– – 40°C -2.5%/°C to max +5°C 

40°C -2.5%/°C to max +5°C 40°C -2.5%/°C to max +5°C 

14.4 Operation at higher 

switching frequency 

Table 45 shows the switching frequency for the different AC 

drive models. With the possibility of running at higher 

switching frequency you can reduce the noise level from the 

motor. The switching frequency is set in menu [22A], 

Motor sound, see section section 11.2.3, page 72. At 

switching frequencies >3 kHz derating might be needed. 

Table 45 Switching frequency 

Models 

Standard 

Switching 

frequency 

Range 

FDU**-003 to FDU**-3K0 3 kHz 1.5–6 kHz 

CG Drives & Automation 01-5325-01r1 Technical Data 205

14.5 Dimensions and Weights 

The table below gives an overview of the dimensions and 

weights. The models 003 to 250 is available in IP54 as wall 

mounted modules. 

The models 300 to 3K0 consist of 2, 3, 4 .... 15 paralleled 

power electronic building block (PEBB) available in IP20 as 

wall mounted modules and in IP54 mounted standard 

cabinet. 

Protection class IP54 is according to the EN 60529 

standard. 

Table 46 Mechanical specifications, FDU48, FDU52 

Models Frame size 

Dim. H x W x D [mm] 

IP20 


IP54 

Weight 

IP20 [kg] 

Weight IP54 

[kg] 

003 to 018 B – 350(416)x 203 x 200 – 12.5 

026 to 046 C – 440(512)x178x292 – 24 

061 to 074 D – 545(590) x 220 x 295 – 32 

90 to 109 E – 950 x 285 x 314 – 56 

146 to 175 E – 950 x 285 x 314 – 60 

210 to 250 F – 950 x 345 x 314 – 74 

300 to 375 G (2xE) 1036 x 500 x 390 2250 x 600 x 600 140 350 

430 to 500 H (2xF) 1036 x 500 x 450 2250 x 600 x 600 170 380 

600 to 750 I (3xF) 1036 x 730 x 450 2250x 900 x 600 248 506 

860 to 1K0 J (2xH) 1036 x 1100 x 450 2250 x 1200 x 600 340 697 

1K15 to 1K25 KA (H+I) 1036 x 1365 x 450 2250 x 1500 x 600 418 838 

1K35 to 1K5 K (2xI) 1036 x 1630 x 450 2250 x 1800 x 600 496 987 

1K75 L (2xH+I) 1036 x 2000 x 450 2250 x 2100 x 600 588 1190 

2K0 M(H+2xI) 1036 x 2230 x 450 2250 x 2400 x 600 666 1323 

2K25 N (3xI) 1036 x 2530 x 450 2250 x 2700 x 600 744 1518 

2K5 O (2xH+2xI) 1036 x 2830 x 450 2250 x 3000 x 600 836 1772 

Table 47 Mechanical specifications, FDU69 

Models Frame size 


IP20 


IP54 

Weight 

IP20 [kg] 

Weight IP54 

[kg] 

90 to 200 F69 – 1090 x 345 x 314 – 77 

250 to 375 H69 (2xF69) 1176 x 500 x 450 2250 x 600 x 600 176 399 

430 to 595 I69 (3xF69) 1176 x 730 x 450 2250 x 900 x 600 257 563 

650 to 800 J69 (2xH69) 1176 x 1100 x 450 2250 x 1200 x 600 352 773 

905 to 995 KA69 (H69+I69) 1176 x 1365 x 450 2250 x 1500 x 600 433 937 

750 to 1K2 K69 (2xI69) 1176 x 1630 x 450 2250 x 1800 x 600 514 1100 

1K4 L69 (2xH69+I69) 1176 x 2000 x 450 2250 x 2100 x 600 609 1311 

1K6 M69 (H69+2xI69) 1176 x 2230 x 450 2250 x 2400 x 600 690 1481 

1K8 N69 (3xI69) 1176 x 2530 x 450 2250 x 2700 x 600 771 1651 

2K0 

O69 

(2xH69+2xI69) 

1176 x 2830 x 450 2250 x 3000 x 600 866 1849 

2K2 P69 (H69+3xI69) 1176 x 3130 x 450 2250 x 3300 x 600 947 2050 

2K4 Q69 (4xI69) 1176 x 3430 x 450 2250 x 3600 x 600 1028 2214 

2K6 

R69 

(2xH69+3xI69) 

1176 x 3730 x 450 2250 x 3900 x 600 1123 2423 

2K8 S69 (H69+4xI69) 1176 x 4030 x 450 2250 x 4200 x 600 1204 2613 

3K0 T69 (5xI69) 1176 x 4330 x 450 2250 x 4500 x 600 1285 2777 

206 Technical Data CG Drives & Automation 01-5325-01r1

14.6 Environmental conditions 

Table 48 Operation 

Parameter Normal operation 

Nominal ambient temperature 0�C–40�C See table, see Table 44 for different conditions 

Atmospheric pressure 86–106 kPa 

Relative humidity, non-condensing 0–90% 

Contamination, 

according to IEC 60721-3-3 

Table 49 Storage 

Vibrations 

Altitude 

No electrically conductive dust allowed. Cooling air must be clean and free from corrosive 

materials. Chemical gases, class 3C2. Solid particles, class 3S2. 

According to IEC 600068-2-6, Sinusodial vibrations: 

10

14.7 Fuses, cable crosssections 

and glands 

14.7.1 According to IEC ratings 

Use mains fuses of the type gL/gG conforming to IEC 269 

or installation cut-outs with similar characteristics. Check 

the equipment first before installing the glands. 

Max. Fuse = maximum fuse value that still protects the AC 

drive and upholds warranty. 

Table 50 Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands 

Model 

FDU**- 

003 

FDU**- 

004 

FDU**- 

006 

FDU**- 

008 

FDU**- 

010 

FDU**- 

013 

FDU**- 

018 

FDU**- 

026 

FDU**- 

031 

FDU**- 

037 

FDU**- 

046 

FDU**- 

061 

FDU**- 

074 

FDU**- 

090 

FDU**- 

109 

FDU**- 

146 

FDU**- 

175 

Nominal 

input 

current 

[A] 

2.2 

3.5 

5.2 

6.9 

8.7 

11.3 

15.6 

Maximu 

m value 

fuse [A] 

4 

4 

6 

10 

10 

16 

20 

22 25 

26 35 

31 35 

38 50 

52 63 

65 80 

78 100 

94 100 

126 160 

152 160 

NOTE: The dimensions of fuse and cable cross-section 

are dependent on the application and must be 

determined in accordance with local regulations. 

NOTE: The dimensions of the power terminals used in the 

models 300 to3K00 can differ depending on customer 

specification. 

Cable cross section connector range [mm 2 ] for 

mains/ motor Brake PE 

0.5–10 0.5–10 1.5–16 

2.5 - 16 stranded wire 

2.5 - 25 solid wire 

1 - 35 stranded wire 

1 - 50 solid wire 

16 - 95 16 - 95 

35 - 150 16 - 95 

Cable glands (clamping 

range [mm]) 

mains / 

motor 

M32 opening 

M20 + 

reducer (6– 

12) 

M32 (12– 

20)/M32 

opening 

M25+reduc 

er (10-14) 

M32 (16– 

25)/M32 

(13–18) 


6 - 35 

16-95 

(16-70)¹ 

35-150 

(16-70)¹ 

M32 (15– 

21) 

M40 (19– 

28) 

M50 (27 - 

35) 

FDU48: Ø17- 

42 cable 

flexible 

leadthrough 

or M50 

opening. 

FDU69: 

Ø23-55 

Cable flexible 

leadthrough 

or M63 

opening. 

Brake 

M25 opening 

M20 + 

reducer (6– 

12) 

M25 (10– 

14) 

M25 

M32 

M40 (19 - 

28) 

FDU48: 

Ø11-32 


leadthrough 

or M40 

opening. 

FDU69: 

Ø17-42 


leadthrough 

or M50 

opening.

Table 50 Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands 

Model 

FDU**- 

210 

FDU**- 

228 

FDU**- 

250 

FDU**- 

300 

FDU**- 

375 

FDU**- 

430 

FDU**- 

500 

FDU**- 

600 

FDU**- 

650 

FDU**- 

720, 750 

FDU**- 

860 

FDU**- 

900 

FDU**- 

1K0 

FDU**- 

1K2 

FDU**- 

1K5 

Nominal 

input 

current 

[A] 

Maximu 

m value 

fuse [A] 

182 200 

216 250 

260 300 

324 355 

372 400 

432 500 

520 630 

562 630 

648 710 

744 800 

795 900 

864 1000 

1037 1250 

1296 1500 

FDU48: 35-250 

FDU69: 35-150 

Note: For models 003 to 074 cable glands are optional. 

1. Values are valid when brake chopper electronics are built 

in. 

Cable cross section connector range [mm 2 ] for 

mains/ motor Brake PE 

FDU48: 35- 

150 

FDU69: 16- 

95 

FDU48: (2x)35-240 

FDU69: (2x)35-150 

FDU48: (2x)35-240 

FDU69: (3x)35-150 

FDU48: (3x)35-240 

FDU69: (4x)35-150 

FDU48: (3x)35-240 

FDU69: (4x)35-150 

FDU48: 35- 

250 

(95-185)¹ 

FDU69: 35- 

150 

(16-70)¹ 

Cable glands (clamping 

range [mm]) 

mains / 

motor 

Ø23-55 

cable flexible 

leadthrough 

or M63 

opening. 

Brake 

Ø17-42 

cable flexible 

leadthrough 

or M50 

opening. 

frame --- -- 

frame -- -- 

frame -- -- 

frame -- -- 

FDU48: (4x)35-240 frame -- -- 

FDU48: (6x)35-240 frame -- -- 


14.7.2 Fuses and cable dimensions 

according to NEMA ratings 

Table 51 Types and fuses 

Model 

Input 

current 

[Arms] 

UL 

Class J TD 

(A) 

Mains input fuses 

Ferraz-Shawmut 

type 

FDU48-003 2,2 6 AJT6 

FDU48-004 3,5 6 AJT6 

FDU48-006 5,2 6 AJT6 

FDU48-008 6,9 10 AJT10 

FDU48-010 8,7 10 AJT10 

FDU48-013 11,3 15 AJT15 

FDU48-018 15,6 20 AJT20 

FDU48-026 22 25 AJT25 

FDU48-031 26 30 AJT30 

FDU48-037 31 35 AJT35 

FDU48-046 38 45 AJT45 

FDU48-061 52 60 AJT60 

FDU48-074 65 80 AJT80 

FDU48-090 78 100 AJT100 

FDU48-109 94 110 AJT110 

FDU48-146 126 150 AJT150 

FDU48-175 152 175 AJT175 

FDU48-210 182 200 AJT200 

FDU48-228 216 250 AJT250 

FDU48-250 216 250 AJT250 

FDU48-300 260 300 AJT300 

FDU48-375 324 350 AJT350 

FDU48-430 372 400 AJT400 

FDU48-500 432 500 AJT500 

FDU48-600 520 600 AJT600 

FDU48-650 562 600 AJT600 

FDU48-750 648 700 A4BQ700 

FDU48-860 744 800 A4BQ800 

FDU48-1K0 864 1000 A4BQ1000 

FDU48-1K25 1037 1200 A4BQ1200 

FDU48-1K5 1296 1500 A4BQ1500 


Table 52 Type cables cross-sections and glands 

Model 

1. Values are valid when brake chopper electronics are built 

in. 

2. AWG 2 - AWG 3/0 = 14 Nm / 124 Lb-In 

AWG 4/0 - 300kcmil = 24 Nm / 212 Lb-In 

Cable cross section connector 

Mains and motor Brake PE 

Range 

Tightening 

torque 

Nm/Lb-In 

Range 

Tightening 

torque 

Nm/Lb-In 

14 / 124 - 

24 / 212 2 AWG 2- AWG 3/0 14 / 124 

Range 

Tightening 

torque 

Nm/Lb-In 

FDU48-003 

FDU48-004 

AWG 20 - AWG 6 



FDU48-006 

FDU48-008 


1.3 / 11.5 


1.3 / 11.5 


2.6/23 

FDU48-010 AWG 14 - AWG 6 AWG 14 - AWG 6 AWG 14 - AWG 6 

FDU48-013 AWG 12 - AWG 6 AWG 12 - AWG 6 AWG 12 - AWG 6 

FDU48-018 

FDU48-026 

AWG 10 - AWG 6 AWG 10 - AWG 6 AWG 10 - AWG 6 

FDU48-031 

FDU48-037 

AWG 8 - AWG 6 

1.3 / 11.5 

AWG 8 - AWG 6 

1.3 / 11.5 

AWG 8 - AWG 6 

2.6/23 

FDU48-046 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG 6 

FDU48-061 AWG 4 1.6/14 AWG 4 1.6/14 AWG 4 1.6/14 

FDU48-074 AWG 3 2.8/25 AWG 3 2.8/25 AWG 3 2.8/25 

FDU48-090 

FDU48-109 

AWG 2- 300 kcmil 

AWG 1/0- 300 

kcmil 

AWG 2- 300 kcmil 

AWG 1/0- 300 

kcmil 

14 / 124 

(10 / 88)¹ 

FDU48-146 

FDU48-175 

AWG 3/0 - 300 

kcmil 

AWG 4/0 - 300 

kcmil 

AWG 3/0 - 300 

kcmil 14 / 124 

AWG 4/0 - 300 

kcmil 

(10 / 88)¹ 

FDU48-210 

300 kcmil 

300 kcmil 24 / 212 

FDU48-228 

24 / 212 300 kcmil 24 / 212 

(10 / 88)¹ 

FDU48-250 400 kcmil 400 kcmil 

FDU48-300 

2 x AWG 3/0 - 

2 x 300 kcmil 

FDU48-375 

2 x 250 kcmil - 

2 x 300 kcmil 

FDU48-430 2 x 300 kcmil 

24 / 212 

2 x AWG 3/0 - 

2 x 300 kcmil 

2 x 250 kcmil - 

2 x 300 kcmil 

2 x 300 kcmil 

FDU48-500 2 x 400 kcmil 

24 / 212 

2 x 400 kcmil 

FDU48-600 

FDU48-650 

3x 300 kcmil 

24 / 212 

3x 300 kcmil 

FDU48-750 3x 400 kcmil 3x 400 kcmil 

FDU48-860 

FDU48-1k0 

4 x 300 kcmil 

4 x 400 kcmil 

24 / 212 

4 x 300 kcmil 

4 x 400 kcmil 

FDU48- 

1k25 

5 x 300 kcmil 

24 / 212 

5 x 300 kcmil 

FDU48-1k5 6 x 400 kcmil 6 x 400 kcmil 

24 / 212 frame - 

24 / 212 frame - 

24 / 212 frame - 

24 / 212 frame - 

24 / 212 frame - 

Cable type 

Copper (Cu) 

75°C 


14.8 Control signals 

Table 53 

Terminal X1 Name: Function (Default): Signal: Type: 

1 +10 V +10 VDC Supply voltage +10 VDC, max 10 mA output 

2 AnIn1 Process reference 

3 AnIn2 Off 

4 AnIn3 Off 

0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA 

bipolar: -10 - +10 VDC or -20 - +20 mA 

0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA 


0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA 


analogue input 



5 AnIn4 Off 

0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA 



6 -10 V -10VDC Supply voltage -10 VDC, max 10 mA output 

7 Common Signal ground 0V output 

8 DigIn 1 RunL 0-8/24 VDC digital input 

9 DigIn 2 RunR 0-8/24 VDC digital input 

10 DigIn 3 Off 0-8/24 VDC digital input 

11 +24 V +24VDC Supply voltage +24 VDC, 100 mA output 

12 Common Signal ground 0 V output 

13 AnOut 1 Min speed to max speed 0 ±10 VDC or 0/4– +20 mA analogue output 

14 AnOut 2 0 to max torque 0 ±10 VDC or 0/4– +20 mA analogue output 

15 Common Signal ground 0 V output 





20 DigOut 1 Ready 24 VDC, 100 mA digital output 

21 DigOut 2 No trip 24 VDC, 100 mA digital output 

22 DigIn 8 RESET 0-8/24 VDC digital input 

Terminal X2 

31 N/C 1 Relay 1 output 

32 COM 1 

Trip, active when the 

AC drive is in a TRIP condition 

N/C is opened when the relay is active 

33 N/O 1 

(valid for all relays) 

N/O is closed when the relay is active 

(valid for all relays) 

41 N/C 2 

42 COM 2 

43 N/O 2 

Terminal X3 

Relay 2 Output 

Run, active when the 

AC drive is started 

51 COM 3 Relay 3 Output 

52 N/O 3 

Off 

potential free change over 

0.1 – 2 A/U max 250 VAC or 42 VDC 





relay output 

relay output 

relay output 


15. Menu List 

On our home page in the download area, you could find a 

"Communication information" list and a list to note Parameter 

set information . 

Factory setting Customer Page 

100 Preferred View 67 

110 1st Line Process Val 

120 2nd Line Current 

200 Main Setup 

210 Operation 68 

211 Language English 

212 Select Motor M1 

213 Drive Mode V/Hz 

214 Ref Control Remote 

215 Run/Stp Ctrl Remote 

216 Reset Ctrl Remote 

217 Local/Rem 

2171 LocRefCtrl Standard 

2172 LocRunCtrl Standard 

218 Lock Code? 0 

219 Rotation R+L 

21A Level/Edge Level 

21B Supply Volts Not Defined 

220 Motor Data 73 

221 Motor Volts UNOM V 

222 Motor Freq 50Hz 

223 Motor Power (PNOM) W 

224 Motor Curr (IMOT) A 

225 Motor Speed (nMOT) rpm 

226 Motor Poles 4 

227 Motor Cos� CosφNOM 228 Motor Vent Self 

229 Motor ID-Run Off 

22A Motor Sound F 

22B Encoder Off 

22C Enc Pulses 1024 

22D Enc Speed 0rpm 

22E Motor PWM 

22E1 PWM Fswitch 3.00 kHz 

22E2 PWM Mode Standard 

22E3 PWM Random Off 

22F Enc Puls Ctr 0 

230 Mot Protect 79 

231 Mot I 2 t Type Trip 

232 Mot I 2 t Curr 100% 

233 Mot I 2 t Time 60s 

234 Thermal Prot Off 

235 Motor Class F 140�C 

236 PT100 Inputs PT100 1+2+3 

237 Motor PTC Off 

240 Set Handling 83 

241 Select Set A 

242 Copy Set A>B 

243 Default>Set A 

244 Copy to CP No Copy 

245 Load from CP No Copy 

250 Autoreset 85 

251 No of Trips 0 


252 Overtemp Off 

253 Overvolt D Off 

254 Overvolt G Off 

255 Overvolt Off 

256 Motor Lost Off 

257 Locked Rotor Off 

258 Power Fault Off 

259 Undervoltage Off 

25A Motor I 2 t Off 

25B Motor I 2 t TT Trip 

25C PT100 Off 

25D PT100 TT Trip 

25E PTC Off 

25F PTC TT Trip 

25G Ext Trip Off 

25H Ext Trip TT Trip 

25I Com Error Off 

25J Com Error TT Trip 

25K Min Alarm Off 

25L Min Alarm TT Trip 

25M Max Alarm Off 

25N Max Alarm TT Trip 

25O Over curr F Off 

25P Pump Off 

25Q Over speed Off 

25R Ext Mot Temp Off 

25S Ext Mot TT Trip 

25T LC Level Off 

25U LC Level TT Trip 

25V 

25W 

25X 

Brk Fault Off 

260 Serial Com 93 

261 Com Type RS232/485 

262 RS232/485 93 

2621 Baudrate 9600 

2622 Address 1 

263 Fieldbus 94 

2631 Address 62 

2632 PrData Mode Basic 

2633 Read/Write RW 

2634 AddPrValue 0 

264 Comm Fault 95 

2641 ComFlt Mode Off 

2642 ComFlt Time 0.5 s 

265 Ethernet 96 

2651 IP Address 0.0.0.0 

2652 MAC Address 000000000000 

2653 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 

2654 Gateway 0.0.0.0 

2655 DHCP Off 

266 FB Signal 97 

2661 FB Signal 1 0 






CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1 Menu List 213





266A FB Signal 10 0 

266B FB Signal 11 0 

266C FB Signal 12 0 

266D FB Signal 13 0 

266E FB Signal 14 0 

266F FB Signal 15 0 

266G FB Signal 16 0 

269 FB Status 

300 Process 97 

310 Set/View ref 0rpm 

320 Proc Setting 98 

321 Proc Source Speed 

322 Proc Unit rpm 

323 User Unit 0 

324 Process Min 0 

325 Process Max 0 

326 Ratio Linear 

327 F(Val) PrMin Min 

328 F(Val) PrMax Max 

330 Start/Stop 102 

331 Acc Time 10.00s 

332 Dec Time 10.00s 

333 Acc MotPot 16.00s 

334 Dec MotPot 16.00s 

335 Acc>Min Spd 10.00s 

336 Dec


4161 MaxAlarmMar 15% 

4162 MaxAlarmDel 0.1s 

417 Max Pre alarm 

4171 MaxPreAlMar 10% 

4172 MaxPreAlDel 0.1s 

418 Min Pre Alarm 

4181 MinPreAlMar 10% 

4182 MinPreAlDel 0.1s 

419 Min Alarm 

4191 MinAlarmMar 15% 

4192 MinAlarmDel 0.1s 

41A Autoset Alrm No 

41B Normal Load 100% 

41C Load Curve 

41C1 Load Curve 1 100% 









420 Process Prot 133 

421 Low Volt OR On 

422 Rotor Locked Off 

423 Motor lost Off 

424 Overvolt Ctrl On 

500 I/Os 134 

510 An Inputs 

511 AnIn1 Fc Process Ref 

512 AnIn1 Setup 4-20mA 

513 AnIn1 Advn 

5131 AnIn1 Min 4mA 

5132 AnIn1 Max 10.00V/20.00mA 

5133 AnIn1 Bipol 10.00V/20.00mA 

5134 AnIn1 FcMin Min 

5135 AnIn1 ValMin 0 

5136 AnIn1 FcMax Max 

5137 AnIn1 ValMax 0 

5138 AnIn1 Oper Add+ 

5139 AnIn1 Filt 0.1s 

513A AnIn1 Enabl On 

514 AnIn2 Fc Off 139 


516 AnIn2 Advan 143 


5162 AnIn2 Max 20.00mA 

5163 AnIn2 Bipol 20.00mA 








517 AnIn3 Fc Off 143 





5192 AnIn3 Max 20.00mA 

5193 AnIn3 Bipol 20.00mA 








51A AnIn4 Fc Off 144 

51B AnIn4 Setup 4-20mA 

51C AnIn4 Advan 

51C1 AnIn4 Min 4mA 

51C2 AnIn4 Max 20.00mA 

51C3 AnIn4 Bipol 20.00mA 

51C4 AnIn4 FcMin Min 

51C5 AnIn4 ValMin 0 

51C6 AnIn4 FcMax Max 

51C7 AnIn4 ValMax 0 

51C8 AnIn4 Oper Add+ 

51C9 AnIn4 Filt 0.1s 

51CA AnIn4 Enabl On 

520 Dig Inputs 141 

521 DigIn 1 RunL 

522 DigIn 2 RunR 






528 DigIn 8 Reset 

529 B(oard)1 DigIn 1 Off 

52A B(oard)1 DigIn 2 Off 

52B B(oard)1 DigIn 3 Off 

52C B(oard)2 DigIn 1 Off 

52D B(oard)2 DigIn 2 Off 

52E B(oard)2 DigIn 3 Off 

52F B(oard)3 DigIn 1 Off 

52G B(oard)3 DigIn 2 Off 

52H B(oard)3 DigIn 3 Off 

530 An Outputs 143 

531 AnOut1 Fc Speed 

532 AnOut1 Setup 4-20mA 

533 AnOut1 Adv 

5331 AnOut 1 Min 4mA 

5332 AnOut 1 Max 20.0mA 

5333 AnOut1Bipol -10.00-10.00 V 

5334 AnOut1 FcMin Min 

5335 AnOut1 VlMin 0 

5336 AnOut1 FcMax Max 

5337 AnOut1 VlMax 0 

534 AnOut2 FC Torque 

535 AnOut2 Setup 4-20mA 

536 AnOut2 Advan 

5361 AnOut 2 Min 4mA 

5362 AnOut 2 Max 20.0mA 



5363 AnOut2Bipol -10.00-10.00 V 

5364 AnOut2 FcMin Min 

5365 AnOut2 VlMin 0 

5366 AnOut2 FcMax Max 

5367 AnOut2 VlMax 0 

540 Dig Outputs 147 

541 DigOut 1 Ready 

542 DigOut 2 No Trip 

550 Relays 149 

551 Relay 1 Trip 

552 Relay 2 Run 

553 Relay 3 Off 

554 

B(oard)1 Relay 

1 

Off 

555 B1 Relay 2 Off 





55A B3 Relay 1 Off 

55B B3 Relay 2 Off 

55C B3 Relay 3 Off 

55D Relay Adv 

55D1 Relay 1 Mode N.O 



55D4 B1R1 Mode N.O 






55DA B3R1 Mode N.O 

55DB B3R2 Mode N.O 

55DC B3R3 Mode N.O 

560 Virtual I/Os 151 

561 VIO 1 Dest Off 

562 VIO 1 Source Off 








56A VIO 5 Source Off 

56B VIO 6 Dest Off 

56C VIO 6 Source Off 

56D VIO 7 Dest Off 

56E VIO 7 Source Off 

56F VIO 8 Dest Off 

56G VIO 8 Source Off 

600 Logical&Timers 152 

610 Comparators 

611 CA1 Setup 

6111 CA1 Value Speed 

6112 CA1 Level HI 300rpm 

6113 CA1 Level LO 200rpm 



6115 CA1 Polar Unipolar 

612 CA2 Setup 162 

6121 CA2 Value Torque 

6122 CA2 Level HI 20% 

6123 CA2 Level LO 10% 



613 CA3 Setup 159 

6131 CA3 Value Process Val 

6132 CA3 Level HI 300rpm 

6133 CA3 Level LO 200rpm 



614 CA4 Setup 160 

6141 CA4 Value Process Err 

6142 CA4 Level HI 100 rpm 

6143 CA4 Level LO - 100 rpm 

6144 CA4 Type Window 

6145 CA4 Polar Bipolar 

615 CD Setup 161 

6151 CD1 Run 

6152 CD2 DigIn 1 

6153 CD3 Trip 

6154 CD4 Ready 

620 Logic Output Y 162 

621 Y Comp 1 CA1 

622 Y Operator 1 & 

623 Y Comp 2 !A2 

624 Y Operator 2 & 

625 Y Comp 3 CD1 

630 Logic Z 164 

631 Z Comp 1 CA1 

632 Z Operator 1 & 

633 Z Comp2 !A2 

634 Z Operator 2 & 

635 Z Comp 3 CD1 

640 Timer1 165 

641 Timer1 Trig Off 

642 Timer1 Mode Off 

643 Timer1 Delay 0:00:00 

644 Timer 1 T1 0:00:00 

645 Timer1 T2 0:00:00 

649 Timer1 Value 0:00:00 

650 Timer2 167 

651 Timer2 Trig Off 

652 Timer2 Mode Off 

653 Timer2 Delay 0:00:00 

654 Timer 2 T1 0:00:00 

655 Timer2 T2 0:00:00 

659 Tmer2 Value 0:00:00 

660 Counters 

661 Counter 1 

6611 C1 Trig Off 

6612 C1 Reset Off 

6613 C1 High Val 0 

6614 C1 Low Val 0 

6615 C1 DecTimer Off 

216 Menu List CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1


6619 C1 Value 0 

662 Counter 2 

6621 C2 Trig Off 

6622 C2 Reset Off 

6623 C2 High Val 0 

6624 C2 Low Val 0 

6625 C2 DecTimer Off 

6629 C2 Value 0 

700 Oper/Status 172 

710 Operation 

711 Process Val 

712 Speed 

713 Torque 


715 Electrical Power 

716 Current 

717 Output volt 

718 Frequency 

719 DC Voltage 


71B PT100_1_2_3 

720 Status 174 

721 AC drive Status 

722 Warning 

723 DigIn Status 

724 DigOut Status 

725 AnIn Status 1-2 

726 AnIn Status 3-4 

727 

AnOut Status 1- 

2 

728 IO Status B1 

729 IO Status B2 

72A IO Status B3 

730 Stored Val 178 

731 Run Time 00:00:00 

7311 Reset RunTm No 

732 Mains Time 00:00:00 

733 Energy kWh 

7331 Rst Energy No 

800 View TripLog 

810 Trip Message (log list 1) 179 

811 Process Value 

812 Speed 

813 Torque 


815 Electrical Power 

816 Current 

817 Output voltage 

818 Frequency 

819 DC Link voltage 


81B PT100_1, 2, 3 

81C AC drive Status 

81D DigIn status 

81E DigOut status 

81F AnIn status 1 2 

81G AnIn status 3 4 

81H AnOut status 1 2 


81I IO Status B1 

81J IO Status B2 

81K IO Status B3 

81L Run Time 

81M Mains Time 

81N Energy 

81O Process reference 

820 Trip Message 821- 82O (log list 2) 180 

830 Trip Message 831 - 83O (log list 3) 







8A0 Reset Trip No 185 

900 System Data 

920 AC drive Data 181 

921 AC drive Type 

922 Software 

923 Unit name 0 


218 Menu List CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r1

Index 

A 

Abbreviations ...................................10 

Acceleration ...........................102, 105 

Acceleration ramp ...................105 

Acceleration time ....................102 

Ramp type ..............................105 

Alarm trip ......................................128 

Alternating MASTER ..48, 51, 52, 121 

Ambient temperature and derating 205 

Analogue comparators ...................152 

Analogue input ..............................134 

AnIn1 .....................................134 

AnIn2 .............................139, 140 

Offset .............................135, 144 

Analogue Output ...........143, 146, 212 

AnOut 1 .........................143, 146 

Output configuration .....144, 147 

AND operator ...............................162 

AnIn2 ............................................139 

AnIn3 ............................................140 

AnIn4 ............................................141 

Autoreset .......................4, 43, 85, 185 

B 

Baudrate ..............................61, 94, 95 

Brake chopper ................................192 

Brake function .......................107, 108 

Bake release time ....................107 

Brake ......................................108 

Brake Engage Time ................108 

Brake wait time ......................109 

Release speed ..........................108 

Vector Brake ...........................109 

Brake functions 

Frequency ...............................134 

Brake resistors ................................192 

C 

Cable cross-section .........................208 

Cable specifications ..........................24 

Cascade controller ............................47 

CE-marking .......................................9 

Change Condition .........................122 

Change Timer ...............................122 

Checklist ..........................................52 

Clockwise rotary field ....................141 

Com Type .......................................93 

Comparators ..................................152 

Connecting control signals ...............30 

Connections 

Brake chopper connections .......20 

Control signal connections .......30 

Mains supply ......................20, 33 

Motor earth ........................20, 33 

Motor output .....................20, 33 

Safety earth .........................20, 33 

Control panel ..................................57 

control panel ..................................191 

Control Panel memory 

Copy all settings to Control Panel . 

84 

Frequency ...............................134 

Control signal connections ...............30 

Control signals ...........................28, 31 

Edge-controlled ..................43, 72 

Level-controlled ..................43, 72 

Counter-clockwise rotary field .......141 

ctrical .............................................172 

Current ............................................28 

Current control (0-20mA) ...............32 

D 

DC-link residual voltage ....................4 

Deceleration ...................................103 

Deceleration time ...................103 

Ramp type ..............................105 

Declaration of Conformity .................9 

Default .............................................84 

Definitions .......................................10 

Derating .........................................205 

Digital comparators ........................152 

Digital inputs 

Board Relay ............................150 

DigIn 1 ...................................141 

DigIn 2 ...................................142 

DigIn 3 ...................................143 

Dismantling and scrapping ................9 

Display .............................................57 

Double-ended connection ................31 

Drive mode ......................................69 

Frequency ...............................134 

Drives on Change ..........................122 

E 

ECP ...............................................191 

Edge control ...............................43, 72 

Electrical specification ....................204 

EMC ................................................20 

Current control (0-20mA) ........32 

Double-ended connection .........31 

RFI mains filter .........................20 

Single-ended connection ...........31 

Twisted cables ...........................32 

Emergency stop ................................55 

EN60204-1 ........................................9 

EN61800-3 ........................................9 

EN61800-5-1 ....................................9 

Enable ................................42, 58, 141 

EtherCAT ................................63, 194 

EXOR operator ..............................162 

Expression ......................................162 

External Control Panel ...................191 

F 

Factory settings ................................ 84 

Fail safe ........................................... 49 

Fans ............................................... 121 

Feedback 'Status' input .................... 49 

Fieldbus ............................. 63, 94, 194 

Fixed MASTER ....................... 52, 121 

Flux optimization .......................... 115 

Frequency 

Frequency priority .................... 41 

Jog Frequency ........................ 113 

Maximum Frequency ............. 111 

Minimum Frequency ............. 111 

Preset Frequency .................... 116 

Skip Frequency ...................... 112 

Frequency priority ........................... 41 

Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands .. 

208 

G 

General electrical specifications ..... 204 

Global parameters ........................... 83 

H 

Hydrophore controller .................... 47 

I 

I/O Board ...................................... 193 

I/O board option ............................. 47 

I2t protection 

Motor I2t Current ............. 80, 81 

Motor I2t Type ........................ 79 

ID run ............................................. 76 

Identification Run ..................... 44, 76 

IEC269 ......................................... 208 

Industrial Ethernet .................. 63, 194 

Interrupt ............................. 95, 96, 97 

IT Mains supply ................................ 4 

IxR Compensation ........................ 114 

J 

Jog Frequency ............................... 113 

K 

Keyboard reference ........................ 117 

Keys ................................................ 58 

- Key ........................................ 60 

+ Key ....................................... 60 

Control keys ............................. 58 

ENTER key ............................. 60 

ESCAPE key ............................ 60 

Function keys ........................... 60 

NEXT key ................................ 60 

PREVIOUS key ....................... 60 

RUN L ..................................... 58 

RUN R .................................... 58 


STOP/RESET ..........................58 

Toggle Key ...............................59 

L 

LCD display ....................................57 

Level control ..............................43, 72 

Load default .....................................84 

Load monitor ...........................45, 128 

Local/Remote ..................................71 

Lock code ........................................71 

Long motor cables ...........................22 

Low Voltage Directive .......................9 

Lower Band ...................................123 

Lower Band Limit ..........................124 

M 

Machine Directive .............................9 

Main menu ......................................60 

Mains supply .......................20, 27, 33 

Maintenance ..................................189 

Manis cables ....................................19 

Max Frequency ......................102, 111 

Memory ...........................................44 

Menu 

(110) ........................................67 

(120) ........................................68 

(210) ........................................68 

(211) ........................................68 

(212) ........................................69 

(213) ........................................69 

(214) ........................................69 

(215) ........................................70 

(216) ........................................70 

(217) ........................................71 

(218) ........................................71 

(219) ........................................71 

(21A) ........................................72 

(21B) ........................................72 

(220) ........................................73 

(221) ........................................73 

(222) ........................................74 

(223) ........................................74 

(224) ........................................74 

(225) ........................................74 

(226) ........................................75 

(227) ........................................75 

(228) ........................................75 

(229) ........................................76 

(22A) ........................................76 

(22B) ........................................76 

(22C) ........................................77 

(22D) .......................................77 

(230) ........................................79 

(231) ........................................79 

(232) ........................................80 

(233) ........................................80 

(234) ........................................81 

(235) ........................................81 

(236) ........................................82 

(237) ........................................82 

(240) .........................................83 

(241) .........................................83 

(242) .........................................83 

(243) .........................................84 

(244) .........................................84 

(245) .........................................85 

(250) .........................................85 

(251) .........................................85 

(252) .........................................86 

(253) .........................................86 

(254) .........................................86 

(255) .........................................87 

(256) .........................................87 

(257) .........................................87 

(258) .........................................87 

(259) .........................................88 

(25A) ........................................88 

(25B) ........................................88 

(25C) ........................................88 

(25D) ........................................88 

(25E) ........................................89 

(25F) ........................................89 

(25G) ........................................89 

(25H) .......................................89 

(25I) .........................................90 

(25J) .........................................90 

(25K) ........................................90 

(25L) ........................................90 

(25M) .......................................91 

(25N) .................................85, 91 

(25O) .......................................91 

(25P) ........................................91 

(25Q) .......................................91 

(25R) ........................................92 

(25S) .........................................92 

(25T) ........................................92 

(25U) ........................................92 

(260) .........................................93 

(261) .........................................93 

(262) .........................................93 

(2621) .......................................94 

(2622) .......................................94 

(263) .........................................94 

(2631) .......................................94 

(2632) .......................................94 

(2633) .......................................95 

(2634) .......................................95 

(264) .........................................95 

(265) .........................................96 

(269) .........................................97 

(310) .........................................97 

(320) .........................................98 

(321) .........................................98 

(322) .........................................99 

(323) .........................................99 

(324) .......................................100 

(325) .......................................100 

(326) .......................................101 

(327) .......................................101 

(328) .......................................101 

(331) ...................................... 102 

(332) ...................................... 103 

(333) ...................................... 103 

(334) ...................................... 103 

(335) ...................................... 104 

(336) ...................................... 104 

(337) ...................................... 105 

(338) ...................................... 105 

(339) ...................................... 105 

(33A) ..................................... 106 

(33B) ...................................... 106 

(33C) ..................................... 107 

(33D) ..................................... 108 

(33E) ...................................... 108 

(33F) ...................................... 109 

(33G) ..................................... 109 

(33H1) ................................... 109 

(341) ...................................... 111 

(342) ...................................... 111 

(343) ...................................... 111 

(344) ...................................... 112 

(345) ...................................... 112 

(346) ...................................... 113 

(347) ...................................... 113 

(348) ...................................... 113 

(351) ...................................... 113 

(354) ...................................... 115 

(361) ...................................... 116 

(362) ...................................... 116 

(363) ...................................... 116 

(364) ...................................... 116 

(365) ...................................... 116 

(366) ...................................... 116 

(367) ...................................... 116 

(368) ...................................... 116 

(369) ...................................... 117 

(380) ...................................... 117 

(381) ...................................... 117 

(383) ...................................... 117 

(384) ...................................... 118 

(385) ...................................... 118 

(386) ...................................... 118 

(387) ...................................... 119 

(388) ...................................... 120 

(389) ...................................... 120 

(391) ...................................... 121 

(392) ...................................... 121 

(393) ...................................... 121 

(394) ...................................... 122 

(395) ...................................... 122 

(396) ...................................... 122 

(398) ...................................... 123 

(399) ...................................... 123 

(39A) ..................................... 124 

(39B) ...................................... 124 

(39C) ..................................... 124 

(39D) ..................................... 125 

(39E) ...................................... 125 

(39F) ...................................... 126 

(39G) ..................................... 126 


(39H-39M) ............................127 

(410) ......................................128 

(411) ......................................128 

(412) ......................................128 

(413) ......................................128 

(414) ......................................129 

(415) ......................................129 

(416) ......................................129 

(4162) ....................................130 

(417) ......................................130 

(4171) ....................................130 

(4172) ....................................130 

(418) ......................................130 

(4181) ....................................130 

(4182) ....................................131 

(419) ......................................131 

(4191) ....................................131 

(4192) ....................................131 

(41A) ......................................131 

(41B) ......................................132 

(41C) ......................................132 

(421) ......................................133 

(422) ......................................133 

(423) ......................................133 

(424) ......................................134 

(511) ......................................134 

(512) ......................................135 

(513) ......................................136 

(514) ......................................139 

(515) ......................................139 

(516) ......................................139 

(517) ......................................140 

(518) ......................................140 

(519) ......................................140 

(51A) ......................................140 

(51B) ......................................141 

(51C) ......................................141 

(521) ..............................109, 141 

(522) ......................................142 

(529-52H) ..............................143 

(531) ......................................143 

(532) ......................................144 

(533) ......................................144 

(534) ......................................146 

(535) ......................................147 

(536) ......................................147 

(541) ......................................147 

(542) ......................................149 

(551) ......................................149 

(552) ......................................149 

(553) ......................................150 

(55D) .....................................150 

(561) ......................................151 

(562) ......................................151 

(563-56G) ..............................151 

(610) ......................................152 

(6111) ....................................152 

(6112) ....................................154 

(6113) ....................................156 

(6114) ....................................156 

(6115) .....................................157 

(6121) .....................................157 

(6122) .....................................158 

(6123) .....................................158 

(6124) .....................................158 

(6125) .....................................158 

(6131) .....................................159 

(6132) .....................................159 

(6133) .....................................159 

(6134) .....................................159 

(6135) .....................................160 

(6141) .....................................160 

(6142) .....................................160 

(6143) .....................................160 

(6144) .....................................161 

(6145) .....................................161 

(6151) .....................................161 

(6152) .....................................161 

(6153) .....................................162 

(6154) .....................................162 

(620) .......................................162 

(621) ...............................162, 163 

(622) ...............................162, 163 

(623) ...............................162, 163 

(624) .......................................162 

(625) .......................................162 

(630) .......................................164 

(631) .......................................164 

(632) .......................................164 

(633) .......................................165 

(634) .......................................165 

(635) .......................................165 

(640) .......................................165 

(641) .......................................166 

(642) .......................................166 

(643) .......................................166 

(644) .......................................166 

(645) .......................................167 

(649) .......................................167 

(650) .......................................167 

(651) .......................................167 

(652) .......................................167 

(653) .......................................168 

(654) .......................................168 

(655) .......................................168 

(659) .......................................168 

(711) .......................................172 

(712) .......................................172 

(713) .......................................172 

(714) .......................................172 

(715) .......................................172 

(716) .......................................173 

(717) .......................................173 

(718) .......................................173 

(719) .......................................173 

(71A) ......................................174 

(71B) ......................................174 

(720) .......................................174 

(721) .......................................174 

(722) .......................................175 

(723) ...................................... 176 

(724) ...................................... 176 

(725) ...................................... 176 

(726) ...................................... 176 

(727) ...................................... 177 

(728-72A) .............................. 177 

(730) ...................................... 178 

(731) ...................................... 178 

(7311) .................................... 178 

(732) ...................................... 178 

(733) ...................................... 178 

(7331) .................................... 179 

(800) ...................................... 179 

(810) ...................................... 179 

(811-81N) .............................. 180 

(820) ...................................... 180 

(830) ...................................... 180 

(8A0) ..................................... 180 

(900) ...................................... 181 

(920) ...................................... 181 

(922) ...................................... 182 

33F ........................................ 109 

616 ........................................ 158 

Minimum Frequency .................... 104 

Modbus ........................................... 63 

Modbus/TCP .......................... 63, 194 

Monitor function 

Alarm Select ........................... 132 

Auto set .................................. 131 

Delay time ............................. 129 

Max Alarm ............................. 128 

Overload .......................... 45, 128 

Ramp Enable ......................... 128 

Response delay ....... 129, 130, 132 

Start delay .............................. 129 

Motor cables .................................... 20 

Motor cos phi (power factor) ........... 75 

Motor data ...................................... 73 

Motor frequency ............................. 74 

Motor I2t Current ......................... 186 

Motor identification run ................. 76 

Motor Lost ...................................... 87 

Motor lost ..................................... 133 

Motor Potentiometer ............ 116, 141 

Motor potentiometer ..................... 141 

Motor PTC ......................... 29, 30, 82 

Motor ventilation ............................ 75 

Motors .............................................. 7 

Motors in parallel ............................ 25 

MotPot .......................................... 103 

Multi-motor application .................. 69 

N 

Nominal motor frequency ............. 111 

Number of drives .......................... 121 

O 

Operation ........................................ 68 

Options ................................... 32, 191 

Brake chopper ........................ 192 


External Control Panel (ECP) 191 

I/O Board ...............................193 

OR operator ..................................162 

Output chokes ...............................197 

Output Voltage .............................173 

Overload ..................................45, 128 

Overload alarm ................................45 

P 

Parameter sets 

Load default values ...................84 

Load parameter sets from Control 

Panel ........................................85 

Parameter Set Selection ............39 

Select a Parameter set ................83 

PID control .....................................50 

PID Controller ..............................117 

Closed loop PID control .........118 

Feedback signal .......................117 

PID D Time ...........................118 

PID I Time ............................118 

PID P Gain ............................117 

Priority ............................................41 

Process Protection ..........................133 

Process Value .................................172 

Product standard, EMC .....................8 

Programming ...................................61 

PT100 Inputs ..................................82 

PTC input .......................................81 

Pump size ........................................52 

Pump/Fan Control ........................121 

Q 

Quick Setup Card ..............................7 

R 

Reference 

Frequency ...............................133 

Motor potentiometer ..............141 

Reference signal ..................69, 97 

Set reference value ....................97 

Torque ...................................133 

View reference value .................97 

Reference control .............................69 

Reference signal .........................69, 70 

Relay output ..................................149 

Relay 1 ...................................149 

Relay 2 ...................................149 

Relay 3 ...................................150 

Release speed .................................108 

Remote control ................................42 

Reset command .............................141 

Reset control ....................................70 

Resolution .......................................67 

RFI mains filter ...............................20 

Rotation ..........................................71 

RS232/485 ......................................93 

RUN ...............................................58 

Run command .................................58 

Run Left command ........................141 

Run Right command .....................141 

Running motor ..............................106 

S 

Select Drive ....................................121 

Settle Time ....................................125 

Setup menu ......................................60 

Menu structure .........................60 

Shaft power ....................................172 

Signal ground .................................212 

Single-ended connection ..................31 

Software .........................................182 

Sound characteristic .........................76 

Speed .............................................172 

Spinstart .........................................106 

Standards ...........................................8 

Standby supply board .....................194 

Start Delay .....................................123 

Start/Stop settings ..........................102 

Status indications .............................57 

Stop categories .................................55 

Stop command ...............................141 

Stop Delay .....................................124 

Stripping lengths ..............................24 

Switches ...........................................28 

Switching frequency .........................76 

Switching in motor cables ................22 

T 

Technical Data ...............................199 

Terminal connections ......................28 

Test Run ..........................................76 

Timer .............................................122 

Torque ...........................................113 

Transition Frequency .....................125 

Trip .................................................58 

Trip causes and remidial action ......184 

Trip Message log ............................179 

Trips, warnings and limits ..............183 

Twisted cables ..................................32 

Type code number .............................7 

U 

Underload ........................................45 

Underload alarm ............................128 

Unlock Code ...................................71 

Upper Band ...................................123 

Menu 

(397) 123 

Upper Band Limit ..........................124 

V 

V/Hz Mode .....................................69 

Vector Brake ..................................109 

Ventilation .......................................75 

View reference value .........................97 

Voltage .............................................28 

VSD Data ......................................181 

W 

Wiring ............................................. 51 


CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB 

Mörsaregatan 12 

01-5323-01r1 

Box 222 25 

SE-250 24 Helsingborg 

set: 

Sweden 

T +46 42 16 99 00 

F +46 42 16 99 49 

www.emotron.com/www.cgglobal.com Document 

Instruction manual, 01-5325-01r1 

Quick setup card, 01-5327-01r0 

2012-07-02

Instruction manual - Emotron

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?